Stockton Camera Club · 2018-09-06 · Stockton Camera Club The Shutter Tripper October2014 Hummer...

23
Hummer in Silhouette Class B Image of the Month – Christine Blue Delightful Class AA Image of the Month - Trey Steinhart Damselfly Class A Image of the Month - Ricardo Mendoza

Transcript of Stockton Camera Club · 2018-09-06 · Stockton Camera Club The Shutter Tripper October2014 Hummer...

Page 1: Stockton Camera Club · 2018-09-06 · Stockton Camera Club The Shutter Tripper October2014 Hummer in Silhouette ... Stockton, CA 95202-2706 Phone: 209-464-2299 | Fax: 209-464-9229

Stockton Camera ClubThe Shutter Tripper October2014

Hummer in SilhouetteClass B Image of the Month ndash Christine Blue

DelightfulClass AA Image of the Month - Trey Steinhart

DamselflyClass A Image of the Month - Ricardo Mendoza

2

Apple DelightClass A Print of the Month - Elizabeth Parrish

Dandelion SeedsClass AA Print of the Month - Joanne Sogsti

3

Eye of the RoseDean Taylor

Flower and SpiderHeide Stover

The Doors into the FutureTrey Steinhart

Lightbulb HatRicardo Mendoza

4

SF SkylineCristine Blue

Pt Reyes BoatSharon McLemore

Spiral StaircaseGary Brown

DelicateKris Borgen

Myyyy Petals are Prettier than Yourrrr Wings

Trey Steinhart

Stratified SandstoneDean Taylor

5

Monarch ButterflyMac McCormick

Morning SongCarol Marshall

FlowDean Taylor

SunsetRicardo Mendoza

Thunderstorm over Lake TahoeSuzanne Nichols

Praying MantisHeide Stover

SCC Officers 2014OfficersPresidentHeide StoverEmail h1stoveraolcom

Vice President ProgramsSharon McLemore 401-0192 Email sfmsapaolcom

Vice President CompetitionAddy Street 403-8349Email sccsubmitgmailcom

SecretaryEm McLaren 823-7287emmclarencomcastnet

TreasurerJanelle DeRuosi 838-1881Email jderuosiphotographygmailcom

Committee Chairs

Activities ChairpersonJoanne Sogsti 663-7044Email Stanjoanneaolcom

Education ChairpersonMike Clipka 858-5198 Email mcphotosjunocom

Hospitality ChairpersonDebra GoinsEmail knollstreetphotographygmailcom

Print Competition Chairperson Trey Steinhart 471-8438Email Steinhart4sbcglobalnet

Refreshments Chairperson Sheldon McCormick 931-0461Emailsmccormickclearwirenet

Shutter Tripper Doug Ridgway 617-7050Email doug_flyfisheryahoocom

Web MasterJanelle DeRuosi 838-1881Email jderuosiphotographygmailcom

6

Presidentrsquos MessageOctober 2014By Heide Stover

Welcome to all the new members and returning members It is good to see people interested in the club and our activities I would like to ask all members to try and help each other when possible and in particular letrsquos help the new members New members feel free to contact me with questions If I cannot help I will try to find someone that can

For those of you not aware of this at 530 pm on the night of our competition meeting Sharon and the person judging that evening have dinner in the coffee shop Any member is welcome to join in You do need to pay for your own meal though

I will be working on setting up our year end banquet at Spaghetti Factory soon Those of you with special dietary needs please let me know so I can do my best to accommodate you

The Sandhill Cranes should be showing up soon and are wonderful to watch and listen to as well as photograph Other migrating birds well be around as well And the Sandhill Crane Festival is coming up Keep that in mind when you are out shooting

As most of you know I have cancer and will be going through chemo for the next 4 weeks I will still do the best I can to answer any questions but please be patient if I do not answer right away For digital entries you can also contact Addy or Sharon Dean or Sharon can help with questions about the Camera Club Council in Fresno Those of us going to Fresno for the meeting can take down any prints or forms for those that would like to enter but cannot go down there

Get out there and shoot

Heide

219 E Weber Ave (Across From The Court House)Stockton CA 95202-2706

Phone 209-464-2299 | Fax 209-464-9229wwwulmerphotocom

Email Ulmerphotoaolcom

A Big Thank You to Our Sponsors

7

Septemberrsquos Monthly Meetingby Em Mclaren

Heide opened the meeting and Debra introduced guests and welcomed Don West and Rick Mendoza as recent new members

1 Heide asked for people to volunteer for the nominating committee Debra Elizaberth and Susanne volunteered

2 Joanne reminded people about the Renaissance Fair at Casa De Fruita which has started and runs thru Oct 12 It is $25 per person and $10 parking You can register on line She plans to go on Sat Oct4 If you want to carpool please let her know There will be lots of photo opportunities and on that day only a costume conteststanjoanneaolcom

3 Heide congratulated all our club winners at the Lodi Grape Festival

4 Janelle said there will be a photo walk Oct 11 Sat evening in Modesto Please contact her for further details or if you would like more information waynelle726sbcglobalnet

5 Sharon announced that the FotoClave will be held at the Hilton Hotel in Concord on Nov 7-9th It is $70 to attend plus extra to attend the banquet There will be great speakers and a good opportunity to meet members from other clubs in the area This may be the last FotoClave to be held For more info or to register go to FotoClaveslickpiccom

6 Sharon introduced Rich Turner as our judge for the photo competition He has been a photographer for several newspapers including the Stockton Record and now has his own photography business He has done work for the corporate world and is passionate about photographing the San Joaquin Delta He has a new book out about the California Delta and will have a photo show in 2015 which will travel around California on exhibit for 2 years He also is doing photo essays He brought his photo note cards sets to give to tonightrsquos competition winners He presented a brief show of his work before the judging began If you would like to find out more info about him or his new book please go to richtturnerphotocom

DIGITAL COMPETITION WINNERS FOR SEPT

BEGINNERS ldquoHummer in Silhouetterdquo by Christine BlueADVANCED ldquoDamselflyrdquo by Ricardo Mendoza

VERY ADVANCED ldquoDelightfulrdquo by Trey Steinhart

PRINT COMPETITION WINNERS FOR SEPT

BEGINNERS None entered in this categoryADVANCED ldquoApple Delightrdquo by Elizabeth Parrish

VERY ADVANCED Dandelion Seedsrdquo by Joann Sogsti

Congratulations to all the winners

The Special Subject for October will be NATURE

Please let me know if there are any corrections or additions to the notes Thanks Em McLaren

8

Stockton Camera ClubMonthly Competition - September 2014

DIGITAL COMPETITION WINNERS FOR SEPT

BEGINNERS ldquoHummer in Silhouetterdquo by Christine BlueADVANCED ldquoDamselflyrdquo by Ricardo Mendoza

VERY ADVANCED ldquoDelightfulrdquo by Trey Steinhart

PRINT COMPETITION WINNERS FOR SEPT

BEGINNERS None entered in this categoryADVANCED ldquoApple Delightrdquo by Elizabeth Parrish

VERY ADVANCED Dandelion Seedsrdquo by Joann SogstiPlease check out the to view the images that received the top scores wwwstockton-cameraclubcom

September 2014 - Class B TOTAL OPEN SUBJECT FEB MAR MAY JULY SEPT OCT DECSusanne Nichols 223 168 55 46 45 43 44 45 0 0Shari Liwanag 172 128 43 46 44 40 42 0 0 0Adrianne Street 172 128 43 43 42 40 47 0 0 0Christine Blue 133 98 35 46 43 0 0 44 0 0Jim Cahill 75 75 0 32 11 32 0 0 0 0Bret Hunter 45 34 11 45 0 0 0 0 0 0Ron Wetherell 45 22 23 0 23 0 22 0Pete Alameda 43 32 11 0 0 0 43 0 0 0Lanny Brown 21 10 11 0 0 0 0 21 0 0

September 2014 - Class A TOTAL OPEN SS FEB MAR MAY JULY SEPT OCT DECKris Borgen 219 165 54 46 43 44 43 43 0 0Gary Brown 215 161 54 44 44 42 42 43 0 0Sheldon McCormick 208 155 53 43 42 40 41 42 0 0Debra Goins 208 165 43 34 43 45 44 42 0 0Elizabeth Parrish 204 163 41 34 44 42 40 44 0 0Mike Clipka 126 95 31 0 0 42 43 41 0 0

Karleen Gansberg 95 64 31 0 44 41 0 10 0 0Charlene Martin 47 35 12 47 0 0 0 0 0 0Ricardo Mendoza 46 36 10 0 0 0 0 46 0 0Jim Wells 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Kim Romena 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Paula Wells 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Danny Ho 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Stockton Camera ClubMonthly Competition - September 2014

(Continued)

September 2014 - Class AA TOTAL OPEN SUBJECT FEB MAR MAY JULY SEPT OCT DECSharon McLemore 230 173 57 47 46 46 46 45 0 0Carol Marshall 225 169 56 45 46 45 46 43 0 0Joanne Sogsti 222 168 54 45 46 43 44 44 0 0Heide Stover 222 167 55 44 45 45 44 44 0 0Em McLaren 220 166 54 45 45 43 45 42 0 0Doug Ridgway 219 175 44 47 46 46 33 47 0 0Stan Sogsti 217 162 56 44 44 44 42 43 0 0Dean Taylor 186 140 46 0 46 46 47 47 0 0Trey Steinhart 180 136 44 46 0 44 44 46 0 0Janelle DeRuosi 43 32 11 0 0 0 0 43 0 0Elliott Pasinsky 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

9

Nikon Legend Behind the Lens

Tony Sweet

Canon Explorer of Light

Rick Sammon

Michael Frye

Joe Hearst

Gary Crabbe

Eric Harness

Gail Pierce

John Ballou

Lisa Rigge

Pat Toth-Smith

Michael Maloney

November 7 8 amp 9 2014

An Astounding Weekend of Photography

Renowned photographers will engage you with information on new and lesser-known techniques and incredible images From our keynote

speakers Nikon Legend Tony Sweet and Canon Explorer of Light Rick Sammon to an additional nine presenters in three rooms on

Saturday you will be inspired and entertained In addition at FotoClave we will show the results of the competition among

members of participating camera club councils

fotoclave 2014

Join Us for FotoClave 2014 Hilton Concord Hotel 1970 Diamond Blvd Concord CA 94520

Sponsored by N4C

2014 Calendar of Events

10

Every 3rd Thursday(Except April June amp

Aug) 630 PM

West Lane Bowling AlleyStockton

Membership MeetingContact Heide Stover

h1stoveraolcom

ThursdayOctober 16

West Lane Bowling AlleyStockton

October General MeetingSpecial Subject - Nature

ThursdayNovember 6

Cottage RoomHutchins Street Square

Lodi CA

Drop Off EntriesSandhill Crane Festival

Friday - SundayNovember 7 8 amp 9

Cottage RoomHutchins Street Square

Lodi CA

2014 Sandhill Crane Festivalwwwcranefestivalcom

Friday - SundayNovember 7 8 amp 9

Hilton Concord Hotel1970 Diamond BlvdConcord CA 94520

FotoClave 2014fotoclaveslickpiccom

SundayDecember 7 2014

Crowne Plaza Sacramento5321 Date Avenue

(I-80 Madison Ave)Sacramento Ca

Photographic Society of AmericaGold Rush Chapter Meeting

wwwpsagoldrushorg

ThursdayDecember 18

West Lane Bowling AlleyStockton

December General MeetingSpecial Subject - Travel

A GENERAL RULES1 Only paid-up members may enter club competition 2 Regular print and digital image competition period Once each month except January A competition year is February through December Current regular meetings are February March May July September October and December The number of meetings may change from time to time at the discretion of the Board of Directors and approval of the general membership as facilities permit The Annual Awards Dinner will be held in January3 A total of four (4) images (all prints all digital or a combination of both) may be entered each competition month A total of three (3) images may be entered in the Open Division and a total of one (1) in the Special Subject Division The number of entries may change from time to time at the discretion of the Board of Directors and the approval of the general membership 4 Each image will be scored from 6 to 12 points All prints or digital images receiving 11 or 12 points will be classed as an honor image The title of each print or digital image entered will be read before being evaluated The name of the maker will be read for 11-point honor winners Makerrsquos names will be announced for the 12 point images after the Print amp Digital Image-of-the-Month winners are chosen 5 A print or digital image that does not receive an honor score may be re-entered one more time in the same division 6 A print or digital image may be entered in all divisions for which it qualifies ie an honor image in Open may also be entered in the Special Subject Division at another competition A print or digital image that receives an honor score may not be re-entered in the same division7 Any print or digital image that appears to be ineligible for competition or not qualified for a specific division could expect to be challenged The Competition Vice-President shall decide whether or not the image is acceptable8 The exhibitor must have exposed each negative slide or digital image entered All images submitted for judging must be the work of the photographermaker including the taking of the images and any digital enhancements andor manipulation of the image This does not apply to the processing of film or printing by a commercial processor9 The same image should not be entered both as a print and a projected digital image in the same competition10 In the event of absence or barring unforeseen circumstances a member may submit make-up prints or digital images for one competition night per competition year and whenever possible must submit all make-up prints or digital images at the meeting immediately following the month a member failed or was unable to submit the prints or digital images Make-ups in the Special Subject Division must be the same subject as the month missed Also in case of absence a member may assign the responsibility of submitting his or her prints andor digital images for competition to another member11 A club member who serves as judge cannot enter his or her own prints or digital images in the same competition The judgersquos make-up prints or digital images can then be entered in another competition during that competition year This

11

2014 Competition Policy

is in addition to the once-a-year make-up provision already allowed12 Prints or digital images may be projectedviewed briefly before the judging of each division if the judge indicates heshe would like a preview

B PRINT ENTRY RULES1 Each print entered must have a completed label attached to the back of the print including name of maker title date entered and Division (Open or Special Subject) The writing or printing on the form must be legible Labels must be attached on the back of the print in the upper left-hand corner for correct viewing of the print2 All prints must be matted or mounted with a total size (including mat board) of no larger than 18rdquo X 24rdquo and no smaller than 8rdquo X 10rdquo Exception One side of a Panorama Print may be no larger than 36rdquo Prints that are smaller than 5rdquo X 7rdquo will not be accepted The makerrsquos name must not appear on the viewing surface of the image Framed prints shall not be entered3 Prints accompanied by entry forms should be submitted no later than 15 minutes prior to the start of the regular monthly meeting4 Prints receiving a score of 12 points in each class will be regrouped and judged for selection for the Print-of-the-Month honors Print-of-the-Month honors will be given in both Class A amp B C DIGITAL IMAGE ENTRY RULES1 Digital images must be submitted in a format and by the deadline specified by the Competition Vice-President Digital images may be submitted by email mailed (CD) or delivered (CD) to the Competition Vice-President Definition of Digital Image An image taken with a digital camera a negative slide or print scanned into the computer and processed digitally2 Images must be in a format compatible with the projector The key thing to keep in mind when formatting photos for submission is that the projector we use in the competition has a (maximum) resolution of 1024 x 768 pixels This means that any photo that exceeds this size in either dimension could end-up being cropped by the projector In other words the image width cannot be more than 1024 pixels and the image height cannot be more than 768 pixels If your image is horizontal only change the width to 1024 if your image is vertical only change the height to 768 Do not change both Down-sizing the image from the ldquonativerdquo resolution coming out of your camera also significantly reduces the file size This helps when emailing the files and takes-up less space on our hard-drives3 The makerrsquos name title of image date entered and division (Open or Special Subject) must be included as the title of the image When you have finished re-sizing your image save your image with a new title For example do a Save as Smith_Sunrise Splendor_05-13_Ojpeg (O-Open or SS-Special Subject) Specify whether you are Beginner or Advanced4 Digital Images receiving a score of 12 points in each class will be regrouped and judged for selection for the Digital Image-of-the-Month honors Digital Image-of-the-Month honors will be given in Class A AA amp B

Mike Clipkandash Education ChairpersonOctober 2014

How to Colorize Old (Black amp White) Photo ndash Photoshop TutorialBy Manesh K Filed in photoshop

Photo Edit Download wwwmyimageconvertercomBrowse Edit amp Convert Images Across Any Image Format - Get App

Today we are going to do some photo manipulation with Photoshop In the tutorial below we are going to guide you through patching up spots in an old black amp white photo and then colorizing it

First wersquoll run you through on removing white patches from photo and then wersquoll proceed to coloring it The steps are pretty standard Load up your Photoshop and off we goTo follow through the entire tutorial we suggest you download and use the following image

Step 1 Wersquoll start by removing the white patches on the image Choose Clone Stamp Tool and by pressing Alt key pick the plain and appropriate surface near all white patches and apply it on white patch Continue this process until all patches get removedAfter removing all patches your poor image will look clean as shown in image

12

Clipkarsquos CornerEducation Articles by Mike Clipka

13

Step 2Next wersquoll proceed with coloring the image It would be bad idea to colorize the image as a whole wersquoll do them one by one an object at a timeFirst wersquoll select the hat by making the use of Magnetic Lasso Tool ndash like this

Step 3To colorize it we will use the Hue and Saturation (HSL) option There are many ways to colorize an object but HSL is perhaps one of the easiest and most flexible

Proceeding to colorizing the hat add these values to the (HSL) 360 35 ndash 26 appropriately (While using HSL on that window do not forget to turn on Colorize option)

Step 4After applying color the hat may look a little plain Letrsquos add some Noise to it Select Filters -gt Noise -gt Add Noise and give amount ldquo5rdquo to it

Check Monochromatic option to get a smoother noise effect See the next image for its differences

Step 5Next the coat The process is same ndash only different HSL values which are respectively 42 10 ndash 63

To make the overall look of coat more natural instead of using Noise tool we take advantage of Grain Texture option You can find it under Filter -gt Filter Gallery -gt in Texture tab -gt Grain

Select the following options ndash Intensity ldquo10rdquo Contrast ldquo50rdquo and Grain Type ldquoSoftrdquo

14

Step 6Moving forward ndash the shoes To give shoes a shiny effect we are going to use Image menu -gt Adjustments -gt Variations Select ldquoMidtonesrdquo and click Ok Try some combination of CMYK colors until you get a boot of this color

Step 7Next up the door First letrsquos color the door borders Select one side border of door by using Rectangle Marquee Tool Add 15 45 -53 values in HSL tool Then select Filter -gt Filter Gallery -gt in Texture tab -gt select Grain option and keep Intensity ldquo12rdquo Contrast ldquo50rdquo select Grain type ldquoEnlargedrdquo

Follow the same procedure to all the borders of the door

Step 8Next we proceed to coloring rectangles between the doors with the following HSL values55 20 -26 and in Texture Grain keep intensity ldquo12rdquo contrast ldquo50rdquo and Grain type ldquoEnlargedrdquo Step 9Wersquoll wrap up coloring the door by adding colors to the borders HSL values of 25 7 -69 Then under Texture Grain keep Intensity ldquo12rdquo Contrast ldquo50rdquo and letrsquos add extra noise by selecting Grain type ldquoRegularrdquo Step 10After the door we proceed coloring the soil To color the soil select that portion by usingMagic Wand Tool and then keep HSL values 20 24 -56

Step 11Last but not least we will color the wooden background of the image To give it a it a wood look and feel we give it a HSL value of 31 53 -45 and then add Noise ldquo5rdquo by checking theMonochromatic option

After all this procedures finally you will see the output like this

Color CorrectionWe are done coloring the image Now we proceed to the final and most important part ndash color correction Color correction when done right will give the image its correct mood and make it more realistic

To increase the brightness of the image we go to the following option Image menu -gt Adjustments -gt Curves and add ldquo186rdquo for Output and ldquo164rdquo for Input

Letrsquos brighten up the following section of the image (where arrow in pointed to) First we select the portion with Rectangle Marquee tool Then go to Filter -gt Filter Gallery -gt Distort tab and select Diffuse Glow with the following values Graininess ldquo0rdquo Glow Amount ldquo11rdquo Clear Amount ldquo15rdquo And finally proceed to Image menu -gt Adjustments -gt Curves and add ldquo200rdquo for Ouptut and ldquo188rdquo for Input Follow the above process for the remaining parts of image but with different values inDiffuse Glow Graininess ldquo2rdquo Glow Amount ldquo5rdquo Clear Amount ldquo15rdquo Curvesrsquo not required

To darken the shadows of the hat and the coat letrsquos use the Burn Tool and by selectingRange Midtones and decreasing the Exposure value to ldquo20rdquo apply it on shadows part appropriately

Wersquoll use the Dodge Tool to brighten up the coat and hat so it looks as though the lights are coming in from the right side and to give a sense of thickness for the door borders we use the Burn Tool

And herersquos how your final output will look like (or similar) after some color corrections Editorrsquos note This post is written by Manesh K for Hongkiatcom Manesh is an Animator by profession and owner of Howtouse-photoshopcom where he helps people present their creativity digitally with Photoshop tutorials and useful resources

Herersquos a link to a 7+ minute You Tube tutorial on coloring Black amp White photos in Photoshophttpwwwyoutubecomwatchv=C2Srw245R7U

The Sunny f16 Rule for Digital Exposure By Jim Doty Jr

Part of the Digital Photography Exposure For Dummies Cheat SheetThe sunny f16 rule or Basic Daylight Exposure (BDE for short) tells you that the proper exposure in digital photography for a front lit subject is f16 with a shutter speed of 1ISO (thatrsquos 1 over the ISO in use) According to the sunny f16 rule at ISO 100 BDE would be f16 at 1100 second and at ISO 200 BDE would be f16 at 1200 second

When taking photos on a bright sunny day set the ISO of your camera to 100 the aperture to f16 and the shutter to 1100 second Then go out and take pictures of some front lit subjects As long as your subject isnrsquot white or black the exposures should be great No metering necessary

You can use equivalent exposures (different combinations of apertures shutter speeds and ISO settings that provide exactly the same exposure) for the sunny f16 rule The following table shows the equivalent exposures for the sunny f16 rule at ISO 100

Equivalent Exposures for the Sunny f16 Rule at ISO 100Aperture Shutter Speedf22 150 secondf16 1100 secondf11 1200 secondf8 1400 secondf56 1800 secondf4 11600 secondf28 13200 second

WHAT IS ldquoKEYSTONINGrdquo amp ldquoPINCUSIONrdquo Will be covered in my next article

NATURE PHOTOGRAPHY ndash BASIC DEFINITION

There should be no hand of man in a nature photo unless it relates to the subject The only one that was ever accepted was showing an injured bird that had been taken care of and recovered and was being released into the wild

I wonrsquot be at the October meeting as I will be visiting family in Indiana Have a good meeting

MIKE CLIPKA ndash EDUCATION CHAIRPERSON

16

17

Classes Start Oct 3rdSign Up Now wwwppsopcom

An Idiom For Photographersby Joe Baraban

Before I go any farther let me define the word Idiom An idiom is (1) An expression that cannot be understood from the meanings of its separate words but that has a separate meaning of its own (2) A form of a language that is spoken in a particular area and that uses some of its own words grammar and pronunciations

Here are some common idioms Sunday week for a week from Sunday Give way for retreat and Rock and Roll is a musical idiom The one Ive always thought was especially pertinent to photography and one I mention in my online class with the PPSOP and also in my Stretching Your Frame of Mind workshops I conduct around the planet is Theres more to it than meets the eye

In other words I tell my fellow photographers that theres two ways to look at a subject You can look at it with the left side of your brain the analytical side or the right side of your brain the creative side So many of my students dont look at things as they could be only as they are

Doing that will keep you from taking your photography to what I refer to asup a notch What I mean is that looking with the left side of your brain will only show you what things are Looking at those same things with the right side of your brain can show you what they could be Take the photo above for example

First allow me to digress for a moment I teach photographers how to use the basic elements of Visual Design and composition to create stronger images A complete description can be read by clicking on the link above

Ok so last week I was sitting in my backyard on my deck it was the end of a beautiful day Seventy two degrees and sunny so I had my book in one hand and my Bombay Martini and a bowl of nuts at the ready and close to my other hand I was trying to filter out all the sounds of a house being built next to us and occasionally looking up at what was going on The sun was setting behind the house that was next door and behind me and as the sun was setting the light was slowly disappearing from the bottom up leaving only the top part still in sunlight

If I had been looking at the house with the left side of my brain I would have only heard the incessant hammering and then seen the man working at the top of the house that was causing itthats what was Since Im always looking at things as they could be I saw more than just a house with a man working on the top floor I saw the Texture of the Crape Myrtles branches still bare from the Winter The square and rectangular Shapes and the blue Negative Space that defines and creates the Shapes Im always looking for ways to create Visual Tension and placing the man close to the edge of the frame is one of the ways The way the light is only left at the top of the construction is another and the contrast between his bright saturated red shirt against the soft blue sky and clouds is still another These elements of Visual Design and composition are all pieces that make up the finished puzzleanother idiom meaning the final photograph

Visit my website at wwwjoebarabancom and be sure to watch for upcoming workshops listed at the top of this blog Come shoot with me sometime and Ill show you what could be Dont forget to send me a photo and question to AskJoeBgmailcom - JoeB

18

Itrsquos All About the LightBy Kathleen Clemons

ldquoMy first thought is always of lightrdquo ~ Galen Rowell

I got my start in photography shooting sunrises from my front lawn back in 2003 Though my subject and location were limited they taught me much about the qualities of light and how quickly they change A gentle hint from Bryan Peterson (I was taking his online Understanding Exposure class) that there were other things to shoot besides sunrises got me off the lawn and where I am today Here are a couple from that first year

As photographers we need to pay close attention to light- we need to study itrsquos direction temperature quality intensity and how it is affecting our subjects After all as photographers we are painting with light

Sometimes when I am out shooting itrsquos the light that actually becomes my subject Great light on a landscape flower building person anything really can take my breath away At those times itrsquos the light that grabs my attention and makes me want to photograph the subject and often itrsquos nothing I had planned as my subject

I shot these two images from my deck last week as the sun was going down really the last bit of light on the bay I literally ran for my camera both times Within minutes the light was gone but I had my shots

19

Here are a few other images where the light is what caught my eye and really became my subject

Pay close attention to light Watch as it changes Study it See how it can sometimes make a subject glow or stand out how it really draws your eye Watch for backlighting see how side lighting can enhance texture how soft lighting can flatter and how light can become your main subject too

Happy ShootingKathleen

2015 Summer Iceland Photo Tour

Iceland is known for being a photographerrsquos paradise mostly because of the great variety in landscape along with exceptional light During summer time the combination of sunset and sunrise along with the unique landscape is what makes Iceland rare and desirable among photographers

Join William Yu and Iurie Belegurschi to Shoot Iceland June 17- 26 2015 details athttpwilliamyuphotoworkshopscomicelandhtml

20

21

How to be a professional Outdoor and Nature Photographerby Charlie Borland

If you are serious about your Nature Photography then dont miss your last chance this year to take How to be a professional Outdoor and Nature Photographer from Charlie Borland Charlie has made a living at this for a long time and this is a chance to take a 6 week course from him that has a lifetime of content Todays tip is from Charlie where he walks you through a shoot from concept to shooting and then processing

httpswwwyoutubecomwatchv=8oR-I6uZ9Bk

22

Tips to Improve Your Fall Photos Don Smith Photography

Monthly Photo Tip September 2014

This Sunday morning I will be departing for Jackson Hole Wyoming for the start of three consecutive fall workshops The first two will be spent photographing the fabulous fall color of Grand Teton National Park Ill then be off to Moab Utah for my ArchesCanyonlandsMonument Valley Workshop

Simply stated I love this time of year There has already been some snow falling in Wyoming and the leaves have been turning - yes fall is officially here

With that in mind I thought Id share my favorite fall photography tips

The first has to do with light I get asked all the time when is the best time of day to photograph fall color

Well fortunately enough really anytime though Id still say to get out for sunrise and shoot until the sun gets too harsh The same can be said for the other side of the day Fortunately the suns angle has been lowering so we are no longer faced with hard summer light

Under indirect light (dawn dusk and cloudy weather) colors (especially reds and yellows) tend to really pop They are very saturated under this type of light as long as you are using your polarlizer All foliage has a waxy sheen to it and polarizers help reduce that sheen allowing for a more saturated look

When the sun does make an appearance I try to move as much as 90 off-angle and let the light skim That being said my favorite light is backlight Simply place the sun behind the leaves your are photographing and watch the color explode

Another overlooked tip is to look for leaves already on the ground (as I did with these maples above) I try to either juxtapose them with another subject or find some sort of pattern or relationship between the leaves

The color itself is not always predictable as temperature and moisture play a large role in producing fall color As days grow shorter and nights grow longer and cooler biochemical processes in the leaf begin to paint the landscape with Natures autumn palette

Why Is Temperature ImportantA succession of warm sunny days and cool crisp but not freezing nights seems to bring about the most spectacular color displays During these days lots of sugars are produced in the leaf but the cool nights and the gradual closing of veins going into the leaf prevent these sugars from moving out These conditions-lots of sugar and lots of light-spur production of the brilliant anthocyanin pigments which tint reds purples and crimson Because carotenoids are always present in leaves the yellow and gold colors remain fairly constant from year to year

Why Is Moisture ImportantThe amount of moisture in the soil also affects autumn colors Like the weather soil moisture varies greatly from year to year The countless combinations of these two highly variable factors assure that no two autumns can be exactly alike A late spring or a severe summer drought can delay the onset of fall color by a few weeks A warm period during fall will also lower the intensity of autumn colors A warm wet spring favorable summer weather and warm sunny fall days with cool nights should produce the most brilliant autumn colors

Fortunately for us photographers fall offers a palette that is irresistible to our souls So get out this fall with your camera and get some much needed nurturing

A Simplified Method To Workflow Video SeriesLearn to process like a pro This video series has proven extremely popular It contains (26) videos and teaches you in 65 hours what took me 12 years to learn

Please check out Chapter headings and this short introductory video (and enjoy my son Aarons piano composition)

The Crack Zion National Park Utah

Canon 5DMKIII 70mm f16 1 second ISO 100 Singh-Ray Thin LB Polarizer

Lexar Digital Media

23

2014 Photo Workshops 3rd Annual Fall Color and Mountain Grandeur Grand Teton National Park - September 23-27 2014 (WORKSHOP 1 - SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

3rd Annual Fall Color and Mountain Grandeur Grand Teton National Park - September 28-October 2 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

6th Annual Full Moon Over Red Rock Arches and Monument Valley Mittens ArchesCanyonlands National Parks and Full Moonrise at Monument Valley - October 4-8 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

4th Annual Bryce Canyon Hoodoos and ZIon Fall Color Photo Workshop Fall Photography Workshop Bryce Canyon and Zion National Parks - November 1-5 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

2015 Photo Workshops 6th Annual Winter in Big Sur and the Monterey Peninsula - Magic Light Moonlight and Pfeiffer Beach Arch - January 4-7 2015 (4 spots left) 7th Annual Northern Arizona Workshop - Grand Canyon (with crescent moon) Page (Upper Antelope Canyon with light shafts and Horseshoe Bend) and Sedona - March 20-21 2015 (4 spots left) Springtime In Big Sur and the Monterey Peninsula - 7th Annual Wildflowers Full Moon Misty Fog and Headland Color Workshop - March 30 - April 2 2015 (3 spots remain) Don Smith and Gary Hart Spring at Oregons Columbia River Gorge Wildflowers and Waterfalls April 14 - 17 2015 (WORKSHOP SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

Don Smith and Gary Hart Spring at Oregons Columbia River Gorge Wildflowers and Waterfalls April 18 - 21 2015 (WORKSHOP SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY) Kauai Photo Workshop June 19-23 (Sign up before September 1 to receive an Earl-Bird discount of $150 off the full workshop price) (2 spots remain) Don Smith and Gary Hart Grand Canyon Monsoon and Lightning August 10-14 2015 (spots already filling) Private and Small Group Instruction

Page 2: Stockton Camera Club · 2018-09-06 · Stockton Camera Club The Shutter Tripper October2014 Hummer in Silhouette ... Stockton, CA 95202-2706 Phone: 209-464-2299 | Fax: 209-464-9229

2

Apple DelightClass A Print of the Month - Elizabeth Parrish

Dandelion SeedsClass AA Print of the Month - Joanne Sogsti

3

Eye of the RoseDean Taylor

Flower and SpiderHeide Stover

The Doors into the FutureTrey Steinhart

Lightbulb HatRicardo Mendoza

4

SF SkylineCristine Blue

Pt Reyes BoatSharon McLemore

Spiral StaircaseGary Brown

DelicateKris Borgen

Myyyy Petals are Prettier than Yourrrr Wings

Trey Steinhart

Stratified SandstoneDean Taylor

5

Monarch ButterflyMac McCormick

Morning SongCarol Marshall

FlowDean Taylor

SunsetRicardo Mendoza

Thunderstorm over Lake TahoeSuzanne Nichols

Praying MantisHeide Stover

SCC Officers 2014OfficersPresidentHeide StoverEmail h1stoveraolcom

Vice President ProgramsSharon McLemore 401-0192 Email sfmsapaolcom

Vice President CompetitionAddy Street 403-8349Email sccsubmitgmailcom

SecretaryEm McLaren 823-7287emmclarencomcastnet

TreasurerJanelle DeRuosi 838-1881Email jderuosiphotographygmailcom

Committee Chairs

Activities ChairpersonJoanne Sogsti 663-7044Email Stanjoanneaolcom

Education ChairpersonMike Clipka 858-5198 Email mcphotosjunocom

Hospitality ChairpersonDebra GoinsEmail knollstreetphotographygmailcom

Print Competition Chairperson Trey Steinhart 471-8438Email Steinhart4sbcglobalnet

Refreshments Chairperson Sheldon McCormick 931-0461Emailsmccormickclearwirenet

Shutter Tripper Doug Ridgway 617-7050Email doug_flyfisheryahoocom

Web MasterJanelle DeRuosi 838-1881Email jderuosiphotographygmailcom

6

Presidentrsquos MessageOctober 2014By Heide Stover

Welcome to all the new members and returning members It is good to see people interested in the club and our activities I would like to ask all members to try and help each other when possible and in particular letrsquos help the new members New members feel free to contact me with questions If I cannot help I will try to find someone that can

For those of you not aware of this at 530 pm on the night of our competition meeting Sharon and the person judging that evening have dinner in the coffee shop Any member is welcome to join in You do need to pay for your own meal though

I will be working on setting up our year end banquet at Spaghetti Factory soon Those of you with special dietary needs please let me know so I can do my best to accommodate you

The Sandhill Cranes should be showing up soon and are wonderful to watch and listen to as well as photograph Other migrating birds well be around as well And the Sandhill Crane Festival is coming up Keep that in mind when you are out shooting

As most of you know I have cancer and will be going through chemo for the next 4 weeks I will still do the best I can to answer any questions but please be patient if I do not answer right away For digital entries you can also contact Addy or Sharon Dean or Sharon can help with questions about the Camera Club Council in Fresno Those of us going to Fresno for the meeting can take down any prints or forms for those that would like to enter but cannot go down there

Get out there and shoot

Heide

219 E Weber Ave (Across From The Court House)Stockton CA 95202-2706

Phone 209-464-2299 | Fax 209-464-9229wwwulmerphotocom

Email Ulmerphotoaolcom

A Big Thank You to Our Sponsors

7

Septemberrsquos Monthly Meetingby Em Mclaren

Heide opened the meeting and Debra introduced guests and welcomed Don West and Rick Mendoza as recent new members

1 Heide asked for people to volunteer for the nominating committee Debra Elizaberth and Susanne volunteered

2 Joanne reminded people about the Renaissance Fair at Casa De Fruita which has started and runs thru Oct 12 It is $25 per person and $10 parking You can register on line She plans to go on Sat Oct4 If you want to carpool please let her know There will be lots of photo opportunities and on that day only a costume conteststanjoanneaolcom

3 Heide congratulated all our club winners at the Lodi Grape Festival

4 Janelle said there will be a photo walk Oct 11 Sat evening in Modesto Please contact her for further details or if you would like more information waynelle726sbcglobalnet

5 Sharon announced that the FotoClave will be held at the Hilton Hotel in Concord on Nov 7-9th It is $70 to attend plus extra to attend the banquet There will be great speakers and a good opportunity to meet members from other clubs in the area This may be the last FotoClave to be held For more info or to register go to FotoClaveslickpiccom

6 Sharon introduced Rich Turner as our judge for the photo competition He has been a photographer for several newspapers including the Stockton Record and now has his own photography business He has done work for the corporate world and is passionate about photographing the San Joaquin Delta He has a new book out about the California Delta and will have a photo show in 2015 which will travel around California on exhibit for 2 years He also is doing photo essays He brought his photo note cards sets to give to tonightrsquos competition winners He presented a brief show of his work before the judging began If you would like to find out more info about him or his new book please go to richtturnerphotocom

DIGITAL COMPETITION WINNERS FOR SEPT

BEGINNERS ldquoHummer in Silhouetterdquo by Christine BlueADVANCED ldquoDamselflyrdquo by Ricardo Mendoza

VERY ADVANCED ldquoDelightfulrdquo by Trey Steinhart

PRINT COMPETITION WINNERS FOR SEPT

BEGINNERS None entered in this categoryADVANCED ldquoApple Delightrdquo by Elizabeth Parrish

VERY ADVANCED Dandelion Seedsrdquo by Joann Sogsti

Congratulations to all the winners

The Special Subject for October will be NATURE

Please let me know if there are any corrections or additions to the notes Thanks Em McLaren

8

Stockton Camera ClubMonthly Competition - September 2014

DIGITAL COMPETITION WINNERS FOR SEPT

BEGINNERS ldquoHummer in Silhouetterdquo by Christine BlueADVANCED ldquoDamselflyrdquo by Ricardo Mendoza

VERY ADVANCED ldquoDelightfulrdquo by Trey Steinhart

PRINT COMPETITION WINNERS FOR SEPT

BEGINNERS None entered in this categoryADVANCED ldquoApple Delightrdquo by Elizabeth Parrish

VERY ADVANCED Dandelion Seedsrdquo by Joann SogstiPlease check out the to view the images that received the top scores wwwstockton-cameraclubcom

September 2014 - Class B TOTAL OPEN SUBJECT FEB MAR MAY JULY SEPT OCT DECSusanne Nichols 223 168 55 46 45 43 44 45 0 0Shari Liwanag 172 128 43 46 44 40 42 0 0 0Adrianne Street 172 128 43 43 42 40 47 0 0 0Christine Blue 133 98 35 46 43 0 0 44 0 0Jim Cahill 75 75 0 32 11 32 0 0 0 0Bret Hunter 45 34 11 45 0 0 0 0 0 0Ron Wetherell 45 22 23 0 23 0 22 0Pete Alameda 43 32 11 0 0 0 43 0 0 0Lanny Brown 21 10 11 0 0 0 0 21 0 0

September 2014 - Class A TOTAL OPEN SS FEB MAR MAY JULY SEPT OCT DECKris Borgen 219 165 54 46 43 44 43 43 0 0Gary Brown 215 161 54 44 44 42 42 43 0 0Sheldon McCormick 208 155 53 43 42 40 41 42 0 0Debra Goins 208 165 43 34 43 45 44 42 0 0Elizabeth Parrish 204 163 41 34 44 42 40 44 0 0Mike Clipka 126 95 31 0 0 42 43 41 0 0

Karleen Gansberg 95 64 31 0 44 41 0 10 0 0Charlene Martin 47 35 12 47 0 0 0 0 0 0Ricardo Mendoza 46 36 10 0 0 0 0 46 0 0Jim Wells 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Kim Romena 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Paula Wells 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Danny Ho 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Stockton Camera ClubMonthly Competition - September 2014

(Continued)

September 2014 - Class AA TOTAL OPEN SUBJECT FEB MAR MAY JULY SEPT OCT DECSharon McLemore 230 173 57 47 46 46 46 45 0 0Carol Marshall 225 169 56 45 46 45 46 43 0 0Joanne Sogsti 222 168 54 45 46 43 44 44 0 0Heide Stover 222 167 55 44 45 45 44 44 0 0Em McLaren 220 166 54 45 45 43 45 42 0 0Doug Ridgway 219 175 44 47 46 46 33 47 0 0Stan Sogsti 217 162 56 44 44 44 42 43 0 0Dean Taylor 186 140 46 0 46 46 47 47 0 0Trey Steinhart 180 136 44 46 0 44 44 46 0 0Janelle DeRuosi 43 32 11 0 0 0 0 43 0 0Elliott Pasinsky 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

9

Nikon Legend Behind the Lens

Tony Sweet

Canon Explorer of Light

Rick Sammon

Michael Frye

Joe Hearst

Gary Crabbe

Eric Harness

Gail Pierce

John Ballou

Lisa Rigge

Pat Toth-Smith

Michael Maloney

November 7 8 amp 9 2014

An Astounding Weekend of Photography

Renowned photographers will engage you with information on new and lesser-known techniques and incredible images From our keynote

speakers Nikon Legend Tony Sweet and Canon Explorer of Light Rick Sammon to an additional nine presenters in three rooms on

Saturday you will be inspired and entertained In addition at FotoClave we will show the results of the competition among

members of participating camera club councils

fotoclave 2014

Join Us for FotoClave 2014 Hilton Concord Hotel 1970 Diamond Blvd Concord CA 94520

Sponsored by N4C

2014 Calendar of Events

10

Every 3rd Thursday(Except April June amp

Aug) 630 PM

West Lane Bowling AlleyStockton

Membership MeetingContact Heide Stover

h1stoveraolcom

ThursdayOctober 16

West Lane Bowling AlleyStockton

October General MeetingSpecial Subject - Nature

ThursdayNovember 6

Cottage RoomHutchins Street Square

Lodi CA

Drop Off EntriesSandhill Crane Festival

Friday - SundayNovember 7 8 amp 9

Cottage RoomHutchins Street Square

Lodi CA

2014 Sandhill Crane Festivalwwwcranefestivalcom

Friday - SundayNovember 7 8 amp 9

Hilton Concord Hotel1970 Diamond BlvdConcord CA 94520

FotoClave 2014fotoclaveslickpiccom

SundayDecember 7 2014

Crowne Plaza Sacramento5321 Date Avenue

(I-80 Madison Ave)Sacramento Ca

Photographic Society of AmericaGold Rush Chapter Meeting

wwwpsagoldrushorg

ThursdayDecember 18

West Lane Bowling AlleyStockton

December General MeetingSpecial Subject - Travel

A GENERAL RULES1 Only paid-up members may enter club competition 2 Regular print and digital image competition period Once each month except January A competition year is February through December Current regular meetings are February March May July September October and December The number of meetings may change from time to time at the discretion of the Board of Directors and approval of the general membership as facilities permit The Annual Awards Dinner will be held in January3 A total of four (4) images (all prints all digital or a combination of both) may be entered each competition month A total of three (3) images may be entered in the Open Division and a total of one (1) in the Special Subject Division The number of entries may change from time to time at the discretion of the Board of Directors and the approval of the general membership 4 Each image will be scored from 6 to 12 points All prints or digital images receiving 11 or 12 points will be classed as an honor image The title of each print or digital image entered will be read before being evaluated The name of the maker will be read for 11-point honor winners Makerrsquos names will be announced for the 12 point images after the Print amp Digital Image-of-the-Month winners are chosen 5 A print or digital image that does not receive an honor score may be re-entered one more time in the same division 6 A print or digital image may be entered in all divisions for which it qualifies ie an honor image in Open may also be entered in the Special Subject Division at another competition A print or digital image that receives an honor score may not be re-entered in the same division7 Any print or digital image that appears to be ineligible for competition or not qualified for a specific division could expect to be challenged The Competition Vice-President shall decide whether or not the image is acceptable8 The exhibitor must have exposed each negative slide or digital image entered All images submitted for judging must be the work of the photographermaker including the taking of the images and any digital enhancements andor manipulation of the image This does not apply to the processing of film or printing by a commercial processor9 The same image should not be entered both as a print and a projected digital image in the same competition10 In the event of absence or barring unforeseen circumstances a member may submit make-up prints or digital images for one competition night per competition year and whenever possible must submit all make-up prints or digital images at the meeting immediately following the month a member failed or was unable to submit the prints or digital images Make-ups in the Special Subject Division must be the same subject as the month missed Also in case of absence a member may assign the responsibility of submitting his or her prints andor digital images for competition to another member11 A club member who serves as judge cannot enter his or her own prints or digital images in the same competition The judgersquos make-up prints or digital images can then be entered in another competition during that competition year This

11

2014 Competition Policy

is in addition to the once-a-year make-up provision already allowed12 Prints or digital images may be projectedviewed briefly before the judging of each division if the judge indicates heshe would like a preview

B PRINT ENTRY RULES1 Each print entered must have a completed label attached to the back of the print including name of maker title date entered and Division (Open or Special Subject) The writing or printing on the form must be legible Labels must be attached on the back of the print in the upper left-hand corner for correct viewing of the print2 All prints must be matted or mounted with a total size (including mat board) of no larger than 18rdquo X 24rdquo and no smaller than 8rdquo X 10rdquo Exception One side of a Panorama Print may be no larger than 36rdquo Prints that are smaller than 5rdquo X 7rdquo will not be accepted The makerrsquos name must not appear on the viewing surface of the image Framed prints shall not be entered3 Prints accompanied by entry forms should be submitted no later than 15 minutes prior to the start of the regular monthly meeting4 Prints receiving a score of 12 points in each class will be regrouped and judged for selection for the Print-of-the-Month honors Print-of-the-Month honors will be given in both Class A amp B C DIGITAL IMAGE ENTRY RULES1 Digital images must be submitted in a format and by the deadline specified by the Competition Vice-President Digital images may be submitted by email mailed (CD) or delivered (CD) to the Competition Vice-President Definition of Digital Image An image taken with a digital camera a negative slide or print scanned into the computer and processed digitally2 Images must be in a format compatible with the projector The key thing to keep in mind when formatting photos for submission is that the projector we use in the competition has a (maximum) resolution of 1024 x 768 pixels This means that any photo that exceeds this size in either dimension could end-up being cropped by the projector In other words the image width cannot be more than 1024 pixels and the image height cannot be more than 768 pixels If your image is horizontal only change the width to 1024 if your image is vertical only change the height to 768 Do not change both Down-sizing the image from the ldquonativerdquo resolution coming out of your camera also significantly reduces the file size This helps when emailing the files and takes-up less space on our hard-drives3 The makerrsquos name title of image date entered and division (Open or Special Subject) must be included as the title of the image When you have finished re-sizing your image save your image with a new title For example do a Save as Smith_Sunrise Splendor_05-13_Ojpeg (O-Open or SS-Special Subject) Specify whether you are Beginner or Advanced4 Digital Images receiving a score of 12 points in each class will be regrouped and judged for selection for the Digital Image-of-the-Month honors Digital Image-of-the-Month honors will be given in Class A AA amp B

Mike Clipkandash Education ChairpersonOctober 2014

How to Colorize Old (Black amp White) Photo ndash Photoshop TutorialBy Manesh K Filed in photoshop

Photo Edit Download wwwmyimageconvertercomBrowse Edit amp Convert Images Across Any Image Format - Get App

Today we are going to do some photo manipulation with Photoshop In the tutorial below we are going to guide you through patching up spots in an old black amp white photo and then colorizing it

First wersquoll run you through on removing white patches from photo and then wersquoll proceed to coloring it The steps are pretty standard Load up your Photoshop and off we goTo follow through the entire tutorial we suggest you download and use the following image

Step 1 Wersquoll start by removing the white patches on the image Choose Clone Stamp Tool and by pressing Alt key pick the plain and appropriate surface near all white patches and apply it on white patch Continue this process until all patches get removedAfter removing all patches your poor image will look clean as shown in image

12

Clipkarsquos CornerEducation Articles by Mike Clipka

13

Step 2Next wersquoll proceed with coloring the image It would be bad idea to colorize the image as a whole wersquoll do them one by one an object at a timeFirst wersquoll select the hat by making the use of Magnetic Lasso Tool ndash like this

Step 3To colorize it we will use the Hue and Saturation (HSL) option There are many ways to colorize an object but HSL is perhaps one of the easiest and most flexible

Proceeding to colorizing the hat add these values to the (HSL) 360 35 ndash 26 appropriately (While using HSL on that window do not forget to turn on Colorize option)

Step 4After applying color the hat may look a little plain Letrsquos add some Noise to it Select Filters -gt Noise -gt Add Noise and give amount ldquo5rdquo to it

Check Monochromatic option to get a smoother noise effect See the next image for its differences

Step 5Next the coat The process is same ndash only different HSL values which are respectively 42 10 ndash 63

To make the overall look of coat more natural instead of using Noise tool we take advantage of Grain Texture option You can find it under Filter -gt Filter Gallery -gt in Texture tab -gt Grain

Select the following options ndash Intensity ldquo10rdquo Contrast ldquo50rdquo and Grain Type ldquoSoftrdquo

14

Step 6Moving forward ndash the shoes To give shoes a shiny effect we are going to use Image menu -gt Adjustments -gt Variations Select ldquoMidtonesrdquo and click Ok Try some combination of CMYK colors until you get a boot of this color

Step 7Next up the door First letrsquos color the door borders Select one side border of door by using Rectangle Marquee Tool Add 15 45 -53 values in HSL tool Then select Filter -gt Filter Gallery -gt in Texture tab -gt select Grain option and keep Intensity ldquo12rdquo Contrast ldquo50rdquo select Grain type ldquoEnlargedrdquo

Follow the same procedure to all the borders of the door

Step 8Next we proceed to coloring rectangles between the doors with the following HSL values55 20 -26 and in Texture Grain keep intensity ldquo12rdquo contrast ldquo50rdquo and Grain type ldquoEnlargedrdquo Step 9Wersquoll wrap up coloring the door by adding colors to the borders HSL values of 25 7 -69 Then under Texture Grain keep Intensity ldquo12rdquo Contrast ldquo50rdquo and letrsquos add extra noise by selecting Grain type ldquoRegularrdquo Step 10After the door we proceed coloring the soil To color the soil select that portion by usingMagic Wand Tool and then keep HSL values 20 24 -56

Step 11Last but not least we will color the wooden background of the image To give it a it a wood look and feel we give it a HSL value of 31 53 -45 and then add Noise ldquo5rdquo by checking theMonochromatic option

After all this procedures finally you will see the output like this

Color CorrectionWe are done coloring the image Now we proceed to the final and most important part ndash color correction Color correction when done right will give the image its correct mood and make it more realistic

To increase the brightness of the image we go to the following option Image menu -gt Adjustments -gt Curves and add ldquo186rdquo for Output and ldquo164rdquo for Input

Letrsquos brighten up the following section of the image (where arrow in pointed to) First we select the portion with Rectangle Marquee tool Then go to Filter -gt Filter Gallery -gt Distort tab and select Diffuse Glow with the following values Graininess ldquo0rdquo Glow Amount ldquo11rdquo Clear Amount ldquo15rdquo And finally proceed to Image menu -gt Adjustments -gt Curves and add ldquo200rdquo for Ouptut and ldquo188rdquo for Input Follow the above process for the remaining parts of image but with different values inDiffuse Glow Graininess ldquo2rdquo Glow Amount ldquo5rdquo Clear Amount ldquo15rdquo Curvesrsquo not required

To darken the shadows of the hat and the coat letrsquos use the Burn Tool and by selectingRange Midtones and decreasing the Exposure value to ldquo20rdquo apply it on shadows part appropriately

Wersquoll use the Dodge Tool to brighten up the coat and hat so it looks as though the lights are coming in from the right side and to give a sense of thickness for the door borders we use the Burn Tool

And herersquos how your final output will look like (or similar) after some color corrections Editorrsquos note This post is written by Manesh K for Hongkiatcom Manesh is an Animator by profession and owner of Howtouse-photoshopcom where he helps people present their creativity digitally with Photoshop tutorials and useful resources

Herersquos a link to a 7+ minute You Tube tutorial on coloring Black amp White photos in Photoshophttpwwwyoutubecomwatchv=C2Srw245R7U

The Sunny f16 Rule for Digital Exposure By Jim Doty Jr

Part of the Digital Photography Exposure For Dummies Cheat SheetThe sunny f16 rule or Basic Daylight Exposure (BDE for short) tells you that the proper exposure in digital photography for a front lit subject is f16 with a shutter speed of 1ISO (thatrsquos 1 over the ISO in use) According to the sunny f16 rule at ISO 100 BDE would be f16 at 1100 second and at ISO 200 BDE would be f16 at 1200 second

When taking photos on a bright sunny day set the ISO of your camera to 100 the aperture to f16 and the shutter to 1100 second Then go out and take pictures of some front lit subjects As long as your subject isnrsquot white or black the exposures should be great No metering necessary

You can use equivalent exposures (different combinations of apertures shutter speeds and ISO settings that provide exactly the same exposure) for the sunny f16 rule The following table shows the equivalent exposures for the sunny f16 rule at ISO 100

Equivalent Exposures for the Sunny f16 Rule at ISO 100Aperture Shutter Speedf22 150 secondf16 1100 secondf11 1200 secondf8 1400 secondf56 1800 secondf4 11600 secondf28 13200 second

WHAT IS ldquoKEYSTONINGrdquo amp ldquoPINCUSIONrdquo Will be covered in my next article

NATURE PHOTOGRAPHY ndash BASIC DEFINITION

There should be no hand of man in a nature photo unless it relates to the subject The only one that was ever accepted was showing an injured bird that had been taken care of and recovered and was being released into the wild

I wonrsquot be at the October meeting as I will be visiting family in Indiana Have a good meeting

MIKE CLIPKA ndash EDUCATION CHAIRPERSON

16

17

Classes Start Oct 3rdSign Up Now wwwppsopcom

An Idiom For Photographersby Joe Baraban

Before I go any farther let me define the word Idiom An idiom is (1) An expression that cannot be understood from the meanings of its separate words but that has a separate meaning of its own (2) A form of a language that is spoken in a particular area and that uses some of its own words grammar and pronunciations

Here are some common idioms Sunday week for a week from Sunday Give way for retreat and Rock and Roll is a musical idiom The one Ive always thought was especially pertinent to photography and one I mention in my online class with the PPSOP and also in my Stretching Your Frame of Mind workshops I conduct around the planet is Theres more to it than meets the eye

In other words I tell my fellow photographers that theres two ways to look at a subject You can look at it with the left side of your brain the analytical side or the right side of your brain the creative side So many of my students dont look at things as they could be only as they are

Doing that will keep you from taking your photography to what I refer to asup a notch What I mean is that looking with the left side of your brain will only show you what things are Looking at those same things with the right side of your brain can show you what they could be Take the photo above for example

First allow me to digress for a moment I teach photographers how to use the basic elements of Visual Design and composition to create stronger images A complete description can be read by clicking on the link above

Ok so last week I was sitting in my backyard on my deck it was the end of a beautiful day Seventy two degrees and sunny so I had my book in one hand and my Bombay Martini and a bowl of nuts at the ready and close to my other hand I was trying to filter out all the sounds of a house being built next to us and occasionally looking up at what was going on The sun was setting behind the house that was next door and behind me and as the sun was setting the light was slowly disappearing from the bottom up leaving only the top part still in sunlight

If I had been looking at the house with the left side of my brain I would have only heard the incessant hammering and then seen the man working at the top of the house that was causing itthats what was Since Im always looking at things as they could be I saw more than just a house with a man working on the top floor I saw the Texture of the Crape Myrtles branches still bare from the Winter The square and rectangular Shapes and the blue Negative Space that defines and creates the Shapes Im always looking for ways to create Visual Tension and placing the man close to the edge of the frame is one of the ways The way the light is only left at the top of the construction is another and the contrast between his bright saturated red shirt against the soft blue sky and clouds is still another These elements of Visual Design and composition are all pieces that make up the finished puzzleanother idiom meaning the final photograph

Visit my website at wwwjoebarabancom and be sure to watch for upcoming workshops listed at the top of this blog Come shoot with me sometime and Ill show you what could be Dont forget to send me a photo and question to AskJoeBgmailcom - JoeB

18

Itrsquos All About the LightBy Kathleen Clemons

ldquoMy first thought is always of lightrdquo ~ Galen Rowell

I got my start in photography shooting sunrises from my front lawn back in 2003 Though my subject and location were limited they taught me much about the qualities of light and how quickly they change A gentle hint from Bryan Peterson (I was taking his online Understanding Exposure class) that there were other things to shoot besides sunrises got me off the lawn and where I am today Here are a couple from that first year

As photographers we need to pay close attention to light- we need to study itrsquos direction temperature quality intensity and how it is affecting our subjects After all as photographers we are painting with light

Sometimes when I am out shooting itrsquos the light that actually becomes my subject Great light on a landscape flower building person anything really can take my breath away At those times itrsquos the light that grabs my attention and makes me want to photograph the subject and often itrsquos nothing I had planned as my subject

I shot these two images from my deck last week as the sun was going down really the last bit of light on the bay I literally ran for my camera both times Within minutes the light was gone but I had my shots

19

Here are a few other images where the light is what caught my eye and really became my subject

Pay close attention to light Watch as it changes Study it See how it can sometimes make a subject glow or stand out how it really draws your eye Watch for backlighting see how side lighting can enhance texture how soft lighting can flatter and how light can become your main subject too

Happy ShootingKathleen

2015 Summer Iceland Photo Tour

Iceland is known for being a photographerrsquos paradise mostly because of the great variety in landscape along with exceptional light During summer time the combination of sunset and sunrise along with the unique landscape is what makes Iceland rare and desirable among photographers

Join William Yu and Iurie Belegurschi to Shoot Iceland June 17- 26 2015 details athttpwilliamyuphotoworkshopscomicelandhtml

20

21

How to be a professional Outdoor and Nature Photographerby Charlie Borland

If you are serious about your Nature Photography then dont miss your last chance this year to take How to be a professional Outdoor and Nature Photographer from Charlie Borland Charlie has made a living at this for a long time and this is a chance to take a 6 week course from him that has a lifetime of content Todays tip is from Charlie where he walks you through a shoot from concept to shooting and then processing

httpswwwyoutubecomwatchv=8oR-I6uZ9Bk

22

Tips to Improve Your Fall Photos Don Smith Photography

Monthly Photo Tip September 2014

This Sunday morning I will be departing for Jackson Hole Wyoming for the start of three consecutive fall workshops The first two will be spent photographing the fabulous fall color of Grand Teton National Park Ill then be off to Moab Utah for my ArchesCanyonlandsMonument Valley Workshop

Simply stated I love this time of year There has already been some snow falling in Wyoming and the leaves have been turning - yes fall is officially here

With that in mind I thought Id share my favorite fall photography tips

The first has to do with light I get asked all the time when is the best time of day to photograph fall color

Well fortunately enough really anytime though Id still say to get out for sunrise and shoot until the sun gets too harsh The same can be said for the other side of the day Fortunately the suns angle has been lowering so we are no longer faced with hard summer light

Under indirect light (dawn dusk and cloudy weather) colors (especially reds and yellows) tend to really pop They are very saturated under this type of light as long as you are using your polarlizer All foliage has a waxy sheen to it and polarizers help reduce that sheen allowing for a more saturated look

When the sun does make an appearance I try to move as much as 90 off-angle and let the light skim That being said my favorite light is backlight Simply place the sun behind the leaves your are photographing and watch the color explode

Another overlooked tip is to look for leaves already on the ground (as I did with these maples above) I try to either juxtapose them with another subject or find some sort of pattern or relationship between the leaves

The color itself is not always predictable as temperature and moisture play a large role in producing fall color As days grow shorter and nights grow longer and cooler biochemical processes in the leaf begin to paint the landscape with Natures autumn palette

Why Is Temperature ImportantA succession of warm sunny days and cool crisp but not freezing nights seems to bring about the most spectacular color displays During these days lots of sugars are produced in the leaf but the cool nights and the gradual closing of veins going into the leaf prevent these sugars from moving out These conditions-lots of sugar and lots of light-spur production of the brilliant anthocyanin pigments which tint reds purples and crimson Because carotenoids are always present in leaves the yellow and gold colors remain fairly constant from year to year

Why Is Moisture ImportantThe amount of moisture in the soil also affects autumn colors Like the weather soil moisture varies greatly from year to year The countless combinations of these two highly variable factors assure that no two autumns can be exactly alike A late spring or a severe summer drought can delay the onset of fall color by a few weeks A warm period during fall will also lower the intensity of autumn colors A warm wet spring favorable summer weather and warm sunny fall days with cool nights should produce the most brilliant autumn colors

Fortunately for us photographers fall offers a palette that is irresistible to our souls So get out this fall with your camera and get some much needed nurturing

A Simplified Method To Workflow Video SeriesLearn to process like a pro This video series has proven extremely popular It contains (26) videos and teaches you in 65 hours what took me 12 years to learn

Please check out Chapter headings and this short introductory video (and enjoy my son Aarons piano composition)

The Crack Zion National Park Utah

Canon 5DMKIII 70mm f16 1 second ISO 100 Singh-Ray Thin LB Polarizer

Lexar Digital Media

23

2014 Photo Workshops 3rd Annual Fall Color and Mountain Grandeur Grand Teton National Park - September 23-27 2014 (WORKSHOP 1 - SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

3rd Annual Fall Color and Mountain Grandeur Grand Teton National Park - September 28-October 2 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

6th Annual Full Moon Over Red Rock Arches and Monument Valley Mittens ArchesCanyonlands National Parks and Full Moonrise at Monument Valley - October 4-8 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

4th Annual Bryce Canyon Hoodoos and ZIon Fall Color Photo Workshop Fall Photography Workshop Bryce Canyon and Zion National Parks - November 1-5 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

2015 Photo Workshops 6th Annual Winter in Big Sur and the Monterey Peninsula - Magic Light Moonlight and Pfeiffer Beach Arch - January 4-7 2015 (4 spots left) 7th Annual Northern Arizona Workshop - Grand Canyon (with crescent moon) Page (Upper Antelope Canyon with light shafts and Horseshoe Bend) and Sedona - March 20-21 2015 (4 spots left) Springtime In Big Sur and the Monterey Peninsula - 7th Annual Wildflowers Full Moon Misty Fog and Headland Color Workshop - March 30 - April 2 2015 (3 spots remain) Don Smith and Gary Hart Spring at Oregons Columbia River Gorge Wildflowers and Waterfalls April 14 - 17 2015 (WORKSHOP SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

Don Smith and Gary Hart Spring at Oregons Columbia River Gorge Wildflowers and Waterfalls April 18 - 21 2015 (WORKSHOP SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY) Kauai Photo Workshop June 19-23 (Sign up before September 1 to receive an Earl-Bird discount of $150 off the full workshop price) (2 spots remain) Don Smith and Gary Hart Grand Canyon Monsoon and Lightning August 10-14 2015 (spots already filling) Private and Small Group Instruction

Page 3: Stockton Camera Club · 2018-09-06 · Stockton Camera Club The Shutter Tripper October2014 Hummer in Silhouette ... Stockton, CA 95202-2706 Phone: 209-464-2299 | Fax: 209-464-9229

3

Eye of the RoseDean Taylor

Flower and SpiderHeide Stover

The Doors into the FutureTrey Steinhart

Lightbulb HatRicardo Mendoza

4

SF SkylineCristine Blue

Pt Reyes BoatSharon McLemore

Spiral StaircaseGary Brown

DelicateKris Borgen

Myyyy Petals are Prettier than Yourrrr Wings

Trey Steinhart

Stratified SandstoneDean Taylor

5

Monarch ButterflyMac McCormick

Morning SongCarol Marshall

FlowDean Taylor

SunsetRicardo Mendoza

Thunderstorm over Lake TahoeSuzanne Nichols

Praying MantisHeide Stover

SCC Officers 2014OfficersPresidentHeide StoverEmail h1stoveraolcom

Vice President ProgramsSharon McLemore 401-0192 Email sfmsapaolcom

Vice President CompetitionAddy Street 403-8349Email sccsubmitgmailcom

SecretaryEm McLaren 823-7287emmclarencomcastnet

TreasurerJanelle DeRuosi 838-1881Email jderuosiphotographygmailcom

Committee Chairs

Activities ChairpersonJoanne Sogsti 663-7044Email Stanjoanneaolcom

Education ChairpersonMike Clipka 858-5198 Email mcphotosjunocom

Hospitality ChairpersonDebra GoinsEmail knollstreetphotographygmailcom

Print Competition Chairperson Trey Steinhart 471-8438Email Steinhart4sbcglobalnet

Refreshments Chairperson Sheldon McCormick 931-0461Emailsmccormickclearwirenet

Shutter Tripper Doug Ridgway 617-7050Email doug_flyfisheryahoocom

Web MasterJanelle DeRuosi 838-1881Email jderuosiphotographygmailcom

6

Presidentrsquos MessageOctober 2014By Heide Stover

Welcome to all the new members and returning members It is good to see people interested in the club and our activities I would like to ask all members to try and help each other when possible and in particular letrsquos help the new members New members feel free to contact me with questions If I cannot help I will try to find someone that can

For those of you not aware of this at 530 pm on the night of our competition meeting Sharon and the person judging that evening have dinner in the coffee shop Any member is welcome to join in You do need to pay for your own meal though

I will be working on setting up our year end banquet at Spaghetti Factory soon Those of you with special dietary needs please let me know so I can do my best to accommodate you

The Sandhill Cranes should be showing up soon and are wonderful to watch and listen to as well as photograph Other migrating birds well be around as well And the Sandhill Crane Festival is coming up Keep that in mind when you are out shooting

As most of you know I have cancer and will be going through chemo for the next 4 weeks I will still do the best I can to answer any questions but please be patient if I do not answer right away For digital entries you can also contact Addy or Sharon Dean or Sharon can help with questions about the Camera Club Council in Fresno Those of us going to Fresno for the meeting can take down any prints or forms for those that would like to enter but cannot go down there

Get out there and shoot

Heide

219 E Weber Ave (Across From The Court House)Stockton CA 95202-2706

Phone 209-464-2299 | Fax 209-464-9229wwwulmerphotocom

Email Ulmerphotoaolcom

A Big Thank You to Our Sponsors

7

Septemberrsquos Monthly Meetingby Em Mclaren

Heide opened the meeting and Debra introduced guests and welcomed Don West and Rick Mendoza as recent new members

1 Heide asked for people to volunteer for the nominating committee Debra Elizaberth and Susanne volunteered

2 Joanne reminded people about the Renaissance Fair at Casa De Fruita which has started and runs thru Oct 12 It is $25 per person and $10 parking You can register on line She plans to go on Sat Oct4 If you want to carpool please let her know There will be lots of photo opportunities and on that day only a costume conteststanjoanneaolcom

3 Heide congratulated all our club winners at the Lodi Grape Festival

4 Janelle said there will be a photo walk Oct 11 Sat evening in Modesto Please contact her for further details or if you would like more information waynelle726sbcglobalnet

5 Sharon announced that the FotoClave will be held at the Hilton Hotel in Concord on Nov 7-9th It is $70 to attend plus extra to attend the banquet There will be great speakers and a good opportunity to meet members from other clubs in the area This may be the last FotoClave to be held For more info or to register go to FotoClaveslickpiccom

6 Sharon introduced Rich Turner as our judge for the photo competition He has been a photographer for several newspapers including the Stockton Record and now has his own photography business He has done work for the corporate world and is passionate about photographing the San Joaquin Delta He has a new book out about the California Delta and will have a photo show in 2015 which will travel around California on exhibit for 2 years He also is doing photo essays He brought his photo note cards sets to give to tonightrsquos competition winners He presented a brief show of his work before the judging began If you would like to find out more info about him or his new book please go to richtturnerphotocom

DIGITAL COMPETITION WINNERS FOR SEPT

BEGINNERS ldquoHummer in Silhouetterdquo by Christine BlueADVANCED ldquoDamselflyrdquo by Ricardo Mendoza

VERY ADVANCED ldquoDelightfulrdquo by Trey Steinhart

PRINT COMPETITION WINNERS FOR SEPT

BEGINNERS None entered in this categoryADVANCED ldquoApple Delightrdquo by Elizabeth Parrish

VERY ADVANCED Dandelion Seedsrdquo by Joann Sogsti

Congratulations to all the winners

The Special Subject for October will be NATURE

Please let me know if there are any corrections or additions to the notes Thanks Em McLaren

8

Stockton Camera ClubMonthly Competition - September 2014

DIGITAL COMPETITION WINNERS FOR SEPT

BEGINNERS ldquoHummer in Silhouetterdquo by Christine BlueADVANCED ldquoDamselflyrdquo by Ricardo Mendoza

VERY ADVANCED ldquoDelightfulrdquo by Trey Steinhart

PRINT COMPETITION WINNERS FOR SEPT

BEGINNERS None entered in this categoryADVANCED ldquoApple Delightrdquo by Elizabeth Parrish

VERY ADVANCED Dandelion Seedsrdquo by Joann SogstiPlease check out the to view the images that received the top scores wwwstockton-cameraclubcom

September 2014 - Class B TOTAL OPEN SUBJECT FEB MAR MAY JULY SEPT OCT DECSusanne Nichols 223 168 55 46 45 43 44 45 0 0Shari Liwanag 172 128 43 46 44 40 42 0 0 0Adrianne Street 172 128 43 43 42 40 47 0 0 0Christine Blue 133 98 35 46 43 0 0 44 0 0Jim Cahill 75 75 0 32 11 32 0 0 0 0Bret Hunter 45 34 11 45 0 0 0 0 0 0Ron Wetherell 45 22 23 0 23 0 22 0Pete Alameda 43 32 11 0 0 0 43 0 0 0Lanny Brown 21 10 11 0 0 0 0 21 0 0

September 2014 - Class A TOTAL OPEN SS FEB MAR MAY JULY SEPT OCT DECKris Borgen 219 165 54 46 43 44 43 43 0 0Gary Brown 215 161 54 44 44 42 42 43 0 0Sheldon McCormick 208 155 53 43 42 40 41 42 0 0Debra Goins 208 165 43 34 43 45 44 42 0 0Elizabeth Parrish 204 163 41 34 44 42 40 44 0 0Mike Clipka 126 95 31 0 0 42 43 41 0 0

Karleen Gansberg 95 64 31 0 44 41 0 10 0 0Charlene Martin 47 35 12 47 0 0 0 0 0 0Ricardo Mendoza 46 36 10 0 0 0 0 46 0 0Jim Wells 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Kim Romena 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Paula Wells 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Danny Ho 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Stockton Camera ClubMonthly Competition - September 2014

(Continued)

September 2014 - Class AA TOTAL OPEN SUBJECT FEB MAR MAY JULY SEPT OCT DECSharon McLemore 230 173 57 47 46 46 46 45 0 0Carol Marshall 225 169 56 45 46 45 46 43 0 0Joanne Sogsti 222 168 54 45 46 43 44 44 0 0Heide Stover 222 167 55 44 45 45 44 44 0 0Em McLaren 220 166 54 45 45 43 45 42 0 0Doug Ridgway 219 175 44 47 46 46 33 47 0 0Stan Sogsti 217 162 56 44 44 44 42 43 0 0Dean Taylor 186 140 46 0 46 46 47 47 0 0Trey Steinhart 180 136 44 46 0 44 44 46 0 0Janelle DeRuosi 43 32 11 0 0 0 0 43 0 0Elliott Pasinsky 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

9

Nikon Legend Behind the Lens

Tony Sweet

Canon Explorer of Light

Rick Sammon

Michael Frye

Joe Hearst

Gary Crabbe

Eric Harness

Gail Pierce

John Ballou

Lisa Rigge

Pat Toth-Smith

Michael Maloney

November 7 8 amp 9 2014

An Astounding Weekend of Photography

Renowned photographers will engage you with information on new and lesser-known techniques and incredible images From our keynote

speakers Nikon Legend Tony Sweet and Canon Explorer of Light Rick Sammon to an additional nine presenters in three rooms on

Saturday you will be inspired and entertained In addition at FotoClave we will show the results of the competition among

members of participating camera club councils

fotoclave 2014

Join Us for FotoClave 2014 Hilton Concord Hotel 1970 Diamond Blvd Concord CA 94520

Sponsored by N4C

2014 Calendar of Events

10

Every 3rd Thursday(Except April June amp

Aug) 630 PM

West Lane Bowling AlleyStockton

Membership MeetingContact Heide Stover

h1stoveraolcom

ThursdayOctober 16

West Lane Bowling AlleyStockton

October General MeetingSpecial Subject - Nature

ThursdayNovember 6

Cottage RoomHutchins Street Square

Lodi CA

Drop Off EntriesSandhill Crane Festival

Friday - SundayNovember 7 8 amp 9

Cottage RoomHutchins Street Square

Lodi CA

2014 Sandhill Crane Festivalwwwcranefestivalcom

Friday - SundayNovember 7 8 amp 9

Hilton Concord Hotel1970 Diamond BlvdConcord CA 94520

FotoClave 2014fotoclaveslickpiccom

SundayDecember 7 2014

Crowne Plaza Sacramento5321 Date Avenue

(I-80 Madison Ave)Sacramento Ca

Photographic Society of AmericaGold Rush Chapter Meeting

wwwpsagoldrushorg

ThursdayDecember 18

West Lane Bowling AlleyStockton

December General MeetingSpecial Subject - Travel

A GENERAL RULES1 Only paid-up members may enter club competition 2 Regular print and digital image competition period Once each month except January A competition year is February through December Current regular meetings are February March May July September October and December The number of meetings may change from time to time at the discretion of the Board of Directors and approval of the general membership as facilities permit The Annual Awards Dinner will be held in January3 A total of four (4) images (all prints all digital or a combination of both) may be entered each competition month A total of three (3) images may be entered in the Open Division and a total of one (1) in the Special Subject Division The number of entries may change from time to time at the discretion of the Board of Directors and the approval of the general membership 4 Each image will be scored from 6 to 12 points All prints or digital images receiving 11 or 12 points will be classed as an honor image The title of each print or digital image entered will be read before being evaluated The name of the maker will be read for 11-point honor winners Makerrsquos names will be announced for the 12 point images after the Print amp Digital Image-of-the-Month winners are chosen 5 A print or digital image that does not receive an honor score may be re-entered one more time in the same division 6 A print or digital image may be entered in all divisions for which it qualifies ie an honor image in Open may also be entered in the Special Subject Division at another competition A print or digital image that receives an honor score may not be re-entered in the same division7 Any print or digital image that appears to be ineligible for competition or not qualified for a specific division could expect to be challenged The Competition Vice-President shall decide whether or not the image is acceptable8 The exhibitor must have exposed each negative slide or digital image entered All images submitted for judging must be the work of the photographermaker including the taking of the images and any digital enhancements andor manipulation of the image This does not apply to the processing of film or printing by a commercial processor9 The same image should not be entered both as a print and a projected digital image in the same competition10 In the event of absence or barring unforeseen circumstances a member may submit make-up prints or digital images for one competition night per competition year and whenever possible must submit all make-up prints or digital images at the meeting immediately following the month a member failed or was unable to submit the prints or digital images Make-ups in the Special Subject Division must be the same subject as the month missed Also in case of absence a member may assign the responsibility of submitting his or her prints andor digital images for competition to another member11 A club member who serves as judge cannot enter his or her own prints or digital images in the same competition The judgersquos make-up prints or digital images can then be entered in another competition during that competition year This

11

2014 Competition Policy

is in addition to the once-a-year make-up provision already allowed12 Prints or digital images may be projectedviewed briefly before the judging of each division if the judge indicates heshe would like a preview

B PRINT ENTRY RULES1 Each print entered must have a completed label attached to the back of the print including name of maker title date entered and Division (Open or Special Subject) The writing or printing on the form must be legible Labels must be attached on the back of the print in the upper left-hand corner for correct viewing of the print2 All prints must be matted or mounted with a total size (including mat board) of no larger than 18rdquo X 24rdquo and no smaller than 8rdquo X 10rdquo Exception One side of a Panorama Print may be no larger than 36rdquo Prints that are smaller than 5rdquo X 7rdquo will not be accepted The makerrsquos name must not appear on the viewing surface of the image Framed prints shall not be entered3 Prints accompanied by entry forms should be submitted no later than 15 minutes prior to the start of the regular monthly meeting4 Prints receiving a score of 12 points in each class will be regrouped and judged for selection for the Print-of-the-Month honors Print-of-the-Month honors will be given in both Class A amp B C DIGITAL IMAGE ENTRY RULES1 Digital images must be submitted in a format and by the deadline specified by the Competition Vice-President Digital images may be submitted by email mailed (CD) or delivered (CD) to the Competition Vice-President Definition of Digital Image An image taken with a digital camera a negative slide or print scanned into the computer and processed digitally2 Images must be in a format compatible with the projector The key thing to keep in mind when formatting photos for submission is that the projector we use in the competition has a (maximum) resolution of 1024 x 768 pixels This means that any photo that exceeds this size in either dimension could end-up being cropped by the projector In other words the image width cannot be more than 1024 pixels and the image height cannot be more than 768 pixels If your image is horizontal only change the width to 1024 if your image is vertical only change the height to 768 Do not change both Down-sizing the image from the ldquonativerdquo resolution coming out of your camera also significantly reduces the file size This helps when emailing the files and takes-up less space on our hard-drives3 The makerrsquos name title of image date entered and division (Open or Special Subject) must be included as the title of the image When you have finished re-sizing your image save your image with a new title For example do a Save as Smith_Sunrise Splendor_05-13_Ojpeg (O-Open or SS-Special Subject) Specify whether you are Beginner or Advanced4 Digital Images receiving a score of 12 points in each class will be regrouped and judged for selection for the Digital Image-of-the-Month honors Digital Image-of-the-Month honors will be given in Class A AA amp B

Mike Clipkandash Education ChairpersonOctober 2014

How to Colorize Old (Black amp White) Photo ndash Photoshop TutorialBy Manesh K Filed in photoshop

Photo Edit Download wwwmyimageconvertercomBrowse Edit amp Convert Images Across Any Image Format - Get App

Today we are going to do some photo manipulation with Photoshop In the tutorial below we are going to guide you through patching up spots in an old black amp white photo and then colorizing it

First wersquoll run you through on removing white patches from photo and then wersquoll proceed to coloring it The steps are pretty standard Load up your Photoshop and off we goTo follow through the entire tutorial we suggest you download and use the following image

Step 1 Wersquoll start by removing the white patches on the image Choose Clone Stamp Tool and by pressing Alt key pick the plain and appropriate surface near all white patches and apply it on white patch Continue this process until all patches get removedAfter removing all patches your poor image will look clean as shown in image

12

Clipkarsquos CornerEducation Articles by Mike Clipka

13

Step 2Next wersquoll proceed with coloring the image It would be bad idea to colorize the image as a whole wersquoll do them one by one an object at a timeFirst wersquoll select the hat by making the use of Magnetic Lasso Tool ndash like this

Step 3To colorize it we will use the Hue and Saturation (HSL) option There are many ways to colorize an object but HSL is perhaps one of the easiest and most flexible

Proceeding to colorizing the hat add these values to the (HSL) 360 35 ndash 26 appropriately (While using HSL on that window do not forget to turn on Colorize option)

Step 4After applying color the hat may look a little plain Letrsquos add some Noise to it Select Filters -gt Noise -gt Add Noise and give amount ldquo5rdquo to it

Check Monochromatic option to get a smoother noise effect See the next image for its differences

Step 5Next the coat The process is same ndash only different HSL values which are respectively 42 10 ndash 63

To make the overall look of coat more natural instead of using Noise tool we take advantage of Grain Texture option You can find it under Filter -gt Filter Gallery -gt in Texture tab -gt Grain

Select the following options ndash Intensity ldquo10rdquo Contrast ldquo50rdquo and Grain Type ldquoSoftrdquo

14

Step 6Moving forward ndash the shoes To give shoes a shiny effect we are going to use Image menu -gt Adjustments -gt Variations Select ldquoMidtonesrdquo and click Ok Try some combination of CMYK colors until you get a boot of this color

Step 7Next up the door First letrsquos color the door borders Select one side border of door by using Rectangle Marquee Tool Add 15 45 -53 values in HSL tool Then select Filter -gt Filter Gallery -gt in Texture tab -gt select Grain option and keep Intensity ldquo12rdquo Contrast ldquo50rdquo select Grain type ldquoEnlargedrdquo

Follow the same procedure to all the borders of the door

Step 8Next we proceed to coloring rectangles between the doors with the following HSL values55 20 -26 and in Texture Grain keep intensity ldquo12rdquo contrast ldquo50rdquo and Grain type ldquoEnlargedrdquo Step 9Wersquoll wrap up coloring the door by adding colors to the borders HSL values of 25 7 -69 Then under Texture Grain keep Intensity ldquo12rdquo Contrast ldquo50rdquo and letrsquos add extra noise by selecting Grain type ldquoRegularrdquo Step 10After the door we proceed coloring the soil To color the soil select that portion by usingMagic Wand Tool and then keep HSL values 20 24 -56

Step 11Last but not least we will color the wooden background of the image To give it a it a wood look and feel we give it a HSL value of 31 53 -45 and then add Noise ldquo5rdquo by checking theMonochromatic option

After all this procedures finally you will see the output like this

Color CorrectionWe are done coloring the image Now we proceed to the final and most important part ndash color correction Color correction when done right will give the image its correct mood and make it more realistic

To increase the brightness of the image we go to the following option Image menu -gt Adjustments -gt Curves and add ldquo186rdquo for Output and ldquo164rdquo for Input

Letrsquos brighten up the following section of the image (where arrow in pointed to) First we select the portion with Rectangle Marquee tool Then go to Filter -gt Filter Gallery -gt Distort tab and select Diffuse Glow with the following values Graininess ldquo0rdquo Glow Amount ldquo11rdquo Clear Amount ldquo15rdquo And finally proceed to Image menu -gt Adjustments -gt Curves and add ldquo200rdquo for Ouptut and ldquo188rdquo for Input Follow the above process for the remaining parts of image but with different values inDiffuse Glow Graininess ldquo2rdquo Glow Amount ldquo5rdquo Clear Amount ldquo15rdquo Curvesrsquo not required

To darken the shadows of the hat and the coat letrsquos use the Burn Tool and by selectingRange Midtones and decreasing the Exposure value to ldquo20rdquo apply it on shadows part appropriately

Wersquoll use the Dodge Tool to brighten up the coat and hat so it looks as though the lights are coming in from the right side and to give a sense of thickness for the door borders we use the Burn Tool

And herersquos how your final output will look like (or similar) after some color corrections Editorrsquos note This post is written by Manesh K for Hongkiatcom Manesh is an Animator by profession and owner of Howtouse-photoshopcom where he helps people present their creativity digitally with Photoshop tutorials and useful resources

Herersquos a link to a 7+ minute You Tube tutorial on coloring Black amp White photos in Photoshophttpwwwyoutubecomwatchv=C2Srw245R7U

The Sunny f16 Rule for Digital Exposure By Jim Doty Jr

Part of the Digital Photography Exposure For Dummies Cheat SheetThe sunny f16 rule or Basic Daylight Exposure (BDE for short) tells you that the proper exposure in digital photography for a front lit subject is f16 with a shutter speed of 1ISO (thatrsquos 1 over the ISO in use) According to the sunny f16 rule at ISO 100 BDE would be f16 at 1100 second and at ISO 200 BDE would be f16 at 1200 second

When taking photos on a bright sunny day set the ISO of your camera to 100 the aperture to f16 and the shutter to 1100 second Then go out and take pictures of some front lit subjects As long as your subject isnrsquot white or black the exposures should be great No metering necessary

You can use equivalent exposures (different combinations of apertures shutter speeds and ISO settings that provide exactly the same exposure) for the sunny f16 rule The following table shows the equivalent exposures for the sunny f16 rule at ISO 100

Equivalent Exposures for the Sunny f16 Rule at ISO 100Aperture Shutter Speedf22 150 secondf16 1100 secondf11 1200 secondf8 1400 secondf56 1800 secondf4 11600 secondf28 13200 second

WHAT IS ldquoKEYSTONINGrdquo amp ldquoPINCUSIONrdquo Will be covered in my next article

NATURE PHOTOGRAPHY ndash BASIC DEFINITION

There should be no hand of man in a nature photo unless it relates to the subject The only one that was ever accepted was showing an injured bird that had been taken care of and recovered and was being released into the wild

I wonrsquot be at the October meeting as I will be visiting family in Indiana Have a good meeting

MIKE CLIPKA ndash EDUCATION CHAIRPERSON

16

17

Classes Start Oct 3rdSign Up Now wwwppsopcom

An Idiom For Photographersby Joe Baraban

Before I go any farther let me define the word Idiom An idiom is (1) An expression that cannot be understood from the meanings of its separate words but that has a separate meaning of its own (2) A form of a language that is spoken in a particular area and that uses some of its own words grammar and pronunciations

Here are some common idioms Sunday week for a week from Sunday Give way for retreat and Rock and Roll is a musical idiom The one Ive always thought was especially pertinent to photography and one I mention in my online class with the PPSOP and also in my Stretching Your Frame of Mind workshops I conduct around the planet is Theres more to it than meets the eye

In other words I tell my fellow photographers that theres two ways to look at a subject You can look at it with the left side of your brain the analytical side or the right side of your brain the creative side So many of my students dont look at things as they could be only as they are

Doing that will keep you from taking your photography to what I refer to asup a notch What I mean is that looking with the left side of your brain will only show you what things are Looking at those same things with the right side of your brain can show you what they could be Take the photo above for example

First allow me to digress for a moment I teach photographers how to use the basic elements of Visual Design and composition to create stronger images A complete description can be read by clicking on the link above

Ok so last week I was sitting in my backyard on my deck it was the end of a beautiful day Seventy two degrees and sunny so I had my book in one hand and my Bombay Martini and a bowl of nuts at the ready and close to my other hand I was trying to filter out all the sounds of a house being built next to us and occasionally looking up at what was going on The sun was setting behind the house that was next door and behind me and as the sun was setting the light was slowly disappearing from the bottom up leaving only the top part still in sunlight

If I had been looking at the house with the left side of my brain I would have only heard the incessant hammering and then seen the man working at the top of the house that was causing itthats what was Since Im always looking at things as they could be I saw more than just a house with a man working on the top floor I saw the Texture of the Crape Myrtles branches still bare from the Winter The square and rectangular Shapes and the blue Negative Space that defines and creates the Shapes Im always looking for ways to create Visual Tension and placing the man close to the edge of the frame is one of the ways The way the light is only left at the top of the construction is another and the contrast between his bright saturated red shirt against the soft blue sky and clouds is still another These elements of Visual Design and composition are all pieces that make up the finished puzzleanother idiom meaning the final photograph

Visit my website at wwwjoebarabancom and be sure to watch for upcoming workshops listed at the top of this blog Come shoot with me sometime and Ill show you what could be Dont forget to send me a photo and question to AskJoeBgmailcom - JoeB

18

Itrsquos All About the LightBy Kathleen Clemons

ldquoMy first thought is always of lightrdquo ~ Galen Rowell

I got my start in photography shooting sunrises from my front lawn back in 2003 Though my subject and location were limited they taught me much about the qualities of light and how quickly they change A gentle hint from Bryan Peterson (I was taking his online Understanding Exposure class) that there were other things to shoot besides sunrises got me off the lawn and where I am today Here are a couple from that first year

As photographers we need to pay close attention to light- we need to study itrsquos direction temperature quality intensity and how it is affecting our subjects After all as photographers we are painting with light

Sometimes when I am out shooting itrsquos the light that actually becomes my subject Great light on a landscape flower building person anything really can take my breath away At those times itrsquos the light that grabs my attention and makes me want to photograph the subject and often itrsquos nothing I had planned as my subject

I shot these two images from my deck last week as the sun was going down really the last bit of light on the bay I literally ran for my camera both times Within minutes the light was gone but I had my shots

19

Here are a few other images where the light is what caught my eye and really became my subject

Pay close attention to light Watch as it changes Study it See how it can sometimes make a subject glow or stand out how it really draws your eye Watch for backlighting see how side lighting can enhance texture how soft lighting can flatter and how light can become your main subject too

Happy ShootingKathleen

2015 Summer Iceland Photo Tour

Iceland is known for being a photographerrsquos paradise mostly because of the great variety in landscape along with exceptional light During summer time the combination of sunset and sunrise along with the unique landscape is what makes Iceland rare and desirable among photographers

Join William Yu and Iurie Belegurschi to Shoot Iceland June 17- 26 2015 details athttpwilliamyuphotoworkshopscomicelandhtml

20

21

How to be a professional Outdoor and Nature Photographerby Charlie Borland

If you are serious about your Nature Photography then dont miss your last chance this year to take How to be a professional Outdoor and Nature Photographer from Charlie Borland Charlie has made a living at this for a long time and this is a chance to take a 6 week course from him that has a lifetime of content Todays tip is from Charlie where he walks you through a shoot from concept to shooting and then processing

httpswwwyoutubecomwatchv=8oR-I6uZ9Bk

22

Tips to Improve Your Fall Photos Don Smith Photography

Monthly Photo Tip September 2014

This Sunday morning I will be departing for Jackson Hole Wyoming for the start of three consecutive fall workshops The first two will be spent photographing the fabulous fall color of Grand Teton National Park Ill then be off to Moab Utah for my ArchesCanyonlandsMonument Valley Workshop

Simply stated I love this time of year There has already been some snow falling in Wyoming and the leaves have been turning - yes fall is officially here

With that in mind I thought Id share my favorite fall photography tips

The first has to do with light I get asked all the time when is the best time of day to photograph fall color

Well fortunately enough really anytime though Id still say to get out for sunrise and shoot until the sun gets too harsh The same can be said for the other side of the day Fortunately the suns angle has been lowering so we are no longer faced with hard summer light

Under indirect light (dawn dusk and cloudy weather) colors (especially reds and yellows) tend to really pop They are very saturated under this type of light as long as you are using your polarlizer All foliage has a waxy sheen to it and polarizers help reduce that sheen allowing for a more saturated look

When the sun does make an appearance I try to move as much as 90 off-angle and let the light skim That being said my favorite light is backlight Simply place the sun behind the leaves your are photographing and watch the color explode

Another overlooked tip is to look for leaves already on the ground (as I did with these maples above) I try to either juxtapose them with another subject or find some sort of pattern or relationship between the leaves

The color itself is not always predictable as temperature and moisture play a large role in producing fall color As days grow shorter and nights grow longer and cooler biochemical processes in the leaf begin to paint the landscape with Natures autumn palette

Why Is Temperature ImportantA succession of warm sunny days and cool crisp but not freezing nights seems to bring about the most spectacular color displays During these days lots of sugars are produced in the leaf but the cool nights and the gradual closing of veins going into the leaf prevent these sugars from moving out These conditions-lots of sugar and lots of light-spur production of the brilliant anthocyanin pigments which tint reds purples and crimson Because carotenoids are always present in leaves the yellow and gold colors remain fairly constant from year to year

Why Is Moisture ImportantThe amount of moisture in the soil also affects autumn colors Like the weather soil moisture varies greatly from year to year The countless combinations of these two highly variable factors assure that no two autumns can be exactly alike A late spring or a severe summer drought can delay the onset of fall color by a few weeks A warm period during fall will also lower the intensity of autumn colors A warm wet spring favorable summer weather and warm sunny fall days with cool nights should produce the most brilliant autumn colors

Fortunately for us photographers fall offers a palette that is irresistible to our souls So get out this fall with your camera and get some much needed nurturing

A Simplified Method To Workflow Video SeriesLearn to process like a pro This video series has proven extremely popular It contains (26) videos and teaches you in 65 hours what took me 12 years to learn

Please check out Chapter headings and this short introductory video (and enjoy my son Aarons piano composition)

The Crack Zion National Park Utah

Canon 5DMKIII 70mm f16 1 second ISO 100 Singh-Ray Thin LB Polarizer

Lexar Digital Media

23

2014 Photo Workshops 3rd Annual Fall Color and Mountain Grandeur Grand Teton National Park - September 23-27 2014 (WORKSHOP 1 - SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

3rd Annual Fall Color and Mountain Grandeur Grand Teton National Park - September 28-October 2 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

6th Annual Full Moon Over Red Rock Arches and Monument Valley Mittens ArchesCanyonlands National Parks and Full Moonrise at Monument Valley - October 4-8 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

4th Annual Bryce Canyon Hoodoos and ZIon Fall Color Photo Workshop Fall Photography Workshop Bryce Canyon and Zion National Parks - November 1-5 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

2015 Photo Workshops 6th Annual Winter in Big Sur and the Monterey Peninsula - Magic Light Moonlight and Pfeiffer Beach Arch - January 4-7 2015 (4 spots left) 7th Annual Northern Arizona Workshop - Grand Canyon (with crescent moon) Page (Upper Antelope Canyon with light shafts and Horseshoe Bend) and Sedona - March 20-21 2015 (4 spots left) Springtime In Big Sur and the Monterey Peninsula - 7th Annual Wildflowers Full Moon Misty Fog and Headland Color Workshop - March 30 - April 2 2015 (3 spots remain) Don Smith and Gary Hart Spring at Oregons Columbia River Gorge Wildflowers and Waterfalls April 14 - 17 2015 (WORKSHOP SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

Don Smith and Gary Hart Spring at Oregons Columbia River Gorge Wildflowers and Waterfalls April 18 - 21 2015 (WORKSHOP SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY) Kauai Photo Workshop June 19-23 (Sign up before September 1 to receive an Earl-Bird discount of $150 off the full workshop price) (2 spots remain) Don Smith and Gary Hart Grand Canyon Monsoon and Lightning August 10-14 2015 (spots already filling) Private and Small Group Instruction

Page 4: Stockton Camera Club · 2018-09-06 · Stockton Camera Club The Shutter Tripper October2014 Hummer in Silhouette ... Stockton, CA 95202-2706 Phone: 209-464-2299 | Fax: 209-464-9229

4

SF SkylineCristine Blue

Pt Reyes BoatSharon McLemore

Spiral StaircaseGary Brown

DelicateKris Borgen

Myyyy Petals are Prettier than Yourrrr Wings

Trey Steinhart

Stratified SandstoneDean Taylor

5

Monarch ButterflyMac McCormick

Morning SongCarol Marshall

FlowDean Taylor

SunsetRicardo Mendoza

Thunderstorm over Lake TahoeSuzanne Nichols

Praying MantisHeide Stover

SCC Officers 2014OfficersPresidentHeide StoverEmail h1stoveraolcom

Vice President ProgramsSharon McLemore 401-0192 Email sfmsapaolcom

Vice President CompetitionAddy Street 403-8349Email sccsubmitgmailcom

SecretaryEm McLaren 823-7287emmclarencomcastnet

TreasurerJanelle DeRuosi 838-1881Email jderuosiphotographygmailcom

Committee Chairs

Activities ChairpersonJoanne Sogsti 663-7044Email Stanjoanneaolcom

Education ChairpersonMike Clipka 858-5198 Email mcphotosjunocom

Hospitality ChairpersonDebra GoinsEmail knollstreetphotographygmailcom

Print Competition Chairperson Trey Steinhart 471-8438Email Steinhart4sbcglobalnet

Refreshments Chairperson Sheldon McCormick 931-0461Emailsmccormickclearwirenet

Shutter Tripper Doug Ridgway 617-7050Email doug_flyfisheryahoocom

Web MasterJanelle DeRuosi 838-1881Email jderuosiphotographygmailcom

6

Presidentrsquos MessageOctober 2014By Heide Stover

Welcome to all the new members and returning members It is good to see people interested in the club and our activities I would like to ask all members to try and help each other when possible and in particular letrsquos help the new members New members feel free to contact me with questions If I cannot help I will try to find someone that can

For those of you not aware of this at 530 pm on the night of our competition meeting Sharon and the person judging that evening have dinner in the coffee shop Any member is welcome to join in You do need to pay for your own meal though

I will be working on setting up our year end banquet at Spaghetti Factory soon Those of you with special dietary needs please let me know so I can do my best to accommodate you

The Sandhill Cranes should be showing up soon and are wonderful to watch and listen to as well as photograph Other migrating birds well be around as well And the Sandhill Crane Festival is coming up Keep that in mind when you are out shooting

As most of you know I have cancer and will be going through chemo for the next 4 weeks I will still do the best I can to answer any questions but please be patient if I do not answer right away For digital entries you can also contact Addy or Sharon Dean or Sharon can help with questions about the Camera Club Council in Fresno Those of us going to Fresno for the meeting can take down any prints or forms for those that would like to enter but cannot go down there

Get out there and shoot

Heide

219 E Weber Ave (Across From The Court House)Stockton CA 95202-2706

Phone 209-464-2299 | Fax 209-464-9229wwwulmerphotocom

Email Ulmerphotoaolcom

A Big Thank You to Our Sponsors

7

Septemberrsquos Monthly Meetingby Em Mclaren

Heide opened the meeting and Debra introduced guests and welcomed Don West and Rick Mendoza as recent new members

1 Heide asked for people to volunteer for the nominating committee Debra Elizaberth and Susanne volunteered

2 Joanne reminded people about the Renaissance Fair at Casa De Fruita which has started and runs thru Oct 12 It is $25 per person and $10 parking You can register on line She plans to go on Sat Oct4 If you want to carpool please let her know There will be lots of photo opportunities and on that day only a costume conteststanjoanneaolcom

3 Heide congratulated all our club winners at the Lodi Grape Festival

4 Janelle said there will be a photo walk Oct 11 Sat evening in Modesto Please contact her for further details or if you would like more information waynelle726sbcglobalnet

5 Sharon announced that the FotoClave will be held at the Hilton Hotel in Concord on Nov 7-9th It is $70 to attend plus extra to attend the banquet There will be great speakers and a good opportunity to meet members from other clubs in the area This may be the last FotoClave to be held For more info or to register go to FotoClaveslickpiccom

6 Sharon introduced Rich Turner as our judge for the photo competition He has been a photographer for several newspapers including the Stockton Record and now has his own photography business He has done work for the corporate world and is passionate about photographing the San Joaquin Delta He has a new book out about the California Delta and will have a photo show in 2015 which will travel around California on exhibit for 2 years He also is doing photo essays He brought his photo note cards sets to give to tonightrsquos competition winners He presented a brief show of his work before the judging began If you would like to find out more info about him or his new book please go to richtturnerphotocom

DIGITAL COMPETITION WINNERS FOR SEPT

BEGINNERS ldquoHummer in Silhouetterdquo by Christine BlueADVANCED ldquoDamselflyrdquo by Ricardo Mendoza

VERY ADVANCED ldquoDelightfulrdquo by Trey Steinhart

PRINT COMPETITION WINNERS FOR SEPT

BEGINNERS None entered in this categoryADVANCED ldquoApple Delightrdquo by Elizabeth Parrish

VERY ADVANCED Dandelion Seedsrdquo by Joann Sogsti

Congratulations to all the winners

The Special Subject for October will be NATURE

Please let me know if there are any corrections or additions to the notes Thanks Em McLaren

8

Stockton Camera ClubMonthly Competition - September 2014

DIGITAL COMPETITION WINNERS FOR SEPT

BEGINNERS ldquoHummer in Silhouetterdquo by Christine BlueADVANCED ldquoDamselflyrdquo by Ricardo Mendoza

VERY ADVANCED ldquoDelightfulrdquo by Trey Steinhart

PRINT COMPETITION WINNERS FOR SEPT

BEGINNERS None entered in this categoryADVANCED ldquoApple Delightrdquo by Elizabeth Parrish

VERY ADVANCED Dandelion Seedsrdquo by Joann SogstiPlease check out the to view the images that received the top scores wwwstockton-cameraclubcom

September 2014 - Class B TOTAL OPEN SUBJECT FEB MAR MAY JULY SEPT OCT DECSusanne Nichols 223 168 55 46 45 43 44 45 0 0Shari Liwanag 172 128 43 46 44 40 42 0 0 0Adrianne Street 172 128 43 43 42 40 47 0 0 0Christine Blue 133 98 35 46 43 0 0 44 0 0Jim Cahill 75 75 0 32 11 32 0 0 0 0Bret Hunter 45 34 11 45 0 0 0 0 0 0Ron Wetherell 45 22 23 0 23 0 22 0Pete Alameda 43 32 11 0 0 0 43 0 0 0Lanny Brown 21 10 11 0 0 0 0 21 0 0

September 2014 - Class A TOTAL OPEN SS FEB MAR MAY JULY SEPT OCT DECKris Borgen 219 165 54 46 43 44 43 43 0 0Gary Brown 215 161 54 44 44 42 42 43 0 0Sheldon McCormick 208 155 53 43 42 40 41 42 0 0Debra Goins 208 165 43 34 43 45 44 42 0 0Elizabeth Parrish 204 163 41 34 44 42 40 44 0 0Mike Clipka 126 95 31 0 0 42 43 41 0 0

Karleen Gansberg 95 64 31 0 44 41 0 10 0 0Charlene Martin 47 35 12 47 0 0 0 0 0 0Ricardo Mendoza 46 36 10 0 0 0 0 46 0 0Jim Wells 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Kim Romena 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Paula Wells 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Danny Ho 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Stockton Camera ClubMonthly Competition - September 2014

(Continued)

September 2014 - Class AA TOTAL OPEN SUBJECT FEB MAR MAY JULY SEPT OCT DECSharon McLemore 230 173 57 47 46 46 46 45 0 0Carol Marshall 225 169 56 45 46 45 46 43 0 0Joanne Sogsti 222 168 54 45 46 43 44 44 0 0Heide Stover 222 167 55 44 45 45 44 44 0 0Em McLaren 220 166 54 45 45 43 45 42 0 0Doug Ridgway 219 175 44 47 46 46 33 47 0 0Stan Sogsti 217 162 56 44 44 44 42 43 0 0Dean Taylor 186 140 46 0 46 46 47 47 0 0Trey Steinhart 180 136 44 46 0 44 44 46 0 0Janelle DeRuosi 43 32 11 0 0 0 0 43 0 0Elliott Pasinsky 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

9

Nikon Legend Behind the Lens

Tony Sweet

Canon Explorer of Light

Rick Sammon

Michael Frye

Joe Hearst

Gary Crabbe

Eric Harness

Gail Pierce

John Ballou

Lisa Rigge

Pat Toth-Smith

Michael Maloney

November 7 8 amp 9 2014

An Astounding Weekend of Photography

Renowned photographers will engage you with information on new and lesser-known techniques and incredible images From our keynote

speakers Nikon Legend Tony Sweet and Canon Explorer of Light Rick Sammon to an additional nine presenters in three rooms on

Saturday you will be inspired and entertained In addition at FotoClave we will show the results of the competition among

members of participating camera club councils

fotoclave 2014

Join Us for FotoClave 2014 Hilton Concord Hotel 1970 Diamond Blvd Concord CA 94520

Sponsored by N4C

2014 Calendar of Events

10

Every 3rd Thursday(Except April June amp

Aug) 630 PM

West Lane Bowling AlleyStockton

Membership MeetingContact Heide Stover

h1stoveraolcom

ThursdayOctober 16

West Lane Bowling AlleyStockton

October General MeetingSpecial Subject - Nature

ThursdayNovember 6

Cottage RoomHutchins Street Square

Lodi CA

Drop Off EntriesSandhill Crane Festival

Friday - SundayNovember 7 8 amp 9

Cottage RoomHutchins Street Square

Lodi CA

2014 Sandhill Crane Festivalwwwcranefestivalcom

Friday - SundayNovember 7 8 amp 9

Hilton Concord Hotel1970 Diamond BlvdConcord CA 94520

FotoClave 2014fotoclaveslickpiccom

SundayDecember 7 2014

Crowne Plaza Sacramento5321 Date Avenue

(I-80 Madison Ave)Sacramento Ca

Photographic Society of AmericaGold Rush Chapter Meeting

wwwpsagoldrushorg

ThursdayDecember 18

West Lane Bowling AlleyStockton

December General MeetingSpecial Subject - Travel

A GENERAL RULES1 Only paid-up members may enter club competition 2 Regular print and digital image competition period Once each month except January A competition year is February through December Current regular meetings are February March May July September October and December The number of meetings may change from time to time at the discretion of the Board of Directors and approval of the general membership as facilities permit The Annual Awards Dinner will be held in January3 A total of four (4) images (all prints all digital or a combination of both) may be entered each competition month A total of three (3) images may be entered in the Open Division and a total of one (1) in the Special Subject Division The number of entries may change from time to time at the discretion of the Board of Directors and the approval of the general membership 4 Each image will be scored from 6 to 12 points All prints or digital images receiving 11 or 12 points will be classed as an honor image The title of each print or digital image entered will be read before being evaluated The name of the maker will be read for 11-point honor winners Makerrsquos names will be announced for the 12 point images after the Print amp Digital Image-of-the-Month winners are chosen 5 A print or digital image that does not receive an honor score may be re-entered one more time in the same division 6 A print or digital image may be entered in all divisions for which it qualifies ie an honor image in Open may also be entered in the Special Subject Division at another competition A print or digital image that receives an honor score may not be re-entered in the same division7 Any print or digital image that appears to be ineligible for competition or not qualified for a specific division could expect to be challenged The Competition Vice-President shall decide whether or not the image is acceptable8 The exhibitor must have exposed each negative slide or digital image entered All images submitted for judging must be the work of the photographermaker including the taking of the images and any digital enhancements andor manipulation of the image This does not apply to the processing of film or printing by a commercial processor9 The same image should not be entered both as a print and a projected digital image in the same competition10 In the event of absence or barring unforeseen circumstances a member may submit make-up prints or digital images for one competition night per competition year and whenever possible must submit all make-up prints or digital images at the meeting immediately following the month a member failed or was unable to submit the prints or digital images Make-ups in the Special Subject Division must be the same subject as the month missed Also in case of absence a member may assign the responsibility of submitting his or her prints andor digital images for competition to another member11 A club member who serves as judge cannot enter his or her own prints or digital images in the same competition The judgersquos make-up prints or digital images can then be entered in another competition during that competition year This

11

2014 Competition Policy

is in addition to the once-a-year make-up provision already allowed12 Prints or digital images may be projectedviewed briefly before the judging of each division if the judge indicates heshe would like a preview

B PRINT ENTRY RULES1 Each print entered must have a completed label attached to the back of the print including name of maker title date entered and Division (Open or Special Subject) The writing or printing on the form must be legible Labels must be attached on the back of the print in the upper left-hand corner for correct viewing of the print2 All prints must be matted or mounted with a total size (including mat board) of no larger than 18rdquo X 24rdquo and no smaller than 8rdquo X 10rdquo Exception One side of a Panorama Print may be no larger than 36rdquo Prints that are smaller than 5rdquo X 7rdquo will not be accepted The makerrsquos name must not appear on the viewing surface of the image Framed prints shall not be entered3 Prints accompanied by entry forms should be submitted no later than 15 minutes prior to the start of the regular monthly meeting4 Prints receiving a score of 12 points in each class will be regrouped and judged for selection for the Print-of-the-Month honors Print-of-the-Month honors will be given in both Class A amp B C DIGITAL IMAGE ENTRY RULES1 Digital images must be submitted in a format and by the deadline specified by the Competition Vice-President Digital images may be submitted by email mailed (CD) or delivered (CD) to the Competition Vice-President Definition of Digital Image An image taken with a digital camera a negative slide or print scanned into the computer and processed digitally2 Images must be in a format compatible with the projector The key thing to keep in mind when formatting photos for submission is that the projector we use in the competition has a (maximum) resolution of 1024 x 768 pixels This means that any photo that exceeds this size in either dimension could end-up being cropped by the projector In other words the image width cannot be more than 1024 pixels and the image height cannot be more than 768 pixels If your image is horizontal only change the width to 1024 if your image is vertical only change the height to 768 Do not change both Down-sizing the image from the ldquonativerdquo resolution coming out of your camera also significantly reduces the file size This helps when emailing the files and takes-up less space on our hard-drives3 The makerrsquos name title of image date entered and division (Open or Special Subject) must be included as the title of the image When you have finished re-sizing your image save your image with a new title For example do a Save as Smith_Sunrise Splendor_05-13_Ojpeg (O-Open or SS-Special Subject) Specify whether you are Beginner or Advanced4 Digital Images receiving a score of 12 points in each class will be regrouped and judged for selection for the Digital Image-of-the-Month honors Digital Image-of-the-Month honors will be given in Class A AA amp B

Mike Clipkandash Education ChairpersonOctober 2014

How to Colorize Old (Black amp White) Photo ndash Photoshop TutorialBy Manesh K Filed in photoshop

Photo Edit Download wwwmyimageconvertercomBrowse Edit amp Convert Images Across Any Image Format - Get App

Today we are going to do some photo manipulation with Photoshop In the tutorial below we are going to guide you through patching up spots in an old black amp white photo and then colorizing it

First wersquoll run you through on removing white patches from photo and then wersquoll proceed to coloring it The steps are pretty standard Load up your Photoshop and off we goTo follow through the entire tutorial we suggest you download and use the following image

Step 1 Wersquoll start by removing the white patches on the image Choose Clone Stamp Tool and by pressing Alt key pick the plain and appropriate surface near all white patches and apply it on white patch Continue this process until all patches get removedAfter removing all patches your poor image will look clean as shown in image

12

Clipkarsquos CornerEducation Articles by Mike Clipka

13

Step 2Next wersquoll proceed with coloring the image It would be bad idea to colorize the image as a whole wersquoll do them one by one an object at a timeFirst wersquoll select the hat by making the use of Magnetic Lasso Tool ndash like this

Step 3To colorize it we will use the Hue and Saturation (HSL) option There are many ways to colorize an object but HSL is perhaps one of the easiest and most flexible

Proceeding to colorizing the hat add these values to the (HSL) 360 35 ndash 26 appropriately (While using HSL on that window do not forget to turn on Colorize option)

Step 4After applying color the hat may look a little plain Letrsquos add some Noise to it Select Filters -gt Noise -gt Add Noise and give amount ldquo5rdquo to it

Check Monochromatic option to get a smoother noise effect See the next image for its differences

Step 5Next the coat The process is same ndash only different HSL values which are respectively 42 10 ndash 63

To make the overall look of coat more natural instead of using Noise tool we take advantage of Grain Texture option You can find it under Filter -gt Filter Gallery -gt in Texture tab -gt Grain

Select the following options ndash Intensity ldquo10rdquo Contrast ldquo50rdquo and Grain Type ldquoSoftrdquo

14

Step 6Moving forward ndash the shoes To give shoes a shiny effect we are going to use Image menu -gt Adjustments -gt Variations Select ldquoMidtonesrdquo and click Ok Try some combination of CMYK colors until you get a boot of this color

Step 7Next up the door First letrsquos color the door borders Select one side border of door by using Rectangle Marquee Tool Add 15 45 -53 values in HSL tool Then select Filter -gt Filter Gallery -gt in Texture tab -gt select Grain option and keep Intensity ldquo12rdquo Contrast ldquo50rdquo select Grain type ldquoEnlargedrdquo

Follow the same procedure to all the borders of the door

Step 8Next we proceed to coloring rectangles between the doors with the following HSL values55 20 -26 and in Texture Grain keep intensity ldquo12rdquo contrast ldquo50rdquo and Grain type ldquoEnlargedrdquo Step 9Wersquoll wrap up coloring the door by adding colors to the borders HSL values of 25 7 -69 Then under Texture Grain keep Intensity ldquo12rdquo Contrast ldquo50rdquo and letrsquos add extra noise by selecting Grain type ldquoRegularrdquo Step 10After the door we proceed coloring the soil To color the soil select that portion by usingMagic Wand Tool and then keep HSL values 20 24 -56

Step 11Last but not least we will color the wooden background of the image To give it a it a wood look and feel we give it a HSL value of 31 53 -45 and then add Noise ldquo5rdquo by checking theMonochromatic option

After all this procedures finally you will see the output like this

Color CorrectionWe are done coloring the image Now we proceed to the final and most important part ndash color correction Color correction when done right will give the image its correct mood and make it more realistic

To increase the brightness of the image we go to the following option Image menu -gt Adjustments -gt Curves and add ldquo186rdquo for Output and ldquo164rdquo for Input

Letrsquos brighten up the following section of the image (where arrow in pointed to) First we select the portion with Rectangle Marquee tool Then go to Filter -gt Filter Gallery -gt Distort tab and select Diffuse Glow with the following values Graininess ldquo0rdquo Glow Amount ldquo11rdquo Clear Amount ldquo15rdquo And finally proceed to Image menu -gt Adjustments -gt Curves and add ldquo200rdquo for Ouptut and ldquo188rdquo for Input Follow the above process for the remaining parts of image but with different values inDiffuse Glow Graininess ldquo2rdquo Glow Amount ldquo5rdquo Clear Amount ldquo15rdquo Curvesrsquo not required

To darken the shadows of the hat and the coat letrsquos use the Burn Tool and by selectingRange Midtones and decreasing the Exposure value to ldquo20rdquo apply it on shadows part appropriately

Wersquoll use the Dodge Tool to brighten up the coat and hat so it looks as though the lights are coming in from the right side and to give a sense of thickness for the door borders we use the Burn Tool

And herersquos how your final output will look like (or similar) after some color corrections Editorrsquos note This post is written by Manesh K for Hongkiatcom Manesh is an Animator by profession and owner of Howtouse-photoshopcom where he helps people present their creativity digitally with Photoshop tutorials and useful resources

Herersquos a link to a 7+ minute You Tube tutorial on coloring Black amp White photos in Photoshophttpwwwyoutubecomwatchv=C2Srw245R7U

The Sunny f16 Rule for Digital Exposure By Jim Doty Jr

Part of the Digital Photography Exposure For Dummies Cheat SheetThe sunny f16 rule or Basic Daylight Exposure (BDE for short) tells you that the proper exposure in digital photography for a front lit subject is f16 with a shutter speed of 1ISO (thatrsquos 1 over the ISO in use) According to the sunny f16 rule at ISO 100 BDE would be f16 at 1100 second and at ISO 200 BDE would be f16 at 1200 second

When taking photos on a bright sunny day set the ISO of your camera to 100 the aperture to f16 and the shutter to 1100 second Then go out and take pictures of some front lit subjects As long as your subject isnrsquot white or black the exposures should be great No metering necessary

You can use equivalent exposures (different combinations of apertures shutter speeds and ISO settings that provide exactly the same exposure) for the sunny f16 rule The following table shows the equivalent exposures for the sunny f16 rule at ISO 100

Equivalent Exposures for the Sunny f16 Rule at ISO 100Aperture Shutter Speedf22 150 secondf16 1100 secondf11 1200 secondf8 1400 secondf56 1800 secondf4 11600 secondf28 13200 second

WHAT IS ldquoKEYSTONINGrdquo amp ldquoPINCUSIONrdquo Will be covered in my next article

NATURE PHOTOGRAPHY ndash BASIC DEFINITION

There should be no hand of man in a nature photo unless it relates to the subject The only one that was ever accepted was showing an injured bird that had been taken care of and recovered and was being released into the wild

I wonrsquot be at the October meeting as I will be visiting family in Indiana Have a good meeting

MIKE CLIPKA ndash EDUCATION CHAIRPERSON

16

17

Classes Start Oct 3rdSign Up Now wwwppsopcom

An Idiom For Photographersby Joe Baraban

Before I go any farther let me define the word Idiom An idiom is (1) An expression that cannot be understood from the meanings of its separate words but that has a separate meaning of its own (2) A form of a language that is spoken in a particular area and that uses some of its own words grammar and pronunciations

Here are some common idioms Sunday week for a week from Sunday Give way for retreat and Rock and Roll is a musical idiom The one Ive always thought was especially pertinent to photography and one I mention in my online class with the PPSOP and also in my Stretching Your Frame of Mind workshops I conduct around the planet is Theres more to it than meets the eye

In other words I tell my fellow photographers that theres two ways to look at a subject You can look at it with the left side of your brain the analytical side or the right side of your brain the creative side So many of my students dont look at things as they could be only as they are

Doing that will keep you from taking your photography to what I refer to asup a notch What I mean is that looking with the left side of your brain will only show you what things are Looking at those same things with the right side of your brain can show you what they could be Take the photo above for example

First allow me to digress for a moment I teach photographers how to use the basic elements of Visual Design and composition to create stronger images A complete description can be read by clicking on the link above

Ok so last week I was sitting in my backyard on my deck it was the end of a beautiful day Seventy two degrees and sunny so I had my book in one hand and my Bombay Martini and a bowl of nuts at the ready and close to my other hand I was trying to filter out all the sounds of a house being built next to us and occasionally looking up at what was going on The sun was setting behind the house that was next door and behind me and as the sun was setting the light was slowly disappearing from the bottom up leaving only the top part still in sunlight

If I had been looking at the house with the left side of my brain I would have only heard the incessant hammering and then seen the man working at the top of the house that was causing itthats what was Since Im always looking at things as they could be I saw more than just a house with a man working on the top floor I saw the Texture of the Crape Myrtles branches still bare from the Winter The square and rectangular Shapes and the blue Negative Space that defines and creates the Shapes Im always looking for ways to create Visual Tension and placing the man close to the edge of the frame is one of the ways The way the light is only left at the top of the construction is another and the contrast between his bright saturated red shirt against the soft blue sky and clouds is still another These elements of Visual Design and composition are all pieces that make up the finished puzzleanother idiom meaning the final photograph

Visit my website at wwwjoebarabancom and be sure to watch for upcoming workshops listed at the top of this blog Come shoot with me sometime and Ill show you what could be Dont forget to send me a photo and question to AskJoeBgmailcom - JoeB

18

Itrsquos All About the LightBy Kathleen Clemons

ldquoMy first thought is always of lightrdquo ~ Galen Rowell

I got my start in photography shooting sunrises from my front lawn back in 2003 Though my subject and location were limited they taught me much about the qualities of light and how quickly they change A gentle hint from Bryan Peterson (I was taking his online Understanding Exposure class) that there were other things to shoot besides sunrises got me off the lawn and where I am today Here are a couple from that first year

As photographers we need to pay close attention to light- we need to study itrsquos direction temperature quality intensity and how it is affecting our subjects After all as photographers we are painting with light

Sometimes when I am out shooting itrsquos the light that actually becomes my subject Great light on a landscape flower building person anything really can take my breath away At those times itrsquos the light that grabs my attention and makes me want to photograph the subject and often itrsquos nothing I had planned as my subject

I shot these two images from my deck last week as the sun was going down really the last bit of light on the bay I literally ran for my camera both times Within minutes the light was gone but I had my shots

19

Here are a few other images where the light is what caught my eye and really became my subject

Pay close attention to light Watch as it changes Study it See how it can sometimes make a subject glow or stand out how it really draws your eye Watch for backlighting see how side lighting can enhance texture how soft lighting can flatter and how light can become your main subject too

Happy ShootingKathleen

2015 Summer Iceland Photo Tour

Iceland is known for being a photographerrsquos paradise mostly because of the great variety in landscape along with exceptional light During summer time the combination of sunset and sunrise along with the unique landscape is what makes Iceland rare and desirable among photographers

Join William Yu and Iurie Belegurschi to Shoot Iceland June 17- 26 2015 details athttpwilliamyuphotoworkshopscomicelandhtml

20

21

How to be a professional Outdoor and Nature Photographerby Charlie Borland

If you are serious about your Nature Photography then dont miss your last chance this year to take How to be a professional Outdoor and Nature Photographer from Charlie Borland Charlie has made a living at this for a long time and this is a chance to take a 6 week course from him that has a lifetime of content Todays tip is from Charlie where he walks you through a shoot from concept to shooting and then processing

httpswwwyoutubecomwatchv=8oR-I6uZ9Bk

22

Tips to Improve Your Fall Photos Don Smith Photography

Monthly Photo Tip September 2014

This Sunday morning I will be departing for Jackson Hole Wyoming for the start of three consecutive fall workshops The first two will be spent photographing the fabulous fall color of Grand Teton National Park Ill then be off to Moab Utah for my ArchesCanyonlandsMonument Valley Workshop

Simply stated I love this time of year There has already been some snow falling in Wyoming and the leaves have been turning - yes fall is officially here

With that in mind I thought Id share my favorite fall photography tips

The first has to do with light I get asked all the time when is the best time of day to photograph fall color

Well fortunately enough really anytime though Id still say to get out for sunrise and shoot until the sun gets too harsh The same can be said for the other side of the day Fortunately the suns angle has been lowering so we are no longer faced with hard summer light

Under indirect light (dawn dusk and cloudy weather) colors (especially reds and yellows) tend to really pop They are very saturated under this type of light as long as you are using your polarlizer All foliage has a waxy sheen to it and polarizers help reduce that sheen allowing for a more saturated look

When the sun does make an appearance I try to move as much as 90 off-angle and let the light skim That being said my favorite light is backlight Simply place the sun behind the leaves your are photographing and watch the color explode

Another overlooked tip is to look for leaves already on the ground (as I did with these maples above) I try to either juxtapose them with another subject or find some sort of pattern or relationship between the leaves

The color itself is not always predictable as temperature and moisture play a large role in producing fall color As days grow shorter and nights grow longer and cooler biochemical processes in the leaf begin to paint the landscape with Natures autumn palette

Why Is Temperature ImportantA succession of warm sunny days and cool crisp but not freezing nights seems to bring about the most spectacular color displays During these days lots of sugars are produced in the leaf but the cool nights and the gradual closing of veins going into the leaf prevent these sugars from moving out These conditions-lots of sugar and lots of light-spur production of the brilliant anthocyanin pigments which tint reds purples and crimson Because carotenoids are always present in leaves the yellow and gold colors remain fairly constant from year to year

Why Is Moisture ImportantThe amount of moisture in the soil also affects autumn colors Like the weather soil moisture varies greatly from year to year The countless combinations of these two highly variable factors assure that no two autumns can be exactly alike A late spring or a severe summer drought can delay the onset of fall color by a few weeks A warm period during fall will also lower the intensity of autumn colors A warm wet spring favorable summer weather and warm sunny fall days with cool nights should produce the most brilliant autumn colors

Fortunately for us photographers fall offers a palette that is irresistible to our souls So get out this fall with your camera and get some much needed nurturing

A Simplified Method To Workflow Video SeriesLearn to process like a pro This video series has proven extremely popular It contains (26) videos and teaches you in 65 hours what took me 12 years to learn

Please check out Chapter headings and this short introductory video (and enjoy my son Aarons piano composition)

The Crack Zion National Park Utah

Canon 5DMKIII 70mm f16 1 second ISO 100 Singh-Ray Thin LB Polarizer

Lexar Digital Media

23

2014 Photo Workshops 3rd Annual Fall Color and Mountain Grandeur Grand Teton National Park - September 23-27 2014 (WORKSHOP 1 - SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

3rd Annual Fall Color and Mountain Grandeur Grand Teton National Park - September 28-October 2 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

6th Annual Full Moon Over Red Rock Arches and Monument Valley Mittens ArchesCanyonlands National Parks and Full Moonrise at Monument Valley - October 4-8 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

4th Annual Bryce Canyon Hoodoos and ZIon Fall Color Photo Workshop Fall Photography Workshop Bryce Canyon and Zion National Parks - November 1-5 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

2015 Photo Workshops 6th Annual Winter in Big Sur and the Monterey Peninsula - Magic Light Moonlight and Pfeiffer Beach Arch - January 4-7 2015 (4 spots left) 7th Annual Northern Arizona Workshop - Grand Canyon (with crescent moon) Page (Upper Antelope Canyon with light shafts and Horseshoe Bend) and Sedona - March 20-21 2015 (4 spots left) Springtime In Big Sur and the Monterey Peninsula - 7th Annual Wildflowers Full Moon Misty Fog and Headland Color Workshop - March 30 - April 2 2015 (3 spots remain) Don Smith and Gary Hart Spring at Oregons Columbia River Gorge Wildflowers and Waterfalls April 14 - 17 2015 (WORKSHOP SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

Don Smith and Gary Hart Spring at Oregons Columbia River Gorge Wildflowers and Waterfalls April 18 - 21 2015 (WORKSHOP SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY) Kauai Photo Workshop June 19-23 (Sign up before September 1 to receive an Earl-Bird discount of $150 off the full workshop price) (2 spots remain) Don Smith and Gary Hart Grand Canyon Monsoon and Lightning August 10-14 2015 (spots already filling) Private and Small Group Instruction

Page 5: Stockton Camera Club · 2018-09-06 · Stockton Camera Club The Shutter Tripper October2014 Hummer in Silhouette ... Stockton, CA 95202-2706 Phone: 209-464-2299 | Fax: 209-464-9229

5

Monarch ButterflyMac McCormick

Morning SongCarol Marshall

FlowDean Taylor

SunsetRicardo Mendoza

Thunderstorm over Lake TahoeSuzanne Nichols

Praying MantisHeide Stover

SCC Officers 2014OfficersPresidentHeide StoverEmail h1stoveraolcom

Vice President ProgramsSharon McLemore 401-0192 Email sfmsapaolcom

Vice President CompetitionAddy Street 403-8349Email sccsubmitgmailcom

SecretaryEm McLaren 823-7287emmclarencomcastnet

TreasurerJanelle DeRuosi 838-1881Email jderuosiphotographygmailcom

Committee Chairs

Activities ChairpersonJoanne Sogsti 663-7044Email Stanjoanneaolcom

Education ChairpersonMike Clipka 858-5198 Email mcphotosjunocom

Hospitality ChairpersonDebra GoinsEmail knollstreetphotographygmailcom

Print Competition Chairperson Trey Steinhart 471-8438Email Steinhart4sbcglobalnet

Refreshments Chairperson Sheldon McCormick 931-0461Emailsmccormickclearwirenet

Shutter Tripper Doug Ridgway 617-7050Email doug_flyfisheryahoocom

Web MasterJanelle DeRuosi 838-1881Email jderuosiphotographygmailcom

6

Presidentrsquos MessageOctober 2014By Heide Stover

Welcome to all the new members and returning members It is good to see people interested in the club and our activities I would like to ask all members to try and help each other when possible and in particular letrsquos help the new members New members feel free to contact me with questions If I cannot help I will try to find someone that can

For those of you not aware of this at 530 pm on the night of our competition meeting Sharon and the person judging that evening have dinner in the coffee shop Any member is welcome to join in You do need to pay for your own meal though

I will be working on setting up our year end banquet at Spaghetti Factory soon Those of you with special dietary needs please let me know so I can do my best to accommodate you

The Sandhill Cranes should be showing up soon and are wonderful to watch and listen to as well as photograph Other migrating birds well be around as well And the Sandhill Crane Festival is coming up Keep that in mind when you are out shooting

As most of you know I have cancer and will be going through chemo for the next 4 weeks I will still do the best I can to answer any questions but please be patient if I do not answer right away For digital entries you can also contact Addy or Sharon Dean or Sharon can help with questions about the Camera Club Council in Fresno Those of us going to Fresno for the meeting can take down any prints or forms for those that would like to enter but cannot go down there

Get out there and shoot

Heide

219 E Weber Ave (Across From The Court House)Stockton CA 95202-2706

Phone 209-464-2299 | Fax 209-464-9229wwwulmerphotocom

Email Ulmerphotoaolcom

A Big Thank You to Our Sponsors

7

Septemberrsquos Monthly Meetingby Em Mclaren

Heide opened the meeting and Debra introduced guests and welcomed Don West and Rick Mendoza as recent new members

1 Heide asked for people to volunteer for the nominating committee Debra Elizaberth and Susanne volunteered

2 Joanne reminded people about the Renaissance Fair at Casa De Fruita which has started and runs thru Oct 12 It is $25 per person and $10 parking You can register on line She plans to go on Sat Oct4 If you want to carpool please let her know There will be lots of photo opportunities and on that day only a costume conteststanjoanneaolcom

3 Heide congratulated all our club winners at the Lodi Grape Festival

4 Janelle said there will be a photo walk Oct 11 Sat evening in Modesto Please contact her for further details or if you would like more information waynelle726sbcglobalnet

5 Sharon announced that the FotoClave will be held at the Hilton Hotel in Concord on Nov 7-9th It is $70 to attend plus extra to attend the banquet There will be great speakers and a good opportunity to meet members from other clubs in the area This may be the last FotoClave to be held For more info or to register go to FotoClaveslickpiccom

6 Sharon introduced Rich Turner as our judge for the photo competition He has been a photographer for several newspapers including the Stockton Record and now has his own photography business He has done work for the corporate world and is passionate about photographing the San Joaquin Delta He has a new book out about the California Delta and will have a photo show in 2015 which will travel around California on exhibit for 2 years He also is doing photo essays He brought his photo note cards sets to give to tonightrsquos competition winners He presented a brief show of his work before the judging began If you would like to find out more info about him or his new book please go to richtturnerphotocom

DIGITAL COMPETITION WINNERS FOR SEPT

BEGINNERS ldquoHummer in Silhouetterdquo by Christine BlueADVANCED ldquoDamselflyrdquo by Ricardo Mendoza

VERY ADVANCED ldquoDelightfulrdquo by Trey Steinhart

PRINT COMPETITION WINNERS FOR SEPT

BEGINNERS None entered in this categoryADVANCED ldquoApple Delightrdquo by Elizabeth Parrish

VERY ADVANCED Dandelion Seedsrdquo by Joann Sogsti

Congratulations to all the winners

The Special Subject for October will be NATURE

Please let me know if there are any corrections or additions to the notes Thanks Em McLaren

8

Stockton Camera ClubMonthly Competition - September 2014

DIGITAL COMPETITION WINNERS FOR SEPT

BEGINNERS ldquoHummer in Silhouetterdquo by Christine BlueADVANCED ldquoDamselflyrdquo by Ricardo Mendoza

VERY ADVANCED ldquoDelightfulrdquo by Trey Steinhart

PRINT COMPETITION WINNERS FOR SEPT

BEGINNERS None entered in this categoryADVANCED ldquoApple Delightrdquo by Elizabeth Parrish

VERY ADVANCED Dandelion Seedsrdquo by Joann SogstiPlease check out the to view the images that received the top scores wwwstockton-cameraclubcom

September 2014 - Class B TOTAL OPEN SUBJECT FEB MAR MAY JULY SEPT OCT DECSusanne Nichols 223 168 55 46 45 43 44 45 0 0Shari Liwanag 172 128 43 46 44 40 42 0 0 0Adrianne Street 172 128 43 43 42 40 47 0 0 0Christine Blue 133 98 35 46 43 0 0 44 0 0Jim Cahill 75 75 0 32 11 32 0 0 0 0Bret Hunter 45 34 11 45 0 0 0 0 0 0Ron Wetherell 45 22 23 0 23 0 22 0Pete Alameda 43 32 11 0 0 0 43 0 0 0Lanny Brown 21 10 11 0 0 0 0 21 0 0

September 2014 - Class A TOTAL OPEN SS FEB MAR MAY JULY SEPT OCT DECKris Borgen 219 165 54 46 43 44 43 43 0 0Gary Brown 215 161 54 44 44 42 42 43 0 0Sheldon McCormick 208 155 53 43 42 40 41 42 0 0Debra Goins 208 165 43 34 43 45 44 42 0 0Elizabeth Parrish 204 163 41 34 44 42 40 44 0 0Mike Clipka 126 95 31 0 0 42 43 41 0 0

Karleen Gansberg 95 64 31 0 44 41 0 10 0 0Charlene Martin 47 35 12 47 0 0 0 0 0 0Ricardo Mendoza 46 36 10 0 0 0 0 46 0 0Jim Wells 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Kim Romena 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Paula Wells 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Danny Ho 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Stockton Camera ClubMonthly Competition - September 2014

(Continued)

September 2014 - Class AA TOTAL OPEN SUBJECT FEB MAR MAY JULY SEPT OCT DECSharon McLemore 230 173 57 47 46 46 46 45 0 0Carol Marshall 225 169 56 45 46 45 46 43 0 0Joanne Sogsti 222 168 54 45 46 43 44 44 0 0Heide Stover 222 167 55 44 45 45 44 44 0 0Em McLaren 220 166 54 45 45 43 45 42 0 0Doug Ridgway 219 175 44 47 46 46 33 47 0 0Stan Sogsti 217 162 56 44 44 44 42 43 0 0Dean Taylor 186 140 46 0 46 46 47 47 0 0Trey Steinhart 180 136 44 46 0 44 44 46 0 0Janelle DeRuosi 43 32 11 0 0 0 0 43 0 0Elliott Pasinsky 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

9

Nikon Legend Behind the Lens

Tony Sweet

Canon Explorer of Light

Rick Sammon

Michael Frye

Joe Hearst

Gary Crabbe

Eric Harness

Gail Pierce

John Ballou

Lisa Rigge

Pat Toth-Smith

Michael Maloney

November 7 8 amp 9 2014

An Astounding Weekend of Photography

Renowned photographers will engage you with information on new and lesser-known techniques and incredible images From our keynote

speakers Nikon Legend Tony Sweet and Canon Explorer of Light Rick Sammon to an additional nine presenters in three rooms on

Saturday you will be inspired and entertained In addition at FotoClave we will show the results of the competition among

members of participating camera club councils

fotoclave 2014

Join Us for FotoClave 2014 Hilton Concord Hotel 1970 Diamond Blvd Concord CA 94520

Sponsored by N4C

2014 Calendar of Events

10

Every 3rd Thursday(Except April June amp

Aug) 630 PM

West Lane Bowling AlleyStockton

Membership MeetingContact Heide Stover

h1stoveraolcom

ThursdayOctober 16

West Lane Bowling AlleyStockton

October General MeetingSpecial Subject - Nature

ThursdayNovember 6

Cottage RoomHutchins Street Square

Lodi CA

Drop Off EntriesSandhill Crane Festival

Friday - SundayNovember 7 8 amp 9

Cottage RoomHutchins Street Square

Lodi CA

2014 Sandhill Crane Festivalwwwcranefestivalcom

Friday - SundayNovember 7 8 amp 9

Hilton Concord Hotel1970 Diamond BlvdConcord CA 94520

FotoClave 2014fotoclaveslickpiccom

SundayDecember 7 2014

Crowne Plaza Sacramento5321 Date Avenue

(I-80 Madison Ave)Sacramento Ca

Photographic Society of AmericaGold Rush Chapter Meeting

wwwpsagoldrushorg

ThursdayDecember 18

West Lane Bowling AlleyStockton

December General MeetingSpecial Subject - Travel

A GENERAL RULES1 Only paid-up members may enter club competition 2 Regular print and digital image competition period Once each month except January A competition year is February through December Current regular meetings are February March May July September October and December The number of meetings may change from time to time at the discretion of the Board of Directors and approval of the general membership as facilities permit The Annual Awards Dinner will be held in January3 A total of four (4) images (all prints all digital or a combination of both) may be entered each competition month A total of three (3) images may be entered in the Open Division and a total of one (1) in the Special Subject Division The number of entries may change from time to time at the discretion of the Board of Directors and the approval of the general membership 4 Each image will be scored from 6 to 12 points All prints or digital images receiving 11 or 12 points will be classed as an honor image The title of each print or digital image entered will be read before being evaluated The name of the maker will be read for 11-point honor winners Makerrsquos names will be announced for the 12 point images after the Print amp Digital Image-of-the-Month winners are chosen 5 A print or digital image that does not receive an honor score may be re-entered one more time in the same division 6 A print or digital image may be entered in all divisions for which it qualifies ie an honor image in Open may also be entered in the Special Subject Division at another competition A print or digital image that receives an honor score may not be re-entered in the same division7 Any print or digital image that appears to be ineligible for competition or not qualified for a specific division could expect to be challenged The Competition Vice-President shall decide whether or not the image is acceptable8 The exhibitor must have exposed each negative slide or digital image entered All images submitted for judging must be the work of the photographermaker including the taking of the images and any digital enhancements andor manipulation of the image This does not apply to the processing of film or printing by a commercial processor9 The same image should not be entered both as a print and a projected digital image in the same competition10 In the event of absence or barring unforeseen circumstances a member may submit make-up prints or digital images for one competition night per competition year and whenever possible must submit all make-up prints or digital images at the meeting immediately following the month a member failed or was unable to submit the prints or digital images Make-ups in the Special Subject Division must be the same subject as the month missed Also in case of absence a member may assign the responsibility of submitting his or her prints andor digital images for competition to another member11 A club member who serves as judge cannot enter his or her own prints or digital images in the same competition The judgersquos make-up prints or digital images can then be entered in another competition during that competition year This

11

2014 Competition Policy

is in addition to the once-a-year make-up provision already allowed12 Prints or digital images may be projectedviewed briefly before the judging of each division if the judge indicates heshe would like a preview

B PRINT ENTRY RULES1 Each print entered must have a completed label attached to the back of the print including name of maker title date entered and Division (Open or Special Subject) The writing or printing on the form must be legible Labels must be attached on the back of the print in the upper left-hand corner for correct viewing of the print2 All prints must be matted or mounted with a total size (including mat board) of no larger than 18rdquo X 24rdquo and no smaller than 8rdquo X 10rdquo Exception One side of a Panorama Print may be no larger than 36rdquo Prints that are smaller than 5rdquo X 7rdquo will not be accepted The makerrsquos name must not appear on the viewing surface of the image Framed prints shall not be entered3 Prints accompanied by entry forms should be submitted no later than 15 minutes prior to the start of the regular monthly meeting4 Prints receiving a score of 12 points in each class will be regrouped and judged for selection for the Print-of-the-Month honors Print-of-the-Month honors will be given in both Class A amp B C DIGITAL IMAGE ENTRY RULES1 Digital images must be submitted in a format and by the deadline specified by the Competition Vice-President Digital images may be submitted by email mailed (CD) or delivered (CD) to the Competition Vice-President Definition of Digital Image An image taken with a digital camera a negative slide or print scanned into the computer and processed digitally2 Images must be in a format compatible with the projector The key thing to keep in mind when formatting photos for submission is that the projector we use in the competition has a (maximum) resolution of 1024 x 768 pixels This means that any photo that exceeds this size in either dimension could end-up being cropped by the projector In other words the image width cannot be more than 1024 pixels and the image height cannot be more than 768 pixels If your image is horizontal only change the width to 1024 if your image is vertical only change the height to 768 Do not change both Down-sizing the image from the ldquonativerdquo resolution coming out of your camera also significantly reduces the file size This helps when emailing the files and takes-up less space on our hard-drives3 The makerrsquos name title of image date entered and division (Open or Special Subject) must be included as the title of the image When you have finished re-sizing your image save your image with a new title For example do a Save as Smith_Sunrise Splendor_05-13_Ojpeg (O-Open or SS-Special Subject) Specify whether you are Beginner or Advanced4 Digital Images receiving a score of 12 points in each class will be regrouped and judged for selection for the Digital Image-of-the-Month honors Digital Image-of-the-Month honors will be given in Class A AA amp B

Mike Clipkandash Education ChairpersonOctober 2014

How to Colorize Old (Black amp White) Photo ndash Photoshop TutorialBy Manesh K Filed in photoshop

Photo Edit Download wwwmyimageconvertercomBrowse Edit amp Convert Images Across Any Image Format - Get App

Today we are going to do some photo manipulation with Photoshop In the tutorial below we are going to guide you through patching up spots in an old black amp white photo and then colorizing it

First wersquoll run you through on removing white patches from photo and then wersquoll proceed to coloring it The steps are pretty standard Load up your Photoshop and off we goTo follow through the entire tutorial we suggest you download and use the following image

Step 1 Wersquoll start by removing the white patches on the image Choose Clone Stamp Tool and by pressing Alt key pick the plain and appropriate surface near all white patches and apply it on white patch Continue this process until all patches get removedAfter removing all patches your poor image will look clean as shown in image

12

Clipkarsquos CornerEducation Articles by Mike Clipka

13

Step 2Next wersquoll proceed with coloring the image It would be bad idea to colorize the image as a whole wersquoll do them one by one an object at a timeFirst wersquoll select the hat by making the use of Magnetic Lasso Tool ndash like this

Step 3To colorize it we will use the Hue and Saturation (HSL) option There are many ways to colorize an object but HSL is perhaps one of the easiest and most flexible

Proceeding to colorizing the hat add these values to the (HSL) 360 35 ndash 26 appropriately (While using HSL on that window do not forget to turn on Colorize option)

Step 4After applying color the hat may look a little plain Letrsquos add some Noise to it Select Filters -gt Noise -gt Add Noise and give amount ldquo5rdquo to it

Check Monochromatic option to get a smoother noise effect See the next image for its differences

Step 5Next the coat The process is same ndash only different HSL values which are respectively 42 10 ndash 63

To make the overall look of coat more natural instead of using Noise tool we take advantage of Grain Texture option You can find it under Filter -gt Filter Gallery -gt in Texture tab -gt Grain

Select the following options ndash Intensity ldquo10rdquo Contrast ldquo50rdquo and Grain Type ldquoSoftrdquo

14

Step 6Moving forward ndash the shoes To give shoes a shiny effect we are going to use Image menu -gt Adjustments -gt Variations Select ldquoMidtonesrdquo and click Ok Try some combination of CMYK colors until you get a boot of this color

Step 7Next up the door First letrsquos color the door borders Select one side border of door by using Rectangle Marquee Tool Add 15 45 -53 values in HSL tool Then select Filter -gt Filter Gallery -gt in Texture tab -gt select Grain option and keep Intensity ldquo12rdquo Contrast ldquo50rdquo select Grain type ldquoEnlargedrdquo

Follow the same procedure to all the borders of the door

Step 8Next we proceed to coloring rectangles between the doors with the following HSL values55 20 -26 and in Texture Grain keep intensity ldquo12rdquo contrast ldquo50rdquo and Grain type ldquoEnlargedrdquo Step 9Wersquoll wrap up coloring the door by adding colors to the borders HSL values of 25 7 -69 Then under Texture Grain keep Intensity ldquo12rdquo Contrast ldquo50rdquo and letrsquos add extra noise by selecting Grain type ldquoRegularrdquo Step 10After the door we proceed coloring the soil To color the soil select that portion by usingMagic Wand Tool and then keep HSL values 20 24 -56

Step 11Last but not least we will color the wooden background of the image To give it a it a wood look and feel we give it a HSL value of 31 53 -45 and then add Noise ldquo5rdquo by checking theMonochromatic option

After all this procedures finally you will see the output like this

Color CorrectionWe are done coloring the image Now we proceed to the final and most important part ndash color correction Color correction when done right will give the image its correct mood and make it more realistic

To increase the brightness of the image we go to the following option Image menu -gt Adjustments -gt Curves and add ldquo186rdquo for Output and ldquo164rdquo for Input

Letrsquos brighten up the following section of the image (where arrow in pointed to) First we select the portion with Rectangle Marquee tool Then go to Filter -gt Filter Gallery -gt Distort tab and select Diffuse Glow with the following values Graininess ldquo0rdquo Glow Amount ldquo11rdquo Clear Amount ldquo15rdquo And finally proceed to Image menu -gt Adjustments -gt Curves and add ldquo200rdquo for Ouptut and ldquo188rdquo for Input Follow the above process for the remaining parts of image but with different values inDiffuse Glow Graininess ldquo2rdquo Glow Amount ldquo5rdquo Clear Amount ldquo15rdquo Curvesrsquo not required

To darken the shadows of the hat and the coat letrsquos use the Burn Tool and by selectingRange Midtones and decreasing the Exposure value to ldquo20rdquo apply it on shadows part appropriately

Wersquoll use the Dodge Tool to brighten up the coat and hat so it looks as though the lights are coming in from the right side and to give a sense of thickness for the door borders we use the Burn Tool

And herersquos how your final output will look like (or similar) after some color corrections Editorrsquos note This post is written by Manesh K for Hongkiatcom Manesh is an Animator by profession and owner of Howtouse-photoshopcom where he helps people present their creativity digitally with Photoshop tutorials and useful resources

Herersquos a link to a 7+ minute You Tube tutorial on coloring Black amp White photos in Photoshophttpwwwyoutubecomwatchv=C2Srw245R7U

The Sunny f16 Rule for Digital Exposure By Jim Doty Jr

Part of the Digital Photography Exposure For Dummies Cheat SheetThe sunny f16 rule or Basic Daylight Exposure (BDE for short) tells you that the proper exposure in digital photography for a front lit subject is f16 with a shutter speed of 1ISO (thatrsquos 1 over the ISO in use) According to the sunny f16 rule at ISO 100 BDE would be f16 at 1100 second and at ISO 200 BDE would be f16 at 1200 second

When taking photos on a bright sunny day set the ISO of your camera to 100 the aperture to f16 and the shutter to 1100 second Then go out and take pictures of some front lit subjects As long as your subject isnrsquot white or black the exposures should be great No metering necessary

You can use equivalent exposures (different combinations of apertures shutter speeds and ISO settings that provide exactly the same exposure) for the sunny f16 rule The following table shows the equivalent exposures for the sunny f16 rule at ISO 100

Equivalent Exposures for the Sunny f16 Rule at ISO 100Aperture Shutter Speedf22 150 secondf16 1100 secondf11 1200 secondf8 1400 secondf56 1800 secondf4 11600 secondf28 13200 second

WHAT IS ldquoKEYSTONINGrdquo amp ldquoPINCUSIONrdquo Will be covered in my next article

NATURE PHOTOGRAPHY ndash BASIC DEFINITION

There should be no hand of man in a nature photo unless it relates to the subject The only one that was ever accepted was showing an injured bird that had been taken care of and recovered and was being released into the wild

I wonrsquot be at the October meeting as I will be visiting family in Indiana Have a good meeting

MIKE CLIPKA ndash EDUCATION CHAIRPERSON

16

17

Classes Start Oct 3rdSign Up Now wwwppsopcom

An Idiom For Photographersby Joe Baraban

Before I go any farther let me define the word Idiom An idiom is (1) An expression that cannot be understood from the meanings of its separate words but that has a separate meaning of its own (2) A form of a language that is spoken in a particular area and that uses some of its own words grammar and pronunciations

Here are some common idioms Sunday week for a week from Sunday Give way for retreat and Rock and Roll is a musical idiom The one Ive always thought was especially pertinent to photography and one I mention in my online class with the PPSOP and also in my Stretching Your Frame of Mind workshops I conduct around the planet is Theres more to it than meets the eye

In other words I tell my fellow photographers that theres two ways to look at a subject You can look at it with the left side of your brain the analytical side or the right side of your brain the creative side So many of my students dont look at things as they could be only as they are

Doing that will keep you from taking your photography to what I refer to asup a notch What I mean is that looking with the left side of your brain will only show you what things are Looking at those same things with the right side of your brain can show you what they could be Take the photo above for example

First allow me to digress for a moment I teach photographers how to use the basic elements of Visual Design and composition to create stronger images A complete description can be read by clicking on the link above

Ok so last week I was sitting in my backyard on my deck it was the end of a beautiful day Seventy two degrees and sunny so I had my book in one hand and my Bombay Martini and a bowl of nuts at the ready and close to my other hand I was trying to filter out all the sounds of a house being built next to us and occasionally looking up at what was going on The sun was setting behind the house that was next door and behind me and as the sun was setting the light was slowly disappearing from the bottom up leaving only the top part still in sunlight

If I had been looking at the house with the left side of my brain I would have only heard the incessant hammering and then seen the man working at the top of the house that was causing itthats what was Since Im always looking at things as they could be I saw more than just a house with a man working on the top floor I saw the Texture of the Crape Myrtles branches still bare from the Winter The square and rectangular Shapes and the blue Negative Space that defines and creates the Shapes Im always looking for ways to create Visual Tension and placing the man close to the edge of the frame is one of the ways The way the light is only left at the top of the construction is another and the contrast between his bright saturated red shirt against the soft blue sky and clouds is still another These elements of Visual Design and composition are all pieces that make up the finished puzzleanother idiom meaning the final photograph

Visit my website at wwwjoebarabancom and be sure to watch for upcoming workshops listed at the top of this blog Come shoot with me sometime and Ill show you what could be Dont forget to send me a photo and question to AskJoeBgmailcom - JoeB

18

Itrsquos All About the LightBy Kathleen Clemons

ldquoMy first thought is always of lightrdquo ~ Galen Rowell

I got my start in photography shooting sunrises from my front lawn back in 2003 Though my subject and location were limited they taught me much about the qualities of light and how quickly they change A gentle hint from Bryan Peterson (I was taking his online Understanding Exposure class) that there were other things to shoot besides sunrises got me off the lawn and where I am today Here are a couple from that first year

As photographers we need to pay close attention to light- we need to study itrsquos direction temperature quality intensity and how it is affecting our subjects After all as photographers we are painting with light

Sometimes when I am out shooting itrsquos the light that actually becomes my subject Great light on a landscape flower building person anything really can take my breath away At those times itrsquos the light that grabs my attention and makes me want to photograph the subject and often itrsquos nothing I had planned as my subject

I shot these two images from my deck last week as the sun was going down really the last bit of light on the bay I literally ran for my camera both times Within minutes the light was gone but I had my shots

19

Here are a few other images where the light is what caught my eye and really became my subject

Pay close attention to light Watch as it changes Study it See how it can sometimes make a subject glow or stand out how it really draws your eye Watch for backlighting see how side lighting can enhance texture how soft lighting can flatter and how light can become your main subject too

Happy ShootingKathleen

2015 Summer Iceland Photo Tour

Iceland is known for being a photographerrsquos paradise mostly because of the great variety in landscape along with exceptional light During summer time the combination of sunset and sunrise along with the unique landscape is what makes Iceland rare and desirable among photographers

Join William Yu and Iurie Belegurschi to Shoot Iceland June 17- 26 2015 details athttpwilliamyuphotoworkshopscomicelandhtml

20

21

How to be a professional Outdoor and Nature Photographerby Charlie Borland

If you are serious about your Nature Photography then dont miss your last chance this year to take How to be a professional Outdoor and Nature Photographer from Charlie Borland Charlie has made a living at this for a long time and this is a chance to take a 6 week course from him that has a lifetime of content Todays tip is from Charlie where he walks you through a shoot from concept to shooting and then processing

httpswwwyoutubecomwatchv=8oR-I6uZ9Bk

22

Tips to Improve Your Fall Photos Don Smith Photography

Monthly Photo Tip September 2014

This Sunday morning I will be departing for Jackson Hole Wyoming for the start of three consecutive fall workshops The first two will be spent photographing the fabulous fall color of Grand Teton National Park Ill then be off to Moab Utah for my ArchesCanyonlandsMonument Valley Workshop

Simply stated I love this time of year There has already been some snow falling in Wyoming and the leaves have been turning - yes fall is officially here

With that in mind I thought Id share my favorite fall photography tips

The first has to do with light I get asked all the time when is the best time of day to photograph fall color

Well fortunately enough really anytime though Id still say to get out for sunrise and shoot until the sun gets too harsh The same can be said for the other side of the day Fortunately the suns angle has been lowering so we are no longer faced with hard summer light

Under indirect light (dawn dusk and cloudy weather) colors (especially reds and yellows) tend to really pop They are very saturated under this type of light as long as you are using your polarlizer All foliage has a waxy sheen to it and polarizers help reduce that sheen allowing for a more saturated look

When the sun does make an appearance I try to move as much as 90 off-angle and let the light skim That being said my favorite light is backlight Simply place the sun behind the leaves your are photographing and watch the color explode

Another overlooked tip is to look for leaves already on the ground (as I did with these maples above) I try to either juxtapose them with another subject or find some sort of pattern or relationship between the leaves

The color itself is not always predictable as temperature and moisture play a large role in producing fall color As days grow shorter and nights grow longer and cooler biochemical processes in the leaf begin to paint the landscape with Natures autumn palette

Why Is Temperature ImportantA succession of warm sunny days and cool crisp but not freezing nights seems to bring about the most spectacular color displays During these days lots of sugars are produced in the leaf but the cool nights and the gradual closing of veins going into the leaf prevent these sugars from moving out These conditions-lots of sugar and lots of light-spur production of the brilliant anthocyanin pigments which tint reds purples and crimson Because carotenoids are always present in leaves the yellow and gold colors remain fairly constant from year to year

Why Is Moisture ImportantThe amount of moisture in the soil also affects autumn colors Like the weather soil moisture varies greatly from year to year The countless combinations of these two highly variable factors assure that no two autumns can be exactly alike A late spring or a severe summer drought can delay the onset of fall color by a few weeks A warm period during fall will also lower the intensity of autumn colors A warm wet spring favorable summer weather and warm sunny fall days with cool nights should produce the most brilliant autumn colors

Fortunately for us photographers fall offers a palette that is irresistible to our souls So get out this fall with your camera and get some much needed nurturing

A Simplified Method To Workflow Video SeriesLearn to process like a pro This video series has proven extremely popular It contains (26) videos and teaches you in 65 hours what took me 12 years to learn

Please check out Chapter headings and this short introductory video (and enjoy my son Aarons piano composition)

The Crack Zion National Park Utah

Canon 5DMKIII 70mm f16 1 second ISO 100 Singh-Ray Thin LB Polarizer

Lexar Digital Media

23

2014 Photo Workshops 3rd Annual Fall Color and Mountain Grandeur Grand Teton National Park - September 23-27 2014 (WORKSHOP 1 - SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

3rd Annual Fall Color and Mountain Grandeur Grand Teton National Park - September 28-October 2 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

6th Annual Full Moon Over Red Rock Arches and Monument Valley Mittens ArchesCanyonlands National Parks and Full Moonrise at Monument Valley - October 4-8 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

4th Annual Bryce Canyon Hoodoos and ZIon Fall Color Photo Workshop Fall Photography Workshop Bryce Canyon and Zion National Parks - November 1-5 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

2015 Photo Workshops 6th Annual Winter in Big Sur and the Monterey Peninsula - Magic Light Moonlight and Pfeiffer Beach Arch - January 4-7 2015 (4 spots left) 7th Annual Northern Arizona Workshop - Grand Canyon (with crescent moon) Page (Upper Antelope Canyon with light shafts and Horseshoe Bend) and Sedona - March 20-21 2015 (4 spots left) Springtime In Big Sur and the Monterey Peninsula - 7th Annual Wildflowers Full Moon Misty Fog and Headland Color Workshop - March 30 - April 2 2015 (3 spots remain) Don Smith and Gary Hart Spring at Oregons Columbia River Gorge Wildflowers and Waterfalls April 14 - 17 2015 (WORKSHOP SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

Don Smith and Gary Hart Spring at Oregons Columbia River Gorge Wildflowers and Waterfalls April 18 - 21 2015 (WORKSHOP SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY) Kauai Photo Workshop June 19-23 (Sign up before September 1 to receive an Earl-Bird discount of $150 off the full workshop price) (2 spots remain) Don Smith and Gary Hart Grand Canyon Monsoon and Lightning August 10-14 2015 (spots already filling) Private and Small Group Instruction

Page 6: Stockton Camera Club · 2018-09-06 · Stockton Camera Club The Shutter Tripper October2014 Hummer in Silhouette ... Stockton, CA 95202-2706 Phone: 209-464-2299 | Fax: 209-464-9229

SCC Officers 2014OfficersPresidentHeide StoverEmail h1stoveraolcom

Vice President ProgramsSharon McLemore 401-0192 Email sfmsapaolcom

Vice President CompetitionAddy Street 403-8349Email sccsubmitgmailcom

SecretaryEm McLaren 823-7287emmclarencomcastnet

TreasurerJanelle DeRuosi 838-1881Email jderuosiphotographygmailcom

Committee Chairs

Activities ChairpersonJoanne Sogsti 663-7044Email Stanjoanneaolcom

Education ChairpersonMike Clipka 858-5198 Email mcphotosjunocom

Hospitality ChairpersonDebra GoinsEmail knollstreetphotographygmailcom

Print Competition Chairperson Trey Steinhart 471-8438Email Steinhart4sbcglobalnet

Refreshments Chairperson Sheldon McCormick 931-0461Emailsmccormickclearwirenet

Shutter Tripper Doug Ridgway 617-7050Email doug_flyfisheryahoocom

Web MasterJanelle DeRuosi 838-1881Email jderuosiphotographygmailcom

6

Presidentrsquos MessageOctober 2014By Heide Stover

Welcome to all the new members and returning members It is good to see people interested in the club and our activities I would like to ask all members to try and help each other when possible and in particular letrsquos help the new members New members feel free to contact me with questions If I cannot help I will try to find someone that can

For those of you not aware of this at 530 pm on the night of our competition meeting Sharon and the person judging that evening have dinner in the coffee shop Any member is welcome to join in You do need to pay for your own meal though

I will be working on setting up our year end banquet at Spaghetti Factory soon Those of you with special dietary needs please let me know so I can do my best to accommodate you

The Sandhill Cranes should be showing up soon and are wonderful to watch and listen to as well as photograph Other migrating birds well be around as well And the Sandhill Crane Festival is coming up Keep that in mind when you are out shooting

As most of you know I have cancer and will be going through chemo for the next 4 weeks I will still do the best I can to answer any questions but please be patient if I do not answer right away For digital entries you can also contact Addy or Sharon Dean or Sharon can help with questions about the Camera Club Council in Fresno Those of us going to Fresno for the meeting can take down any prints or forms for those that would like to enter but cannot go down there

Get out there and shoot

Heide

219 E Weber Ave (Across From The Court House)Stockton CA 95202-2706

Phone 209-464-2299 | Fax 209-464-9229wwwulmerphotocom

Email Ulmerphotoaolcom

A Big Thank You to Our Sponsors

7

Septemberrsquos Monthly Meetingby Em Mclaren

Heide opened the meeting and Debra introduced guests and welcomed Don West and Rick Mendoza as recent new members

1 Heide asked for people to volunteer for the nominating committee Debra Elizaberth and Susanne volunteered

2 Joanne reminded people about the Renaissance Fair at Casa De Fruita which has started and runs thru Oct 12 It is $25 per person and $10 parking You can register on line She plans to go on Sat Oct4 If you want to carpool please let her know There will be lots of photo opportunities and on that day only a costume conteststanjoanneaolcom

3 Heide congratulated all our club winners at the Lodi Grape Festival

4 Janelle said there will be a photo walk Oct 11 Sat evening in Modesto Please contact her for further details or if you would like more information waynelle726sbcglobalnet

5 Sharon announced that the FotoClave will be held at the Hilton Hotel in Concord on Nov 7-9th It is $70 to attend plus extra to attend the banquet There will be great speakers and a good opportunity to meet members from other clubs in the area This may be the last FotoClave to be held For more info or to register go to FotoClaveslickpiccom

6 Sharon introduced Rich Turner as our judge for the photo competition He has been a photographer for several newspapers including the Stockton Record and now has his own photography business He has done work for the corporate world and is passionate about photographing the San Joaquin Delta He has a new book out about the California Delta and will have a photo show in 2015 which will travel around California on exhibit for 2 years He also is doing photo essays He brought his photo note cards sets to give to tonightrsquos competition winners He presented a brief show of his work before the judging began If you would like to find out more info about him or his new book please go to richtturnerphotocom

DIGITAL COMPETITION WINNERS FOR SEPT

BEGINNERS ldquoHummer in Silhouetterdquo by Christine BlueADVANCED ldquoDamselflyrdquo by Ricardo Mendoza

VERY ADVANCED ldquoDelightfulrdquo by Trey Steinhart

PRINT COMPETITION WINNERS FOR SEPT

BEGINNERS None entered in this categoryADVANCED ldquoApple Delightrdquo by Elizabeth Parrish

VERY ADVANCED Dandelion Seedsrdquo by Joann Sogsti

Congratulations to all the winners

The Special Subject for October will be NATURE

Please let me know if there are any corrections or additions to the notes Thanks Em McLaren

8

Stockton Camera ClubMonthly Competition - September 2014

DIGITAL COMPETITION WINNERS FOR SEPT

BEGINNERS ldquoHummer in Silhouetterdquo by Christine BlueADVANCED ldquoDamselflyrdquo by Ricardo Mendoza

VERY ADVANCED ldquoDelightfulrdquo by Trey Steinhart

PRINT COMPETITION WINNERS FOR SEPT

BEGINNERS None entered in this categoryADVANCED ldquoApple Delightrdquo by Elizabeth Parrish

VERY ADVANCED Dandelion Seedsrdquo by Joann SogstiPlease check out the to view the images that received the top scores wwwstockton-cameraclubcom

September 2014 - Class B TOTAL OPEN SUBJECT FEB MAR MAY JULY SEPT OCT DECSusanne Nichols 223 168 55 46 45 43 44 45 0 0Shari Liwanag 172 128 43 46 44 40 42 0 0 0Adrianne Street 172 128 43 43 42 40 47 0 0 0Christine Blue 133 98 35 46 43 0 0 44 0 0Jim Cahill 75 75 0 32 11 32 0 0 0 0Bret Hunter 45 34 11 45 0 0 0 0 0 0Ron Wetherell 45 22 23 0 23 0 22 0Pete Alameda 43 32 11 0 0 0 43 0 0 0Lanny Brown 21 10 11 0 0 0 0 21 0 0

September 2014 - Class A TOTAL OPEN SS FEB MAR MAY JULY SEPT OCT DECKris Borgen 219 165 54 46 43 44 43 43 0 0Gary Brown 215 161 54 44 44 42 42 43 0 0Sheldon McCormick 208 155 53 43 42 40 41 42 0 0Debra Goins 208 165 43 34 43 45 44 42 0 0Elizabeth Parrish 204 163 41 34 44 42 40 44 0 0Mike Clipka 126 95 31 0 0 42 43 41 0 0

Karleen Gansberg 95 64 31 0 44 41 0 10 0 0Charlene Martin 47 35 12 47 0 0 0 0 0 0Ricardo Mendoza 46 36 10 0 0 0 0 46 0 0Jim Wells 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Kim Romena 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Paula Wells 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Danny Ho 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Stockton Camera ClubMonthly Competition - September 2014

(Continued)

September 2014 - Class AA TOTAL OPEN SUBJECT FEB MAR MAY JULY SEPT OCT DECSharon McLemore 230 173 57 47 46 46 46 45 0 0Carol Marshall 225 169 56 45 46 45 46 43 0 0Joanne Sogsti 222 168 54 45 46 43 44 44 0 0Heide Stover 222 167 55 44 45 45 44 44 0 0Em McLaren 220 166 54 45 45 43 45 42 0 0Doug Ridgway 219 175 44 47 46 46 33 47 0 0Stan Sogsti 217 162 56 44 44 44 42 43 0 0Dean Taylor 186 140 46 0 46 46 47 47 0 0Trey Steinhart 180 136 44 46 0 44 44 46 0 0Janelle DeRuosi 43 32 11 0 0 0 0 43 0 0Elliott Pasinsky 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

9

Nikon Legend Behind the Lens

Tony Sweet

Canon Explorer of Light

Rick Sammon

Michael Frye

Joe Hearst

Gary Crabbe

Eric Harness

Gail Pierce

John Ballou

Lisa Rigge

Pat Toth-Smith

Michael Maloney

November 7 8 amp 9 2014

An Astounding Weekend of Photography

Renowned photographers will engage you with information on new and lesser-known techniques and incredible images From our keynote

speakers Nikon Legend Tony Sweet and Canon Explorer of Light Rick Sammon to an additional nine presenters in three rooms on

Saturday you will be inspired and entertained In addition at FotoClave we will show the results of the competition among

members of participating camera club councils

fotoclave 2014

Join Us for FotoClave 2014 Hilton Concord Hotel 1970 Diamond Blvd Concord CA 94520

Sponsored by N4C

2014 Calendar of Events

10

Every 3rd Thursday(Except April June amp

Aug) 630 PM

West Lane Bowling AlleyStockton

Membership MeetingContact Heide Stover

h1stoveraolcom

ThursdayOctober 16

West Lane Bowling AlleyStockton

October General MeetingSpecial Subject - Nature

ThursdayNovember 6

Cottage RoomHutchins Street Square

Lodi CA

Drop Off EntriesSandhill Crane Festival

Friday - SundayNovember 7 8 amp 9

Cottage RoomHutchins Street Square

Lodi CA

2014 Sandhill Crane Festivalwwwcranefestivalcom

Friday - SundayNovember 7 8 amp 9

Hilton Concord Hotel1970 Diamond BlvdConcord CA 94520

FotoClave 2014fotoclaveslickpiccom

SundayDecember 7 2014

Crowne Plaza Sacramento5321 Date Avenue

(I-80 Madison Ave)Sacramento Ca

Photographic Society of AmericaGold Rush Chapter Meeting

wwwpsagoldrushorg

ThursdayDecember 18

West Lane Bowling AlleyStockton

December General MeetingSpecial Subject - Travel

A GENERAL RULES1 Only paid-up members may enter club competition 2 Regular print and digital image competition period Once each month except January A competition year is February through December Current regular meetings are February March May July September October and December The number of meetings may change from time to time at the discretion of the Board of Directors and approval of the general membership as facilities permit The Annual Awards Dinner will be held in January3 A total of four (4) images (all prints all digital or a combination of both) may be entered each competition month A total of three (3) images may be entered in the Open Division and a total of one (1) in the Special Subject Division The number of entries may change from time to time at the discretion of the Board of Directors and the approval of the general membership 4 Each image will be scored from 6 to 12 points All prints or digital images receiving 11 or 12 points will be classed as an honor image The title of each print or digital image entered will be read before being evaluated The name of the maker will be read for 11-point honor winners Makerrsquos names will be announced for the 12 point images after the Print amp Digital Image-of-the-Month winners are chosen 5 A print or digital image that does not receive an honor score may be re-entered one more time in the same division 6 A print or digital image may be entered in all divisions for which it qualifies ie an honor image in Open may also be entered in the Special Subject Division at another competition A print or digital image that receives an honor score may not be re-entered in the same division7 Any print or digital image that appears to be ineligible for competition or not qualified for a specific division could expect to be challenged The Competition Vice-President shall decide whether or not the image is acceptable8 The exhibitor must have exposed each negative slide or digital image entered All images submitted for judging must be the work of the photographermaker including the taking of the images and any digital enhancements andor manipulation of the image This does not apply to the processing of film or printing by a commercial processor9 The same image should not be entered both as a print and a projected digital image in the same competition10 In the event of absence or barring unforeseen circumstances a member may submit make-up prints or digital images for one competition night per competition year and whenever possible must submit all make-up prints or digital images at the meeting immediately following the month a member failed or was unable to submit the prints or digital images Make-ups in the Special Subject Division must be the same subject as the month missed Also in case of absence a member may assign the responsibility of submitting his or her prints andor digital images for competition to another member11 A club member who serves as judge cannot enter his or her own prints or digital images in the same competition The judgersquos make-up prints or digital images can then be entered in another competition during that competition year This

11

2014 Competition Policy

is in addition to the once-a-year make-up provision already allowed12 Prints or digital images may be projectedviewed briefly before the judging of each division if the judge indicates heshe would like a preview

B PRINT ENTRY RULES1 Each print entered must have a completed label attached to the back of the print including name of maker title date entered and Division (Open or Special Subject) The writing or printing on the form must be legible Labels must be attached on the back of the print in the upper left-hand corner for correct viewing of the print2 All prints must be matted or mounted with a total size (including mat board) of no larger than 18rdquo X 24rdquo and no smaller than 8rdquo X 10rdquo Exception One side of a Panorama Print may be no larger than 36rdquo Prints that are smaller than 5rdquo X 7rdquo will not be accepted The makerrsquos name must not appear on the viewing surface of the image Framed prints shall not be entered3 Prints accompanied by entry forms should be submitted no later than 15 minutes prior to the start of the regular monthly meeting4 Prints receiving a score of 12 points in each class will be regrouped and judged for selection for the Print-of-the-Month honors Print-of-the-Month honors will be given in both Class A amp B C DIGITAL IMAGE ENTRY RULES1 Digital images must be submitted in a format and by the deadline specified by the Competition Vice-President Digital images may be submitted by email mailed (CD) or delivered (CD) to the Competition Vice-President Definition of Digital Image An image taken with a digital camera a negative slide or print scanned into the computer and processed digitally2 Images must be in a format compatible with the projector The key thing to keep in mind when formatting photos for submission is that the projector we use in the competition has a (maximum) resolution of 1024 x 768 pixels This means that any photo that exceeds this size in either dimension could end-up being cropped by the projector In other words the image width cannot be more than 1024 pixels and the image height cannot be more than 768 pixels If your image is horizontal only change the width to 1024 if your image is vertical only change the height to 768 Do not change both Down-sizing the image from the ldquonativerdquo resolution coming out of your camera also significantly reduces the file size This helps when emailing the files and takes-up less space on our hard-drives3 The makerrsquos name title of image date entered and division (Open or Special Subject) must be included as the title of the image When you have finished re-sizing your image save your image with a new title For example do a Save as Smith_Sunrise Splendor_05-13_Ojpeg (O-Open or SS-Special Subject) Specify whether you are Beginner or Advanced4 Digital Images receiving a score of 12 points in each class will be regrouped and judged for selection for the Digital Image-of-the-Month honors Digital Image-of-the-Month honors will be given in Class A AA amp B

Mike Clipkandash Education ChairpersonOctober 2014

How to Colorize Old (Black amp White) Photo ndash Photoshop TutorialBy Manesh K Filed in photoshop

Photo Edit Download wwwmyimageconvertercomBrowse Edit amp Convert Images Across Any Image Format - Get App

Today we are going to do some photo manipulation with Photoshop In the tutorial below we are going to guide you through patching up spots in an old black amp white photo and then colorizing it

First wersquoll run you through on removing white patches from photo and then wersquoll proceed to coloring it The steps are pretty standard Load up your Photoshop and off we goTo follow through the entire tutorial we suggest you download and use the following image

Step 1 Wersquoll start by removing the white patches on the image Choose Clone Stamp Tool and by pressing Alt key pick the plain and appropriate surface near all white patches and apply it on white patch Continue this process until all patches get removedAfter removing all patches your poor image will look clean as shown in image

12

Clipkarsquos CornerEducation Articles by Mike Clipka

13

Step 2Next wersquoll proceed with coloring the image It would be bad idea to colorize the image as a whole wersquoll do them one by one an object at a timeFirst wersquoll select the hat by making the use of Magnetic Lasso Tool ndash like this

Step 3To colorize it we will use the Hue and Saturation (HSL) option There are many ways to colorize an object but HSL is perhaps one of the easiest and most flexible

Proceeding to colorizing the hat add these values to the (HSL) 360 35 ndash 26 appropriately (While using HSL on that window do not forget to turn on Colorize option)

Step 4After applying color the hat may look a little plain Letrsquos add some Noise to it Select Filters -gt Noise -gt Add Noise and give amount ldquo5rdquo to it

Check Monochromatic option to get a smoother noise effect See the next image for its differences

Step 5Next the coat The process is same ndash only different HSL values which are respectively 42 10 ndash 63

To make the overall look of coat more natural instead of using Noise tool we take advantage of Grain Texture option You can find it under Filter -gt Filter Gallery -gt in Texture tab -gt Grain

Select the following options ndash Intensity ldquo10rdquo Contrast ldquo50rdquo and Grain Type ldquoSoftrdquo

14

Step 6Moving forward ndash the shoes To give shoes a shiny effect we are going to use Image menu -gt Adjustments -gt Variations Select ldquoMidtonesrdquo and click Ok Try some combination of CMYK colors until you get a boot of this color

Step 7Next up the door First letrsquos color the door borders Select one side border of door by using Rectangle Marquee Tool Add 15 45 -53 values in HSL tool Then select Filter -gt Filter Gallery -gt in Texture tab -gt select Grain option and keep Intensity ldquo12rdquo Contrast ldquo50rdquo select Grain type ldquoEnlargedrdquo

Follow the same procedure to all the borders of the door

Step 8Next we proceed to coloring rectangles between the doors with the following HSL values55 20 -26 and in Texture Grain keep intensity ldquo12rdquo contrast ldquo50rdquo and Grain type ldquoEnlargedrdquo Step 9Wersquoll wrap up coloring the door by adding colors to the borders HSL values of 25 7 -69 Then under Texture Grain keep Intensity ldquo12rdquo Contrast ldquo50rdquo and letrsquos add extra noise by selecting Grain type ldquoRegularrdquo Step 10After the door we proceed coloring the soil To color the soil select that portion by usingMagic Wand Tool and then keep HSL values 20 24 -56

Step 11Last but not least we will color the wooden background of the image To give it a it a wood look and feel we give it a HSL value of 31 53 -45 and then add Noise ldquo5rdquo by checking theMonochromatic option

After all this procedures finally you will see the output like this

Color CorrectionWe are done coloring the image Now we proceed to the final and most important part ndash color correction Color correction when done right will give the image its correct mood and make it more realistic

To increase the brightness of the image we go to the following option Image menu -gt Adjustments -gt Curves and add ldquo186rdquo for Output and ldquo164rdquo for Input

Letrsquos brighten up the following section of the image (where arrow in pointed to) First we select the portion with Rectangle Marquee tool Then go to Filter -gt Filter Gallery -gt Distort tab and select Diffuse Glow with the following values Graininess ldquo0rdquo Glow Amount ldquo11rdquo Clear Amount ldquo15rdquo And finally proceed to Image menu -gt Adjustments -gt Curves and add ldquo200rdquo for Ouptut and ldquo188rdquo for Input Follow the above process for the remaining parts of image but with different values inDiffuse Glow Graininess ldquo2rdquo Glow Amount ldquo5rdquo Clear Amount ldquo15rdquo Curvesrsquo not required

To darken the shadows of the hat and the coat letrsquos use the Burn Tool and by selectingRange Midtones and decreasing the Exposure value to ldquo20rdquo apply it on shadows part appropriately

Wersquoll use the Dodge Tool to brighten up the coat and hat so it looks as though the lights are coming in from the right side and to give a sense of thickness for the door borders we use the Burn Tool

And herersquos how your final output will look like (or similar) after some color corrections Editorrsquos note This post is written by Manesh K for Hongkiatcom Manesh is an Animator by profession and owner of Howtouse-photoshopcom where he helps people present their creativity digitally with Photoshop tutorials and useful resources

Herersquos a link to a 7+ minute You Tube tutorial on coloring Black amp White photos in Photoshophttpwwwyoutubecomwatchv=C2Srw245R7U

The Sunny f16 Rule for Digital Exposure By Jim Doty Jr

Part of the Digital Photography Exposure For Dummies Cheat SheetThe sunny f16 rule or Basic Daylight Exposure (BDE for short) tells you that the proper exposure in digital photography for a front lit subject is f16 with a shutter speed of 1ISO (thatrsquos 1 over the ISO in use) According to the sunny f16 rule at ISO 100 BDE would be f16 at 1100 second and at ISO 200 BDE would be f16 at 1200 second

When taking photos on a bright sunny day set the ISO of your camera to 100 the aperture to f16 and the shutter to 1100 second Then go out and take pictures of some front lit subjects As long as your subject isnrsquot white or black the exposures should be great No metering necessary

You can use equivalent exposures (different combinations of apertures shutter speeds and ISO settings that provide exactly the same exposure) for the sunny f16 rule The following table shows the equivalent exposures for the sunny f16 rule at ISO 100

Equivalent Exposures for the Sunny f16 Rule at ISO 100Aperture Shutter Speedf22 150 secondf16 1100 secondf11 1200 secondf8 1400 secondf56 1800 secondf4 11600 secondf28 13200 second

WHAT IS ldquoKEYSTONINGrdquo amp ldquoPINCUSIONrdquo Will be covered in my next article

NATURE PHOTOGRAPHY ndash BASIC DEFINITION

There should be no hand of man in a nature photo unless it relates to the subject The only one that was ever accepted was showing an injured bird that had been taken care of and recovered and was being released into the wild

I wonrsquot be at the October meeting as I will be visiting family in Indiana Have a good meeting

MIKE CLIPKA ndash EDUCATION CHAIRPERSON

16

17

Classes Start Oct 3rdSign Up Now wwwppsopcom

An Idiom For Photographersby Joe Baraban

Before I go any farther let me define the word Idiom An idiom is (1) An expression that cannot be understood from the meanings of its separate words but that has a separate meaning of its own (2) A form of a language that is spoken in a particular area and that uses some of its own words grammar and pronunciations

Here are some common idioms Sunday week for a week from Sunday Give way for retreat and Rock and Roll is a musical idiom The one Ive always thought was especially pertinent to photography and one I mention in my online class with the PPSOP and also in my Stretching Your Frame of Mind workshops I conduct around the planet is Theres more to it than meets the eye

In other words I tell my fellow photographers that theres two ways to look at a subject You can look at it with the left side of your brain the analytical side or the right side of your brain the creative side So many of my students dont look at things as they could be only as they are

Doing that will keep you from taking your photography to what I refer to asup a notch What I mean is that looking with the left side of your brain will only show you what things are Looking at those same things with the right side of your brain can show you what they could be Take the photo above for example

First allow me to digress for a moment I teach photographers how to use the basic elements of Visual Design and composition to create stronger images A complete description can be read by clicking on the link above

Ok so last week I was sitting in my backyard on my deck it was the end of a beautiful day Seventy two degrees and sunny so I had my book in one hand and my Bombay Martini and a bowl of nuts at the ready and close to my other hand I was trying to filter out all the sounds of a house being built next to us and occasionally looking up at what was going on The sun was setting behind the house that was next door and behind me and as the sun was setting the light was slowly disappearing from the bottom up leaving only the top part still in sunlight

If I had been looking at the house with the left side of my brain I would have only heard the incessant hammering and then seen the man working at the top of the house that was causing itthats what was Since Im always looking at things as they could be I saw more than just a house with a man working on the top floor I saw the Texture of the Crape Myrtles branches still bare from the Winter The square and rectangular Shapes and the blue Negative Space that defines and creates the Shapes Im always looking for ways to create Visual Tension and placing the man close to the edge of the frame is one of the ways The way the light is only left at the top of the construction is another and the contrast between his bright saturated red shirt against the soft blue sky and clouds is still another These elements of Visual Design and composition are all pieces that make up the finished puzzleanother idiom meaning the final photograph

Visit my website at wwwjoebarabancom and be sure to watch for upcoming workshops listed at the top of this blog Come shoot with me sometime and Ill show you what could be Dont forget to send me a photo and question to AskJoeBgmailcom - JoeB

18

Itrsquos All About the LightBy Kathleen Clemons

ldquoMy first thought is always of lightrdquo ~ Galen Rowell

I got my start in photography shooting sunrises from my front lawn back in 2003 Though my subject and location were limited they taught me much about the qualities of light and how quickly they change A gentle hint from Bryan Peterson (I was taking his online Understanding Exposure class) that there were other things to shoot besides sunrises got me off the lawn and where I am today Here are a couple from that first year

As photographers we need to pay close attention to light- we need to study itrsquos direction temperature quality intensity and how it is affecting our subjects After all as photographers we are painting with light

Sometimes when I am out shooting itrsquos the light that actually becomes my subject Great light on a landscape flower building person anything really can take my breath away At those times itrsquos the light that grabs my attention and makes me want to photograph the subject and often itrsquos nothing I had planned as my subject

I shot these two images from my deck last week as the sun was going down really the last bit of light on the bay I literally ran for my camera both times Within minutes the light was gone but I had my shots

19

Here are a few other images where the light is what caught my eye and really became my subject

Pay close attention to light Watch as it changes Study it See how it can sometimes make a subject glow or stand out how it really draws your eye Watch for backlighting see how side lighting can enhance texture how soft lighting can flatter and how light can become your main subject too

Happy ShootingKathleen

2015 Summer Iceland Photo Tour

Iceland is known for being a photographerrsquos paradise mostly because of the great variety in landscape along with exceptional light During summer time the combination of sunset and sunrise along with the unique landscape is what makes Iceland rare and desirable among photographers

Join William Yu and Iurie Belegurschi to Shoot Iceland June 17- 26 2015 details athttpwilliamyuphotoworkshopscomicelandhtml

20

21

How to be a professional Outdoor and Nature Photographerby Charlie Borland

If you are serious about your Nature Photography then dont miss your last chance this year to take How to be a professional Outdoor and Nature Photographer from Charlie Borland Charlie has made a living at this for a long time and this is a chance to take a 6 week course from him that has a lifetime of content Todays tip is from Charlie where he walks you through a shoot from concept to shooting and then processing

httpswwwyoutubecomwatchv=8oR-I6uZ9Bk

22

Tips to Improve Your Fall Photos Don Smith Photography

Monthly Photo Tip September 2014

This Sunday morning I will be departing for Jackson Hole Wyoming for the start of three consecutive fall workshops The first two will be spent photographing the fabulous fall color of Grand Teton National Park Ill then be off to Moab Utah for my ArchesCanyonlandsMonument Valley Workshop

Simply stated I love this time of year There has already been some snow falling in Wyoming and the leaves have been turning - yes fall is officially here

With that in mind I thought Id share my favorite fall photography tips

The first has to do with light I get asked all the time when is the best time of day to photograph fall color

Well fortunately enough really anytime though Id still say to get out for sunrise and shoot until the sun gets too harsh The same can be said for the other side of the day Fortunately the suns angle has been lowering so we are no longer faced with hard summer light

Under indirect light (dawn dusk and cloudy weather) colors (especially reds and yellows) tend to really pop They are very saturated under this type of light as long as you are using your polarlizer All foliage has a waxy sheen to it and polarizers help reduce that sheen allowing for a more saturated look

When the sun does make an appearance I try to move as much as 90 off-angle and let the light skim That being said my favorite light is backlight Simply place the sun behind the leaves your are photographing and watch the color explode

Another overlooked tip is to look for leaves already on the ground (as I did with these maples above) I try to either juxtapose them with another subject or find some sort of pattern or relationship between the leaves

The color itself is not always predictable as temperature and moisture play a large role in producing fall color As days grow shorter and nights grow longer and cooler biochemical processes in the leaf begin to paint the landscape with Natures autumn palette

Why Is Temperature ImportantA succession of warm sunny days and cool crisp but not freezing nights seems to bring about the most spectacular color displays During these days lots of sugars are produced in the leaf but the cool nights and the gradual closing of veins going into the leaf prevent these sugars from moving out These conditions-lots of sugar and lots of light-spur production of the brilliant anthocyanin pigments which tint reds purples and crimson Because carotenoids are always present in leaves the yellow and gold colors remain fairly constant from year to year

Why Is Moisture ImportantThe amount of moisture in the soil also affects autumn colors Like the weather soil moisture varies greatly from year to year The countless combinations of these two highly variable factors assure that no two autumns can be exactly alike A late spring or a severe summer drought can delay the onset of fall color by a few weeks A warm period during fall will also lower the intensity of autumn colors A warm wet spring favorable summer weather and warm sunny fall days with cool nights should produce the most brilliant autumn colors

Fortunately for us photographers fall offers a palette that is irresistible to our souls So get out this fall with your camera and get some much needed nurturing

A Simplified Method To Workflow Video SeriesLearn to process like a pro This video series has proven extremely popular It contains (26) videos and teaches you in 65 hours what took me 12 years to learn

Please check out Chapter headings and this short introductory video (and enjoy my son Aarons piano composition)

The Crack Zion National Park Utah

Canon 5DMKIII 70mm f16 1 second ISO 100 Singh-Ray Thin LB Polarizer

Lexar Digital Media

23

2014 Photo Workshops 3rd Annual Fall Color and Mountain Grandeur Grand Teton National Park - September 23-27 2014 (WORKSHOP 1 - SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

3rd Annual Fall Color and Mountain Grandeur Grand Teton National Park - September 28-October 2 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

6th Annual Full Moon Over Red Rock Arches and Monument Valley Mittens ArchesCanyonlands National Parks and Full Moonrise at Monument Valley - October 4-8 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

4th Annual Bryce Canyon Hoodoos and ZIon Fall Color Photo Workshop Fall Photography Workshop Bryce Canyon and Zion National Parks - November 1-5 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

2015 Photo Workshops 6th Annual Winter in Big Sur and the Monterey Peninsula - Magic Light Moonlight and Pfeiffer Beach Arch - January 4-7 2015 (4 spots left) 7th Annual Northern Arizona Workshop - Grand Canyon (with crescent moon) Page (Upper Antelope Canyon with light shafts and Horseshoe Bend) and Sedona - March 20-21 2015 (4 spots left) Springtime In Big Sur and the Monterey Peninsula - 7th Annual Wildflowers Full Moon Misty Fog and Headland Color Workshop - March 30 - April 2 2015 (3 spots remain) Don Smith and Gary Hart Spring at Oregons Columbia River Gorge Wildflowers and Waterfalls April 14 - 17 2015 (WORKSHOP SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

Don Smith and Gary Hart Spring at Oregons Columbia River Gorge Wildflowers and Waterfalls April 18 - 21 2015 (WORKSHOP SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY) Kauai Photo Workshop June 19-23 (Sign up before September 1 to receive an Earl-Bird discount of $150 off the full workshop price) (2 spots remain) Don Smith and Gary Hart Grand Canyon Monsoon and Lightning August 10-14 2015 (spots already filling) Private and Small Group Instruction

Page 7: Stockton Camera Club · 2018-09-06 · Stockton Camera Club The Shutter Tripper October2014 Hummer in Silhouette ... Stockton, CA 95202-2706 Phone: 209-464-2299 | Fax: 209-464-9229

7

Septemberrsquos Monthly Meetingby Em Mclaren

Heide opened the meeting and Debra introduced guests and welcomed Don West and Rick Mendoza as recent new members

1 Heide asked for people to volunteer for the nominating committee Debra Elizaberth and Susanne volunteered

2 Joanne reminded people about the Renaissance Fair at Casa De Fruita which has started and runs thru Oct 12 It is $25 per person and $10 parking You can register on line She plans to go on Sat Oct4 If you want to carpool please let her know There will be lots of photo opportunities and on that day only a costume conteststanjoanneaolcom

3 Heide congratulated all our club winners at the Lodi Grape Festival

4 Janelle said there will be a photo walk Oct 11 Sat evening in Modesto Please contact her for further details or if you would like more information waynelle726sbcglobalnet

5 Sharon announced that the FotoClave will be held at the Hilton Hotel in Concord on Nov 7-9th It is $70 to attend plus extra to attend the banquet There will be great speakers and a good opportunity to meet members from other clubs in the area This may be the last FotoClave to be held For more info or to register go to FotoClaveslickpiccom

6 Sharon introduced Rich Turner as our judge for the photo competition He has been a photographer for several newspapers including the Stockton Record and now has his own photography business He has done work for the corporate world and is passionate about photographing the San Joaquin Delta He has a new book out about the California Delta and will have a photo show in 2015 which will travel around California on exhibit for 2 years He also is doing photo essays He brought his photo note cards sets to give to tonightrsquos competition winners He presented a brief show of his work before the judging began If you would like to find out more info about him or his new book please go to richtturnerphotocom

DIGITAL COMPETITION WINNERS FOR SEPT

BEGINNERS ldquoHummer in Silhouetterdquo by Christine BlueADVANCED ldquoDamselflyrdquo by Ricardo Mendoza

VERY ADVANCED ldquoDelightfulrdquo by Trey Steinhart

PRINT COMPETITION WINNERS FOR SEPT

BEGINNERS None entered in this categoryADVANCED ldquoApple Delightrdquo by Elizabeth Parrish

VERY ADVANCED Dandelion Seedsrdquo by Joann Sogsti

Congratulations to all the winners

The Special Subject for October will be NATURE

Please let me know if there are any corrections or additions to the notes Thanks Em McLaren

8

Stockton Camera ClubMonthly Competition - September 2014

DIGITAL COMPETITION WINNERS FOR SEPT

BEGINNERS ldquoHummer in Silhouetterdquo by Christine BlueADVANCED ldquoDamselflyrdquo by Ricardo Mendoza

VERY ADVANCED ldquoDelightfulrdquo by Trey Steinhart

PRINT COMPETITION WINNERS FOR SEPT

BEGINNERS None entered in this categoryADVANCED ldquoApple Delightrdquo by Elizabeth Parrish

VERY ADVANCED Dandelion Seedsrdquo by Joann SogstiPlease check out the to view the images that received the top scores wwwstockton-cameraclubcom

September 2014 - Class B TOTAL OPEN SUBJECT FEB MAR MAY JULY SEPT OCT DECSusanne Nichols 223 168 55 46 45 43 44 45 0 0Shari Liwanag 172 128 43 46 44 40 42 0 0 0Adrianne Street 172 128 43 43 42 40 47 0 0 0Christine Blue 133 98 35 46 43 0 0 44 0 0Jim Cahill 75 75 0 32 11 32 0 0 0 0Bret Hunter 45 34 11 45 0 0 0 0 0 0Ron Wetherell 45 22 23 0 23 0 22 0Pete Alameda 43 32 11 0 0 0 43 0 0 0Lanny Brown 21 10 11 0 0 0 0 21 0 0

September 2014 - Class A TOTAL OPEN SS FEB MAR MAY JULY SEPT OCT DECKris Borgen 219 165 54 46 43 44 43 43 0 0Gary Brown 215 161 54 44 44 42 42 43 0 0Sheldon McCormick 208 155 53 43 42 40 41 42 0 0Debra Goins 208 165 43 34 43 45 44 42 0 0Elizabeth Parrish 204 163 41 34 44 42 40 44 0 0Mike Clipka 126 95 31 0 0 42 43 41 0 0

Karleen Gansberg 95 64 31 0 44 41 0 10 0 0Charlene Martin 47 35 12 47 0 0 0 0 0 0Ricardo Mendoza 46 36 10 0 0 0 0 46 0 0Jim Wells 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Kim Romena 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Paula Wells 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Danny Ho 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Stockton Camera ClubMonthly Competition - September 2014

(Continued)

September 2014 - Class AA TOTAL OPEN SUBJECT FEB MAR MAY JULY SEPT OCT DECSharon McLemore 230 173 57 47 46 46 46 45 0 0Carol Marshall 225 169 56 45 46 45 46 43 0 0Joanne Sogsti 222 168 54 45 46 43 44 44 0 0Heide Stover 222 167 55 44 45 45 44 44 0 0Em McLaren 220 166 54 45 45 43 45 42 0 0Doug Ridgway 219 175 44 47 46 46 33 47 0 0Stan Sogsti 217 162 56 44 44 44 42 43 0 0Dean Taylor 186 140 46 0 46 46 47 47 0 0Trey Steinhart 180 136 44 46 0 44 44 46 0 0Janelle DeRuosi 43 32 11 0 0 0 0 43 0 0Elliott Pasinsky 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

9

Nikon Legend Behind the Lens

Tony Sweet

Canon Explorer of Light

Rick Sammon

Michael Frye

Joe Hearst

Gary Crabbe

Eric Harness

Gail Pierce

John Ballou

Lisa Rigge

Pat Toth-Smith

Michael Maloney

November 7 8 amp 9 2014

An Astounding Weekend of Photography

Renowned photographers will engage you with information on new and lesser-known techniques and incredible images From our keynote

speakers Nikon Legend Tony Sweet and Canon Explorer of Light Rick Sammon to an additional nine presenters in three rooms on

Saturday you will be inspired and entertained In addition at FotoClave we will show the results of the competition among

members of participating camera club councils

fotoclave 2014

Join Us for FotoClave 2014 Hilton Concord Hotel 1970 Diamond Blvd Concord CA 94520

Sponsored by N4C

2014 Calendar of Events

10

Every 3rd Thursday(Except April June amp

Aug) 630 PM

West Lane Bowling AlleyStockton

Membership MeetingContact Heide Stover

h1stoveraolcom

ThursdayOctober 16

West Lane Bowling AlleyStockton

October General MeetingSpecial Subject - Nature

ThursdayNovember 6

Cottage RoomHutchins Street Square

Lodi CA

Drop Off EntriesSandhill Crane Festival

Friday - SundayNovember 7 8 amp 9

Cottage RoomHutchins Street Square

Lodi CA

2014 Sandhill Crane Festivalwwwcranefestivalcom

Friday - SundayNovember 7 8 amp 9

Hilton Concord Hotel1970 Diamond BlvdConcord CA 94520

FotoClave 2014fotoclaveslickpiccom

SundayDecember 7 2014

Crowne Plaza Sacramento5321 Date Avenue

(I-80 Madison Ave)Sacramento Ca

Photographic Society of AmericaGold Rush Chapter Meeting

wwwpsagoldrushorg

ThursdayDecember 18

West Lane Bowling AlleyStockton

December General MeetingSpecial Subject - Travel

A GENERAL RULES1 Only paid-up members may enter club competition 2 Regular print and digital image competition period Once each month except January A competition year is February through December Current regular meetings are February March May July September October and December The number of meetings may change from time to time at the discretion of the Board of Directors and approval of the general membership as facilities permit The Annual Awards Dinner will be held in January3 A total of four (4) images (all prints all digital or a combination of both) may be entered each competition month A total of three (3) images may be entered in the Open Division and a total of one (1) in the Special Subject Division The number of entries may change from time to time at the discretion of the Board of Directors and the approval of the general membership 4 Each image will be scored from 6 to 12 points All prints or digital images receiving 11 or 12 points will be classed as an honor image The title of each print or digital image entered will be read before being evaluated The name of the maker will be read for 11-point honor winners Makerrsquos names will be announced for the 12 point images after the Print amp Digital Image-of-the-Month winners are chosen 5 A print or digital image that does not receive an honor score may be re-entered one more time in the same division 6 A print or digital image may be entered in all divisions for which it qualifies ie an honor image in Open may also be entered in the Special Subject Division at another competition A print or digital image that receives an honor score may not be re-entered in the same division7 Any print or digital image that appears to be ineligible for competition or not qualified for a specific division could expect to be challenged The Competition Vice-President shall decide whether or not the image is acceptable8 The exhibitor must have exposed each negative slide or digital image entered All images submitted for judging must be the work of the photographermaker including the taking of the images and any digital enhancements andor manipulation of the image This does not apply to the processing of film or printing by a commercial processor9 The same image should not be entered both as a print and a projected digital image in the same competition10 In the event of absence or barring unforeseen circumstances a member may submit make-up prints or digital images for one competition night per competition year and whenever possible must submit all make-up prints or digital images at the meeting immediately following the month a member failed or was unable to submit the prints or digital images Make-ups in the Special Subject Division must be the same subject as the month missed Also in case of absence a member may assign the responsibility of submitting his or her prints andor digital images for competition to another member11 A club member who serves as judge cannot enter his or her own prints or digital images in the same competition The judgersquos make-up prints or digital images can then be entered in another competition during that competition year This

11

2014 Competition Policy

is in addition to the once-a-year make-up provision already allowed12 Prints or digital images may be projectedviewed briefly before the judging of each division if the judge indicates heshe would like a preview

B PRINT ENTRY RULES1 Each print entered must have a completed label attached to the back of the print including name of maker title date entered and Division (Open or Special Subject) The writing or printing on the form must be legible Labels must be attached on the back of the print in the upper left-hand corner for correct viewing of the print2 All prints must be matted or mounted with a total size (including mat board) of no larger than 18rdquo X 24rdquo and no smaller than 8rdquo X 10rdquo Exception One side of a Panorama Print may be no larger than 36rdquo Prints that are smaller than 5rdquo X 7rdquo will not be accepted The makerrsquos name must not appear on the viewing surface of the image Framed prints shall not be entered3 Prints accompanied by entry forms should be submitted no later than 15 minutes prior to the start of the regular monthly meeting4 Prints receiving a score of 12 points in each class will be regrouped and judged for selection for the Print-of-the-Month honors Print-of-the-Month honors will be given in both Class A amp B C DIGITAL IMAGE ENTRY RULES1 Digital images must be submitted in a format and by the deadline specified by the Competition Vice-President Digital images may be submitted by email mailed (CD) or delivered (CD) to the Competition Vice-President Definition of Digital Image An image taken with a digital camera a negative slide or print scanned into the computer and processed digitally2 Images must be in a format compatible with the projector The key thing to keep in mind when formatting photos for submission is that the projector we use in the competition has a (maximum) resolution of 1024 x 768 pixels This means that any photo that exceeds this size in either dimension could end-up being cropped by the projector In other words the image width cannot be more than 1024 pixels and the image height cannot be more than 768 pixels If your image is horizontal only change the width to 1024 if your image is vertical only change the height to 768 Do not change both Down-sizing the image from the ldquonativerdquo resolution coming out of your camera also significantly reduces the file size This helps when emailing the files and takes-up less space on our hard-drives3 The makerrsquos name title of image date entered and division (Open or Special Subject) must be included as the title of the image When you have finished re-sizing your image save your image with a new title For example do a Save as Smith_Sunrise Splendor_05-13_Ojpeg (O-Open or SS-Special Subject) Specify whether you are Beginner or Advanced4 Digital Images receiving a score of 12 points in each class will be regrouped and judged for selection for the Digital Image-of-the-Month honors Digital Image-of-the-Month honors will be given in Class A AA amp B

Mike Clipkandash Education ChairpersonOctober 2014

How to Colorize Old (Black amp White) Photo ndash Photoshop TutorialBy Manesh K Filed in photoshop

Photo Edit Download wwwmyimageconvertercomBrowse Edit amp Convert Images Across Any Image Format - Get App

Today we are going to do some photo manipulation with Photoshop In the tutorial below we are going to guide you through patching up spots in an old black amp white photo and then colorizing it

First wersquoll run you through on removing white patches from photo and then wersquoll proceed to coloring it The steps are pretty standard Load up your Photoshop and off we goTo follow through the entire tutorial we suggest you download and use the following image

Step 1 Wersquoll start by removing the white patches on the image Choose Clone Stamp Tool and by pressing Alt key pick the plain and appropriate surface near all white patches and apply it on white patch Continue this process until all patches get removedAfter removing all patches your poor image will look clean as shown in image

12

Clipkarsquos CornerEducation Articles by Mike Clipka

13

Step 2Next wersquoll proceed with coloring the image It would be bad idea to colorize the image as a whole wersquoll do them one by one an object at a timeFirst wersquoll select the hat by making the use of Magnetic Lasso Tool ndash like this

Step 3To colorize it we will use the Hue and Saturation (HSL) option There are many ways to colorize an object but HSL is perhaps one of the easiest and most flexible

Proceeding to colorizing the hat add these values to the (HSL) 360 35 ndash 26 appropriately (While using HSL on that window do not forget to turn on Colorize option)

Step 4After applying color the hat may look a little plain Letrsquos add some Noise to it Select Filters -gt Noise -gt Add Noise and give amount ldquo5rdquo to it

Check Monochromatic option to get a smoother noise effect See the next image for its differences

Step 5Next the coat The process is same ndash only different HSL values which are respectively 42 10 ndash 63

To make the overall look of coat more natural instead of using Noise tool we take advantage of Grain Texture option You can find it under Filter -gt Filter Gallery -gt in Texture tab -gt Grain

Select the following options ndash Intensity ldquo10rdquo Contrast ldquo50rdquo and Grain Type ldquoSoftrdquo

14

Step 6Moving forward ndash the shoes To give shoes a shiny effect we are going to use Image menu -gt Adjustments -gt Variations Select ldquoMidtonesrdquo and click Ok Try some combination of CMYK colors until you get a boot of this color

Step 7Next up the door First letrsquos color the door borders Select one side border of door by using Rectangle Marquee Tool Add 15 45 -53 values in HSL tool Then select Filter -gt Filter Gallery -gt in Texture tab -gt select Grain option and keep Intensity ldquo12rdquo Contrast ldquo50rdquo select Grain type ldquoEnlargedrdquo

Follow the same procedure to all the borders of the door

Step 8Next we proceed to coloring rectangles between the doors with the following HSL values55 20 -26 and in Texture Grain keep intensity ldquo12rdquo contrast ldquo50rdquo and Grain type ldquoEnlargedrdquo Step 9Wersquoll wrap up coloring the door by adding colors to the borders HSL values of 25 7 -69 Then under Texture Grain keep Intensity ldquo12rdquo Contrast ldquo50rdquo and letrsquos add extra noise by selecting Grain type ldquoRegularrdquo Step 10After the door we proceed coloring the soil To color the soil select that portion by usingMagic Wand Tool and then keep HSL values 20 24 -56

Step 11Last but not least we will color the wooden background of the image To give it a it a wood look and feel we give it a HSL value of 31 53 -45 and then add Noise ldquo5rdquo by checking theMonochromatic option

After all this procedures finally you will see the output like this

Color CorrectionWe are done coloring the image Now we proceed to the final and most important part ndash color correction Color correction when done right will give the image its correct mood and make it more realistic

To increase the brightness of the image we go to the following option Image menu -gt Adjustments -gt Curves and add ldquo186rdquo for Output and ldquo164rdquo for Input

Letrsquos brighten up the following section of the image (where arrow in pointed to) First we select the portion with Rectangle Marquee tool Then go to Filter -gt Filter Gallery -gt Distort tab and select Diffuse Glow with the following values Graininess ldquo0rdquo Glow Amount ldquo11rdquo Clear Amount ldquo15rdquo And finally proceed to Image menu -gt Adjustments -gt Curves and add ldquo200rdquo for Ouptut and ldquo188rdquo for Input Follow the above process for the remaining parts of image but with different values inDiffuse Glow Graininess ldquo2rdquo Glow Amount ldquo5rdquo Clear Amount ldquo15rdquo Curvesrsquo not required

To darken the shadows of the hat and the coat letrsquos use the Burn Tool and by selectingRange Midtones and decreasing the Exposure value to ldquo20rdquo apply it on shadows part appropriately

Wersquoll use the Dodge Tool to brighten up the coat and hat so it looks as though the lights are coming in from the right side and to give a sense of thickness for the door borders we use the Burn Tool

And herersquos how your final output will look like (or similar) after some color corrections Editorrsquos note This post is written by Manesh K for Hongkiatcom Manesh is an Animator by profession and owner of Howtouse-photoshopcom where he helps people present their creativity digitally with Photoshop tutorials and useful resources

Herersquos a link to a 7+ minute You Tube tutorial on coloring Black amp White photos in Photoshophttpwwwyoutubecomwatchv=C2Srw245R7U

The Sunny f16 Rule for Digital Exposure By Jim Doty Jr

Part of the Digital Photography Exposure For Dummies Cheat SheetThe sunny f16 rule or Basic Daylight Exposure (BDE for short) tells you that the proper exposure in digital photography for a front lit subject is f16 with a shutter speed of 1ISO (thatrsquos 1 over the ISO in use) According to the sunny f16 rule at ISO 100 BDE would be f16 at 1100 second and at ISO 200 BDE would be f16 at 1200 second

When taking photos on a bright sunny day set the ISO of your camera to 100 the aperture to f16 and the shutter to 1100 second Then go out and take pictures of some front lit subjects As long as your subject isnrsquot white or black the exposures should be great No metering necessary

You can use equivalent exposures (different combinations of apertures shutter speeds and ISO settings that provide exactly the same exposure) for the sunny f16 rule The following table shows the equivalent exposures for the sunny f16 rule at ISO 100

Equivalent Exposures for the Sunny f16 Rule at ISO 100Aperture Shutter Speedf22 150 secondf16 1100 secondf11 1200 secondf8 1400 secondf56 1800 secondf4 11600 secondf28 13200 second

WHAT IS ldquoKEYSTONINGrdquo amp ldquoPINCUSIONrdquo Will be covered in my next article

NATURE PHOTOGRAPHY ndash BASIC DEFINITION

There should be no hand of man in a nature photo unless it relates to the subject The only one that was ever accepted was showing an injured bird that had been taken care of and recovered and was being released into the wild

I wonrsquot be at the October meeting as I will be visiting family in Indiana Have a good meeting

MIKE CLIPKA ndash EDUCATION CHAIRPERSON

16

17

Classes Start Oct 3rdSign Up Now wwwppsopcom

An Idiom For Photographersby Joe Baraban

Before I go any farther let me define the word Idiom An idiom is (1) An expression that cannot be understood from the meanings of its separate words but that has a separate meaning of its own (2) A form of a language that is spoken in a particular area and that uses some of its own words grammar and pronunciations

Here are some common idioms Sunday week for a week from Sunday Give way for retreat and Rock and Roll is a musical idiom The one Ive always thought was especially pertinent to photography and one I mention in my online class with the PPSOP and also in my Stretching Your Frame of Mind workshops I conduct around the planet is Theres more to it than meets the eye

In other words I tell my fellow photographers that theres two ways to look at a subject You can look at it with the left side of your brain the analytical side or the right side of your brain the creative side So many of my students dont look at things as they could be only as they are

Doing that will keep you from taking your photography to what I refer to asup a notch What I mean is that looking with the left side of your brain will only show you what things are Looking at those same things with the right side of your brain can show you what they could be Take the photo above for example

First allow me to digress for a moment I teach photographers how to use the basic elements of Visual Design and composition to create stronger images A complete description can be read by clicking on the link above

Ok so last week I was sitting in my backyard on my deck it was the end of a beautiful day Seventy two degrees and sunny so I had my book in one hand and my Bombay Martini and a bowl of nuts at the ready and close to my other hand I was trying to filter out all the sounds of a house being built next to us and occasionally looking up at what was going on The sun was setting behind the house that was next door and behind me and as the sun was setting the light was slowly disappearing from the bottom up leaving only the top part still in sunlight

If I had been looking at the house with the left side of my brain I would have only heard the incessant hammering and then seen the man working at the top of the house that was causing itthats what was Since Im always looking at things as they could be I saw more than just a house with a man working on the top floor I saw the Texture of the Crape Myrtles branches still bare from the Winter The square and rectangular Shapes and the blue Negative Space that defines and creates the Shapes Im always looking for ways to create Visual Tension and placing the man close to the edge of the frame is one of the ways The way the light is only left at the top of the construction is another and the contrast between his bright saturated red shirt against the soft blue sky and clouds is still another These elements of Visual Design and composition are all pieces that make up the finished puzzleanother idiom meaning the final photograph

Visit my website at wwwjoebarabancom and be sure to watch for upcoming workshops listed at the top of this blog Come shoot with me sometime and Ill show you what could be Dont forget to send me a photo and question to AskJoeBgmailcom - JoeB

18

Itrsquos All About the LightBy Kathleen Clemons

ldquoMy first thought is always of lightrdquo ~ Galen Rowell

I got my start in photography shooting sunrises from my front lawn back in 2003 Though my subject and location were limited they taught me much about the qualities of light and how quickly they change A gentle hint from Bryan Peterson (I was taking his online Understanding Exposure class) that there were other things to shoot besides sunrises got me off the lawn and where I am today Here are a couple from that first year

As photographers we need to pay close attention to light- we need to study itrsquos direction temperature quality intensity and how it is affecting our subjects After all as photographers we are painting with light

Sometimes when I am out shooting itrsquos the light that actually becomes my subject Great light on a landscape flower building person anything really can take my breath away At those times itrsquos the light that grabs my attention and makes me want to photograph the subject and often itrsquos nothing I had planned as my subject

I shot these two images from my deck last week as the sun was going down really the last bit of light on the bay I literally ran for my camera both times Within minutes the light was gone but I had my shots

19

Here are a few other images where the light is what caught my eye and really became my subject

Pay close attention to light Watch as it changes Study it See how it can sometimes make a subject glow or stand out how it really draws your eye Watch for backlighting see how side lighting can enhance texture how soft lighting can flatter and how light can become your main subject too

Happy ShootingKathleen

2015 Summer Iceland Photo Tour

Iceland is known for being a photographerrsquos paradise mostly because of the great variety in landscape along with exceptional light During summer time the combination of sunset and sunrise along with the unique landscape is what makes Iceland rare and desirable among photographers

Join William Yu and Iurie Belegurschi to Shoot Iceland June 17- 26 2015 details athttpwilliamyuphotoworkshopscomicelandhtml

20

21

How to be a professional Outdoor and Nature Photographerby Charlie Borland

If you are serious about your Nature Photography then dont miss your last chance this year to take How to be a professional Outdoor and Nature Photographer from Charlie Borland Charlie has made a living at this for a long time and this is a chance to take a 6 week course from him that has a lifetime of content Todays tip is from Charlie where he walks you through a shoot from concept to shooting and then processing

httpswwwyoutubecomwatchv=8oR-I6uZ9Bk

22

Tips to Improve Your Fall Photos Don Smith Photography

Monthly Photo Tip September 2014

This Sunday morning I will be departing for Jackson Hole Wyoming for the start of three consecutive fall workshops The first two will be spent photographing the fabulous fall color of Grand Teton National Park Ill then be off to Moab Utah for my ArchesCanyonlandsMonument Valley Workshop

Simply stated I love this time of year There has already been some snow falling in Wyoming and the leaves have been turning - yes fall is officially here

With that in mind I thought Id share my favorite fall photography tips

The first has to do with light I get asked all the time when is the best time of day to photograph fall color

Well fortunately enough really anytime though Id still say to get out for sunrise and shoot until the sun gets too harsh The same can be said for the other side of the day Fortunately the suns angle has been lowering so we are no longer faced with hard summer light

Under indirect light (dawn dusk and cloudy weather) colors (especially reds and yellows) tend to really pop They are very saturated under this type of light as long as you are using your polarlizer All foliage has a waxy sheen to it and polarizers help reduce that sheen allowing for a more saturated look

When the sun does make an appearance I try to move as much as 90 off-angle and let the light skim That being said my favorite light is backlight Simply place the sun behind the leaves your are photographing and watch the color explode

Another overlooked tip is to look for leaves already on the ground (as I did with these maples above) I try to either juxtapose them with another subject or find some sort of pattern or relationship between the leaves

The color itself is not always predictable as temperature and moisture play a large role in producing fall color As days grow shorter and nights grow longer and cooler biochemical processes in the leaf begin to paint the landscape with Natures autumn palette

Why Is Temperature ImportantA succession of warm sunny days and cool crisp but not freezing nights seems to bring about the most spectacular color displays During these days lots of sugars are produced in the leaf but the cool nights and the gradual closing of veins going into the leaf prevent these sugars from moving out These conditions-lots of sugar and lots of light-spur production of the brilliant anthocyanin pigments which tint reds purples and crimson Because carotenoids are always present in leaves the yellow and gold colors remain fairly constant from year to year

Why Is Moisture ImportantThe amount of moisture in the soil also affects autumn colors Like the weather soil moisture varies greatly from year to year The countless combinations of these two highly variable factors assure that no two autumns can be exactly alike A late spring or a severe summer drought can delay the onset of fall color by a few weeks A warm period during fall will also lower the intensity of autumn colors A warm wet spring favorable summer weather and warm sunny fall days with cool nights should produce the most brilliant autumn colors

Fortunately for us photographers fall offers a palette that is irresistible to our souls So get out this fall with your camera and get some much needed nurturing

A Simplified Method To Workflow Video SeriesLearn to process like a pro This video series has proven extremely popular It contains (26) videos and teaches you in 65 hours what took me 12 years to learn

Please check out Chapter headings and this short introductory video (and enjoy my son Aarons piano composition)

The Crack Zion National Park Utah

Canon 5DMKIII 70mm f16 1 second ISO 100 Singh-Ray Thin LB Polarizer

Lexar Digital Media

23

2014 Photo Workshops 3rd Annual Fall Color and Mountain Grandeur Grand Teton National Park - September 23-27 2014 (WORKSHOP 1 - SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

3rd Annual Fall Color and Mountain Grandeur Grand Teton National Park - September 28-October 2 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

6th Annual Full Moon Over Red Rock Arches and Monument Valley Mittens ArchesCanyonlands National Parks and Full Moonrise at Monument Valley - October 4-8 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

4th Annual Bryce Canyon Hoodoos and ZIon Fall Color Photo Workshop Fall Photography Workshop Bryce Canyon and Zion National Parks - November 1-5 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

2015 Photo Workshops 6th Annual Winter in Big Sur and the Monterey Peninsula - Magic Light Moonlight and Pfeiffer Beach Arch - January 4-7 2015 (4 spots left) 7th Annual Northern Arizona Workshop - Grand Canyon (with crescent moon) Page (Upper Antelope Canyon with light shafts and Horseshoe Bend) and Sedona - March 20-21 2015 (4 spots left) Springtime In Big Sur and the Monterey Peninsula - 7th Annual Wildflowers Full Moon Misty Fog and Headland Color Workshop - March 30 - April 2 2015 (3 spots remain) Don Smith and Gary Hart Spring at Oregons Columbia River Gorge Wildflowers and Waterfalls April 14 - 17 2015 (WORKSHOP SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

Don Smith and Gary Hart Spring at Oregons Columbia River Gorge Wildflowers and Waterfalls April 18 - 21 2015 (WORKSHOP SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY) Kauai Photo Workshop June 19-23 (Sign up before September 1 to receive an Earl-Bird discount of $150 off the full workshop price) (2 spots remain) Don Smith and Gary Hart Grand Canyon Monsoon and Lightning August 10-14 2015 (spots already filling) Private and Small Group Instruction

Page 8: Stockton Camera Club · 2018-09-06 · Stockton Camera Club The Shutter Tripper October2014 Hummer in Silhouette ... Stockton, CA 95202-2706 Phone: 209-464-2299 | Fax: 209-464-9229

8

Stockton Camera ClubMonthly Competition - September 2014

DIGITAL COMPETITION WINNERS FOR SEPT

BEGINNERS ldquoHummer in Silhouetterdquo by Christine BlueADVANCED ldquoDamselflyrdquo by Ricardo Mendoza

VERY ADVANCED ldquoDelightfulrdquo by Trey Steinhart

PRINT COMPETITION WINNERS FOR SEPT

BEGINNERS None entered in this categoryADVANCED ldquoApple Delightrdquo by Elizabeth Parrish

VERY ADVANCED Dandelion Seedsrdquo by Joann SogstiPlease check out the to view the images that received the top scores wwwstockton-cameraclubcom

September 2014 - Class B TOTAL OPEN SUBJECT FEB MAR MAY JULY SEPT OCT DECSusanne Nichols 223 168 55 46 45 43 44 45 0 0Shari Liwanag 172 128 43 46 44 40 42 0 0 0Adrianne Street 172 128 43 43 42 40 47 0 0 0Christine Blue 133 98 35 46 43 0 0 44 0 0Jim Cahill 75 75 0 32 11 32 0 0 0 0Bret Hunter 45 34 11 45 0 0 0 0 0 0Ron Wetherell 45 22 23 0 23 0 22 0Pete Alameda 43 32 11 0 0 0 43 0 0 0Lanny Brown 21 10 11 0 0 0 0 21 0 0

September 2014 - Class A TOTAL OPEN SS FEB MAR MAY JULY SEPT OCT DECKris Borgen 219 165 54 46 43 44 43 43 0 0Gary Brown 215 161 54 44 44 42 42 43 0 0Sheldon McCormick 208 155 53 43 42 40 41 42 0 0Debra Goins 208 165 43 34 43 45 44 42 0 0Elizabeth Parrish 204 163 41 34 44 42 40 44 0 0Mike Clipka 126 95 31 0 0 42 43 41 0 0

Karleen Gansberg 95 64 31 0 44 41 0 10 0 0Charlene Martin 47 35 12 47 0 0 0 0 0 0Ricardo Mendoza 46 36 10 0 0 0 0 46 0 0Jim Wells 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Kim Romena 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Paula Wells 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Danny Ho 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Stockton Camera ClubMonthly Competition - September 2014

(Continued)

September 2014 - Class AA TOTAL OPEN SUBJECT FEB MAR MAY JULY SEPT OCT DECSharon McLemore 230 173 57 47 46 46 46 45 0 0Carol Marshall 225 169 56 45 46 45 46 43 0 0Joanne Sogsti 222 168 54 45 46 43 44 44 0 0Heide Stover 222 167 55 44 45 45 44 44 0 0Em McLaren 220 166 54 45 45 43 45 42 0 0Doug Ridgway 219 175 44 47 46 46 33 47 0 0Stan Sogsti 217 162 56 44 44 44 42 43 0 0Dean Taylor 186 140 46 0 46 46 47 47 0 0Trey Steinhart 180 136 44 46 0 44 44 46 0 0Janelle DeRuosi 43 32 11 0 0 0 0 43 0 0Elliott Pasinsky 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

9

Nikon Legend Behind the Lens

Tony Sweet

Canon Explorer of Light

Rick Sammon

Michael Frye

Joe Hearst

Gary Crabbe

Eric Harness

Gail Pierce

John Ballou

Lisa Rigge

Pat Toth-Smith

Michael Maloney

November 7 8 amp 9 2014

An Astounding Weekend of Photography

Renowned photographers will engage you with information on new and lesser-known techniques and incredible images From our keynote

speakers Nikon Legend Tony Sweet and Canon Explorer of Light Rick Sammon to an additional nine presenters in three rooms on

Saturday you will be inspired and entertained In addition at FotoClave we will show the results of the competition among

members of participating camera club councils

fotoclave 2014

Join Us for FotoClave 2014 Hilton Concord Hotel 1970 Diamond Blvd Concord CA 94520

Sponsored by N4C

2014 Calendar of Events

10

Every 3rd Thursday(Except April June amp

Aug) 630 PM

West Lane Bowling AlleyStockton

Membership MeetingContact Heide Stover

h1stoveraolcom

ThursdayOctober 16

West Lane Bowling AlleyStockton

October General MeetingSpecial Subject - Nature

ThursdayNovember 6

Cottage RoomHutchins Street Square

Lodi CA

Drop Off EntriesSandhill Crane Festival

Friday - SundayNovember 7 8 amp 9

Cottage RoomHutchins Street Square

Lodi CA

2014 Sandhill Crane Festivalwwwcranefestivalcom

Friday - SundayNovember 7 8 amp 9

Hilton Concord Hotel1970 Diamond BlvdConcord CA 94520

FotoClave 2014fotoclaveslickpiccom

SundayDecember 7 2014

Crowne Plaza Sacramento5321 Date Avenue

(I-80 Madison Ave)Sacramento Ca

Photographic Society of AmericaGold Rush Chapter Meeting

wwwpsagoldrushorg

ThursdayDecember 18

West Lane Bowling AlleyStockton

December General MeetingSpecial Subject - Travel

A GENERAL RULES1 Only paid-up members may enter club competition 2 Regular print and digital image competition period Once each month except January A competition year is February through December Current regular meetings are February March May July September October and December The number of meetings may change from time to time at the discretion of the Board of Directors and approval of the general membership as facilities permit The Annual Awards Dinner will be held in January3 A total of four (4) images (all prints all digital or a combination of both) may be entered each competition month A total of three (3) images may be entered in the Open Division and a total of one (1) in the Special Subject Division The number of entries may change from time to time at the discretion of the Board of Directors and the approval of the general membership 4 Each image will be scored from 6 to 12 points All prints or digital images receiving 11 or 12 points will be classed as an honor image The title of each print or digital image entered will be read before being evaluated The name of the maker will be read for 11-point honor winners Makerrsquos names will be announced for the 12 point images after the Print amp Digital Image-of-the-Month winners are chosen 5 A print or digital image that does not receive an honor score may be re-entered one more time in the same division 6 A print or digital image may be entered in all divisions for which it qualifies ie an honor image in Open may also be entered in the Special Subject Division at another competition A print or digital image that receives an honor score may not be re-entered in the same division7 Any print or digital image that appears to be ineligible for competition or not qualified for a specific division could expect to be challenged The Competition Vice-President shall decide whether or not the image is acceptable8 The exhibitor must have exposed each negative slide or digital image entered All images submitted for judging must be the work of the photographermaker including the taking of the images and any digital enhancements andor manipulation of the image This does not apply to the processing of film or printing by a commercial processor9 The same image should not be entered both as a print and a projected digital image in the same competition10 In the event of absence or barring unforeseen circumstances a member may submit make-up prints or digital images for one competition night per competition year and whenever possible must submit all make-up prints or digital images at the meeting immediately following the month a member failed or was unable to submit the prints or digital images Make-ups in the Special Subject Division must be the same subject as the month missed Also in case of absence a member may assign the responsibility of submitting his or her prints andor digital images for competition to another member11 A club member who serves as judge cannot enter his or her own prints or digital images in the same competition The judgersquos make-up prints or digital images can then be entered in another competition during that competition year This

11

2014 Competition Policy

is in addition to the once-a-year make-up provision already allowed12 Prints or digital images may be projectedviewed briefly before the judging of each division if the judge indicates heshe would like a preview

B PRINT ENTRY RULES1 Each print entered must have a completed label attached to the back of the print including name of maker title date entered and Division (Open or Special Subject) The writing or printing on the form must be legible Labels must be attached on the back of the print in the upper left-hand corner for correct viewing of the print2 All prints must be matted or mounted with a total size (including mat board) of no larger than 18rdquo X 24rdquo and no smaller than 8rdquo X 10rdquo Exception One side of a Panorama Print may be no larger than 36rdquo Prints that are smaller than 5rdquo X 7rdquo will not be accepted The makerrsquos name must not appear on the viewing surface of the image Framed prints shall not be entered3 Prints accompanied by entry forms should be submitted no later than 15 minutes prior to the start of the regular monthly meeting4 Prints receiving a score of 12 points in each class will be regrouped and judged for selection for the Print-of-the-Month honors Print-of-the-Month honors will be given in both Class A amp B C DIGITAL IMAGE ENTRY RULES1 Digital images must be submitted in a format and by the deadline specified by the Competition Vice-President Digital images may be submitted by email mailed (CD) or delivered (CD) to the Competition Vice-President Definition of Digital Image An image taken with a digital camera a negative slide or print scanned into the computer and processed digitally2 Images must be in a format compatible with the projector The key thing to keep in mind when formatting photos for submission is that the projector we use in the competition has a (maximum) resolution of 1024 x 768 pixels This means that any photo that exceeds this size in either dimension could end-up being cropped by the projector In other words the image width cannot be more than 1024 pixels and the image height cannot be more than 768 pixels If your image is horizontal only change the width to 1024 if your image is vertical only change the height to 768 Do not change both Down-sizing the image from the ldquonativerdquo resolution coming out of your camera also significantly reduces the file size This helps when emailing the files and takes-up less space on our hard-drives3 The makerrsquos name title of image date entered and division (Open or Special Subject) must be included as the title of the image When you have finished re-sizing your image save your image with a new title For example do a Save as Smith_Sunrise Splendor_05-13_Ojpeg (O-Open or SS-Special Subject) Specify whether you are Beginner or Advanced4 Digital Images receiving a score of 12 points in each class will be regrouped and judged for selection for the Digital Image-of-the-Month honors Digital Image-of-the-Month honors will be given in Class A AA amp B

Mike Clipkandash Education ChairpersonOctober 2014

How to Colorize Old (Black amp White) Photo ndash Photoshop TutorialBy Manesh K Filed in photoshop

Photo Edit Download wwwmyimageconvertercomBrowse Edit amp Convert Images Across Any Image Format - Get App

Today we are going to do some photo manipulation with Photoshop In the tutorial below we are going to guide you through patching up spots in an old black amp white photo and then colorizing it

First wersquoll run you through on removing white patches from photo and then wersquoll proceed to coloring it The steps are pretty standard Load up your Photoshop and off we goTo follow through the entire tutorial we suggest you download and use the following image

Step 1 Wersquoll start by removing the white patches on the image Choose Clone Stamp Tool and by pressing Alt key pick the plain and appropriate surface near all white patches and apply it on white patch Continue this process until all patches get removedAfter removing all patches your poor image will look clean as shown in image

12

Clipkarsquos CornerEducation Articles by Mike Clipka

13

Step 2Next wersquoll proceed with coloring the image It would be bad idea to colorize the image as a whole wersquoll do them one by one an object at a timeFirst wersquoll select the hat by making the use of Magnetic Lasso Tool ndash like this

Step 3To colorize it we will use the Hue and Saturation (HSL) option There are many ways to colorize an object but HSL is perhaps one of the easiest and most flexible

Proceeding to colorizing the hat add these values to the (HSL) 360 35 ndash 26 appropriately (While using HSL on that window do not forget to turn on Colorize option)

Step 4After applying color the hat may look a little plain Letrsquos add some Noise to it Select Filters -gt Noise -gt Add Noise and give amount ldquo5rdquo to it

Check Monochromatic option to get a smoother noise effect See the next image for its differences

Step 5Next the coat The process is same ndash only different HSL values which are respectively 42 10 ndash 63

To make the overall look of coat more natural instead of using Noise tool we take advantage of Grain Texture option You can find it under Filter -gt Filter Gallery -gt in Texture tab -gt Grain

Select the following options ndash Intensity ldquo10rdquo Contrast ldquo50rdquo and Grain Type ldquoSoftrdquo

14

Step 6Moving forward ndash the shoes To give shoes a shiny effect we are going to use Image menu -gt Adjustments -gt Variations Select ldquoMidtonesrdquo and click Ok Try some combination of CMYK colors until you get a boot of this color

Step 7Next up the door First letrsquos color the door borders Select one side border of door by using Rectangle Marquee Tool Add 15 45 -53 values in HSL tool Then select Filter -gt Filter Gallery -gt in Texture tab -gt select Grain option and keep Intensity ldquo12rdquo Contrast ldquo50rdquo select Grain type ldquoEnlargedrdquo

Follow the same procedure to all the borders of the door

Step 8Next we proceed to coloring rectangles between the doors with the following HSL values55 20 -26 and in Texture Grain keep intensity ldquo12rdquo contrast ldquo50rdquo and Grain type ldquoEnlargedrdquo Step 9Wersquoll wrap up coloring the door by adding colors to the borders HSL values of 25 7 -69 Then under Texture Grain keep Intensity ldquo12rdquo Contrast ldquo50rdquo and letrsquos add extra noise by selecting Grain type ldquoRegularrdquo Step 10After the door we proceed coloring the soil To color the soil select that portion by usingMagic Wand Tool and then keep HSL values 20 24 -56

Step 11Last but not least we will color the wooden background of the image To give it a it a wood look and feel we give it a HSL value of 31 53 -45 and then add Noise ldquo5rdquo by checking theMonochromatic option

After all this procedures finally you will see the output like this

Color CorrectionWe are done coloring the image Now we proceed to the final and most important part ndash color correction Color correction when done right will give the image its correct mood and make it more realistic

To increase the brightness of the image we go to the following option Image menu -gt Adjustments -gt Curves and add ldquo186rdquo for Output and ldquo164rdquo for Input

Letrsquos brighten up the following section of the image (where arrow in pointed to) First we select the portion with Rectangle Marquee tool Then go to Filter -gt Filter Gallery -gt Distort tab and select Diffuse Glow with the following values Graininess ldquo0rdquo Glow Amount ldquo11rdquo Clear Amount ldquo15rdquo And finally proceed to Image menu -gt Adjustments -gt Curves and add ldquo200rdquo for Ouptut and ldquo188rdquo for Input Follow the above process for the remaining parts of image but with different values inDiffuse Glow Graininess ldquo2rdquo Glow Amount ldquo5rdquo Clear Amount ldquo15rdquo Curvesrsquo not required

To darken the shadows of the hat and the coat letrsquos use the Burn Tool and by selectingRange Midtones and decreasing the Exposure value to ldquo20rdquo apply it on shadows part appropriately

Wersquoll use the Dodge Tool to brighten up the coat and hat so it looks as though the lights are coming in from the right side and to give a sense of thickness for the door borders we use the Burn Tool

And herersquos how your final output will look like (or similar) after some color corrections Editorrsquos note This post is written by Manesh K for Hongkiatcom Manesh is an Animator by profession and owner of Howtouse-photoshopcom where he helps people present their creativity digitally with Photoshop tutorials and useful resources

Herersquos a link to a 7+ minute You Tube tutorial on coloring Black amp White photos in Photoshophttpwwwyoutubecomwatchv=C2Srw245R7U

The Sunny f16 Rule for Digital Exposure By Jim Doty Jr

Part of the Digital Photography Exposure For Dummies Cheat SheetThe sunny f16 rule or Basic Daylight Exposure (BDE for short) tells you that the proper exposure in digital photography for a front lit subject is f16 with a shutter speed of 1ISO (thatrsquos 1 over the ISO in use) According to the sunny f16 rule at ISO 100 BDE would be f16 at 1100 second and at ISO 200 BDE would be f16 at 1200 second

When taking photos on a bright sunny day set the ISO of your camera to 100 the aperture to f16 and the shutter to 1100 second Then go out and take pictures of some front lit subjects As long as your subject isnrsquot white or black the exposures should be great No metering necessary

You can use equivalent exposures (different combinations of apertures shutter speeds and ISO settings that provide exactly the same exposure) for the sunny f16 rule The following table shows the equivalent exposures for the sunny f16 rule at ISO 100

Equivalent Exposures for the Sunny f16 Rule at ISO 100Aperture Shutter Speedf22 150 secondf16 1100 secondf11 1200 secondf8 1400 secondf56 1800 secondf4 11600 secondf28 13200 second

WHAT IS ldquoKEYSTONINGrdquo amp ldquoPINCUSIONrdquo Will be covered in my next article

NATURE PHOTOGRAPHY ndash BASIC DEFINITION

There should be no hand of man in a nature photo unless it relates to the subject The only one that was ever accepted was showing an injured bird that had been taken care of and recovered and was being released into the wild

I wonrsquot be at the October meeting as I will be visiting family in Indiana Have a good meeting

MIKE CLIPKA ndash EDUCATION CHAIRPERSON

16

17

Classes Start Oct 3rdSign Up Now wwwppsopcom

An Idiom For Photographersby Joe Baraban

Before I go any farther let me define the word Idiom An idiom is (1) An expression that cannot be understood from the meanings of its separate words but that has a separate meaning of its own (2) A form of a language that is spoken in a particular area and that uses some of its own words grammar and pronunciations

Here are some common idioms Sunday week for a week from Sunday Give way for retreat and Rock and Roll is a musical idiom The one Ive always thought was especially pertinent to photography and one I mention in my online class with the PPSOP and also in my Stretching Your Frame of Mind workshops I conduct around the planet is Theres more to it than meets the eye

In other words I tell my fellow photographers that theres two ways to look at a subject You can look at it with the left side of your brain the analytical side or the right side of your brain the creative side So many of my students dont look at things as they could be only as they are

Doing that will keep you from taking your photography to what I refer to asup a notch What I mean is that looking with the left side of your brain will only show you what things are Looking at those same things with the right side of your brain can show you what they could be Take the photo above for example

First allow me to digress for a moment I teach photographers how to use the basic elements of Visual Design and composition to create stronger images A complete description can be read by clicking on the link above

Ok so last week I was sitting in my backyard on my deck it was the end of a beautiful day Seventy two degrees and sunny so I had my book in one hand and my Bombay Martini and a bowl of nuts at the ready and close to my other hand I was trying to filter out all the sounds of a house being built next to us and occasionally looking up at what was going on The sun was setting behind the house that was next door and behind me and as the sun was setting the light was slowly disappearing from the bottom up leaving only the top part still in sunlight

If I had been looking at the house with the left side of my brain I would have only heard the incessant hammering and then seen the man working at the top of the house that was causing itthats what was Since Im always looking at things as they could be I saw more than just a house with a man working on the top floor I saw the Texture of the Crape Myrtles branches still bare from the Winter The square and rectangular Shapes and the blue Negative Space that defines and creates the Shapes Im always looking for ways to create Visual Tension and placing the man close to the edge of the frame is one of the ways The way the light is only left at the top of the construction is another and the contrast between his bright saturated red shirt against the soft blue sky and clouds is still another These elements of Visual Design and composition are all pieces that make up the finished puzzleanother idiom meaning the final photograph

Visit my website at wwwjoebarabancom and be sure to watch for upcoming workshops listed at the top of this blog Come shoot with me sometime and Ill show you what could be Dont forget to send me a photo and question to AskJoeBgmailcom - JoeB

18

Itrsquos All About the LightBy Kathleen Clemons

ldquoMy first thought is always of lightrdquo ~ Galen Rowell

I got my start in photography shooting sunrises from my front lawn back in 2003 Though my subject and location were limited they taught me much about the qualities of light and how quickly they change A gentle hint from Bryan Peterson (I was taking his online Understanding Exposure class) that there were other things to shoot besides sunrises got me off the lawn and where I am today Here are a couple from that first year

As photographers we need to pay close attention to light- we need to study itrsquos direction temperature quality intensity and how it is affecting our subjects After all as photographers we are painting with light

Sometimes when I am out shooting itrsquos the light that actually becomes my subject Great light on a landscape flower building person anything really can take my breath away At those times itrsquos the light that grabs my attention and makes me want to photograph the subject and often itrsquos nothing I had planned as my subject

I shot these two images from my deck last week as the sun was going down really the last bit of light on the bay I literally ran for my camera both times Within minutes the light was gone but I had my shots

19

Here are a few other images where the light is what caught my eye and really became my subject

Pay close attention to light Watch as it changes Study it See how it can sometimes make a subject glow or stand out how it really draws your eye Watch for backlighting see how side lighting can enhance texture how soft lighting can flatter and how light can become your main subject too

Happy ShootingKathleen

2015 Summer Iceland Photo Tour

Iceland is known for being a photographerrsquos paradise mostly because of the great variety in landscape along with exceptional light During summer time the combination of sunset and sunrise along with the unique landscape is what makes Iceland rare and desirable among photographers

Join William Yu and Iurie Belegurschi to Shoot Iceland June 17- 26 2015 details athttpwilliamyuphotoworkshopscomicelandhtml

20

21

How to be a professional Outdoor and Nature Photographerby Charlie Borland

If you are serious about your Nature Photography then dont miss your last chance this year to take How to be a professional Outdoor and Nature Photographer from Charlie Borland Charlie has made a living at this for a long time and this is a chance to take a 6 week course from him that has a lifetime of content Todays tip is from Charlie where he walks you through a shoot from concept to shooting and then processing

httpswwwyoutubecomwatchv=8oR-I6uZ9Bk

22

Tips to Improve Your Fall Photos Don Smith Photography

Monthly Photo Tip September 2014

This Sunday morning I will be departing for Jackson Hole Wyoming for the start of three consecutive fall workshops The first two will be spent photographing the fabulous fall color of Grand Teton National Park Ill then be off to Moab Utah for my ArchesCanyonlandsMonument Valley Workshop

Simply stated I love this time of year There has already been some snow falling in Wyoming and the leaves have been turning - yes fall is officially here

With that in mind I thought Id share my favorite fall photography tips

The first has to do with light I get asked all the time when is the best time of day to photograph fall color

Well fortunately enough really anytime though Id still say to get out for sunrise and shoot until the sun gets too harsh The same can be said for the other side of the day Fortunately the suns angle has been lowering so we are no longer faced with hard summer light

Under indirect light (dawn dusk and cloudy weather) colors (especially reds and yellows) tend to really pop They are very saturated under this type of light as long as you are using your polarlizer All foliage has a waxy sheen to it and polarizers help reduce that sheen allowing for a more saturated look

When the sun does make an appearance I try to move as much as 90 off-angle and let the light skim That being said my favorite light is backlight Simply place the sun behind the leaves your are photographing and watch the color explode

Another overlooked tip is to look for leaves already on the ground (as I did with these maples above) I try to either juxtapose them with another subject or find some sort of pattern or relationship between the leaves

The color itself is not always predictable as temperature and moisture play a large role in producing fall color As days grow shorter and nights grow longer and cooler biochemical processes in the leaf begin to paint the landscape with Natures autumn palette

Why Is Temperature ImportantA succession of warm sunny days and cool crisp but not freezing nights seems to bring about the most spectacular color displays During these days lots of sugars are produced in the leaf but the cool nights and the gradual closing of veins going into the leaf prevent these sugars from moving out These conditions-lots of sugar and lots of light-spur production of the brilliant anthocyanin pigments which tint reds purples and crimson Because carotenoids are always present in leaves the yellow and gold colors remain fairly constant from year to year

Why Is Moisture ImportantThe amount of moisture in the soil also affects autumn colors Like the weather soil moisture varies greatly from year to year The countless combinations of these two highly variable factors assure that no two autumns can be exactly alike A late spring or a severe summer drought can delay the onset of fall color by a few weeks A warm period during fall will also lower the intensity of autumn colors A warm wet spring favorable summer weather and warm sunny fall days with cool nights should produce the most brilliant autumn colors

Fortunately for us photographers fall offers a palette that is irresistible to our souls So get out this fall with your camera and get some much needed nurturing

A Simplified Method To Workflow Video SeriesLearn to process like a pro This video series has proven extremely popular It contains (26) videos and teaches you in 65 hours what took me 12 years to learn

Please check out Chapter headings and this short introductory video (and enjoy my son Aarons piano composition)

The Crack Zion National Park Utah

Canon 5DMKIII 70mm f16 1 second ISO 100 Singh-Ray Thin LB Polarizer

Lexar Digital Media

23

2014 Photo Workshops 3rd Annual Fall Color and Mountain Grandeur Grand Teton National Park - September 23-27 2014 (WORKSHOP 1 - SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

3rd Annual Fall Color and Mountain Grandeur Grand Teton National Park - September 28-October 2 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

6th Annual Full Moon Over Red Rock Arches and Monument Valley Mittens ArchesCanyonlands National Parks and Full Moonrise at Monument Valley - October 4-8 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

4th Annual Bryce Canyon Hoodoos and ZIon Fall Color Photo Workshop Fall Photography Workshop Bryce Canyon and Zion National Parks - November 1-5 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

2015 Photo Workshops 6th Annual Winter in Big Sur and the Monterey Peninsula - Magic Light Moonlight and Pfeiffer Beach Arch - January 4-7 2015 (4 spots left) 7th Annual Northern Arizona Workshop - Grand Canyon (with crescent moon) Page (Upper Antelope Canyon with light shafts and Horseshoe Bend) and Sedona - March 20-21 2015 (4 spots left) Springtime In Big Sur and the Monterey Peninsula - 7th Annual Wildflowers Full Moon Misty Fog and Headland Color Workshop - March 30 - April 2 2015 (3 spots remain) Don Smith and Gary Hart Spring at Oregons Columbia River Gorge Wildflowers and Waterfalls April 14 - 17 2015 (WORKSHOP SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

Don Smith and Gary Hart Spring at Oregons Columbia River Gorge Wildflowers and Waterfalls April 18 - 21 2015 (WORKSHOP SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY) Kauai Photo Workshop June 19-23 (Sign up before September 1 to receive an Earl-Bird discount of $150 off the full workshop price) (2 spots remain) Don Smith and Gary Hart Grand Canyon Monsoon and Lightning August 10-14 2015 (spots already filling) Private and Small Group Instruction

Page 9: Stockton Camera Club · 2018-09-06 · Stockton Camera Club The Shutter Tripper October2014 Hummer in Silhouette ... Stockton, CA 95202-2706 Phone: 209-464-2299 | Fax: 209-464-9229

Stockton Camera ClubMonthly Competition - September 2014

(Continued)

September 2014 - Class AA TOTAL OPEN SUBJECT FEB MAR MAY JULY SEPT OCT DECSharon McLemore 230 173 57 47 46 46 46 45 0 0Carol Marshall 225 169 56 45 46 45 46 43 0 0Joanne Sogsti 222 168 54 45 46 43 44 44 0 0Heide Stover 222 167 55 44 45 45 44 44 0 0Em McLaren 220 166 54 45 45 43 45 42 0 0Doug Ridgway 219 175 44 47 46 46 33 47 0 0Stan Sogsti 217 162 56 44 44 44 42 43 0 0Dean Taylor 186 140 46 0 46 46 47 47 0 0Trey Steinhart 180 136 44 46 0 44 44 46 0 0Janelle DeRuosi 43 32 11 0 0 0 0 43 0 0Elliott Pasinsky 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

9

Nikon Legend Behind the Lens

Tony Sweet

Canon Explorer of Light

Rick Sammon

Michael Frye

Joe Hearst

Gary Crabbe

Eric Harness

Gail Pierce

John Ballou

Lisa Rigge

Pat Toth-Smith

Michael Maloney

November 7 8 amp 9 2014

An Astounding Weekend of Photography

Renowned photographers will engage you with information on new and lesser-known techniques and incredible images From our keynote

speakers Nikon Legend Tony Sweet and Canon Explorer of Light Rick Sammon to an additional nine presenters in three rooms on

Saturday you will be inspired and entertained In addition at FotoClave we will show the results of the competition among

members of participating camera club councils

fotoclave 2014

Join Us for FotoClave 2014 Hilton Concord Hotel 1970 Diamond Blvd Concord CA 94520

Sponsored by N4C

2014 Calendar of Events

10

Every 3rd Thursday(Except April June amp

Aug) 630 PM

West Lane Bowling AlleyStockton

Membership MeetingContact Heide Stover

h1stoveraolcom

ThursdayOctober 16

West Lane Bowling AlleyStockton

October General MeetingSpecial Subject - Nature

ThursdayNovember 6

Cottage RoomHutchins Street Square

Lodi CA

Drop Off EntriesSandhill Crane Festival

Friday - SundayNovember 7 8 amp 9

Cottage RoomHutchins Street Square

Lodi CA

2014 Sandhill Crane Festivalwwwcranefestivalcom

Friday - SundayNovember 7 8 amp 9

Hilton Concord Hotel1970 Diamond BlvdConcord CA 94520

FotoClave 2014fotoclaveslickpiccom

SundayDecember 7 2014

Crowne Plaza Sacramento5321 Date Avenue

(I-80 Madison Ave)Sacramento Ca

Photographic Society of AmericaGold Rush Chapter Meeting

wwwpsagoldrushorg

ThursdayDecember 18

West Lane Bowling AlleyStockton

December General MeetingSpecial Subject - Travel

A GENERAL RULES1 Only paid-up members may enter club competition 2 Regular print and digital image competition period Once each month except January A competition year is February through December Current regular meetings are February March May July September October and December The number of meetings may change from time to time at the discretion of the Board of Directors and approval of the general membership as facilities permit The Annual Awards Dinner will be held in January3 A total of four (4) images (all prints all digital or a combination of both) may be entered each competition month A total of three (3) images may be entered in the Open Division and a total of one (1) in the Special Subject Division The number of entries may change from time to time at the discretion of the Board of Directors and the approval of the general membership 4 Each image will be scored from 6 to 12 points All prints or digital images receiving 11 or 12 points will be classed as an honor image The title of each print or digital image entered will be read before being evaluated The name of the maker will be read for 11-point honor winners Makerrsquos names will be announced for the 12 point images after the Print amp Digital Image-of-the-Month winners are chosen 5 A print or digital image that does not receive an honor score may be re-entered one more time in the same division 6 A print or digital image may be entered in all divisions for which it qualifies ie an honor image in Open may also be entered in the Special Subject Division at another competition A print or digital image that receives an honor score may not be re-entered in the same division7 Any print or digital image that appears to be ineligible for competition or not qualified for a specific division could expect to be challenged The Competition Vice-President shall decide whether or not the image is acceptable8 The exhibitor must have exposed each negative slide or digital image entered All images submitted for judging must be the work of the photographermaker including the taking of the images and any digital enhancements andor manipulation of the image This does not apply to the processing of film or printing by a commercial processor9 The same image should not be entered both as a print and a projected digital image in the same competition10 In the event of absence or barring unforeseen circumstances a member may submit make-up prints or digital images for one competition night per competition year and whenever possible must submit all make-up prints or digital images at the meeting immediately following the month a member failed or was unable to submit the prints or digital images Make-ups in the Special Subject Division must be the same subject as the month missed Also in case of absence a member may assign the responsibility of submitting his or her prints andor digital images for competition to another member11 A club member who serves as judge cannot enter his or her own prints or digital images in the same competition The judgersquos make-up prints or digital images can then be entered in another competition during that competition year This

11

2014 Competition Policy

is in addition to the once-a-year make-up provision already allowed12 Prints or digital images may be projectedviewed briefly before the judging of each division if the judge indicates heshe would like a preview

B PRINT ENTRY RULES1 Each print entered must have a completed label attached to the back of the print including name of maker title date entered and Division (Open or Special Subject) The writing or printing on the form must be legible Labels must be attached on the back of the print in the upper left-hand corner for correct viewing of the print2 All prints must be matted or mounted with a total size (including mat board) of no larger than 18rdquo X 24rdquo and no smaller than 8rdquo X 10rdquo Exception One side of a Panorama Print may be no larger than 36rdquo Prints that are smaller than 5rdquo X 7rdquo will not be accepted The makerrsquos name must not appear on the viewing surface of the image Framed prints shall not be entered3 Prints accompanied by entry forms should be submitted no later than 15 minutes prior to the start of the regular monthly meeting4 Prints receiving a score of 12 points in each class will be regrouped and judged for selection for the Print-of-the-Month honors Print-of-the-Month honors will be given in both Class A amp B C DIGITAL IMAGE ENTRY RULES1 Digital images must be submitted in a format and by the deadline specified by the Competition Vice-President Digital images may be submitted by email mailed (CD) or delivered (CD) to the Competition Vice-President Definition of Digital Image An image taken with a digital camera a negative slide or print scanned into the computer and processed digitally2 Images must be in a format compatible with the projector The key thing to keep in mind when formatting photos for submission is that the projector we use in the competition has a (maximum) resolution of 1024 x 768 pixels This means that any photo that exceeds this size in either dimension could end-up being cropped by the projector In other words the image width cannot be more than 1024 pixels and the image height cannot be more than 768 pixels If your image is horizontal only change the width to 1024 if your image is vertical only change the height to 768 Do not change both Down-sizing the image from the ldquonativerdquo resolution coming out of your camera also significantly reduces the file size This helps when emailing the files and takes-up less space on our hard-drives3 The makerrsquos name title of image date entered and division (Open or Special Subject) must be included as the title of the image When you have finished re-sizing your image save your image with a new title For example do a Save as Smith_Sunrise Splendor_05-13_Ojpeg (O-Open or SS-Special Subject) Specify whether you are Beginner or Advanced4 Digital Images receiving a score of 12 points in each class will be regrouped and judged for selection for the Digital Image-of-the-Month honors Digital Image-of-the-Month honors will be given in Class A AA amp B

Mike Clipkandash Education ChairpersonOctober 2014

How to Colorize Old (Black amp White) Photo ndash Photoshop TutorialBy Manesh K Filed in photoshop

Photo Edit Download wwwmyimageconvertercomBrowse Edit amp Convert Images Across Any Image Format - Get App

Today we are going to do some photo manipulation with Photoshop In the tutorial below we are going to guide you through patching up spots in an old black amp white photo and then colorizing it

First wersquoll run you through on removing white patches from photo and then wersquoll proceed to coloring it The steps are pretty standard Load up your Photoshop and off we goTo follow through the entire tutorial we suggest you download and use the following image

Step 1 Wersquoll start by removing the white patches on the image Choose Clone Stamp Tool and by pressing Alt key pick the plain and appropriate surface near all white patches and apply it on white patch Continue this process until all patches get removedAfter removing all patches your poor image will look clean as shown in image

12

Clipkarsquos CornerEducation Articles by Mike Clipka

13

Step 2Next wersquoll proceed with coloring the image It would be bad idea to colorize the image as a whole wersquoll do them one by one an object at a timeFirst wersquoll select the hat by making the use of Magnetic Lasso Tool ndash like this

Step 3To colorize it we will use the Hue and Saturation (HSL) option There are many ways to colorize an object but HSL is perhaps one of the easiest and most flexible

Proceeding to colorizing the hat add these values to the (HSL) 360 35 ndash 26 appropriately (While using HSL on that window do not forget to turn on Colorize option)

Step 4After applying color the hat may look a little plain Letrsquos add some Noise to it Select Filters -gt Noise -gt Add Noise and give amount ldquo5rdquo to it

Check Monochromatic option to get a smoother noise effect See the next image for its differences

Step 5Next the coat The process is same ndash only different HSL values which are respectively 42 10 ndash 63

To make the overall look of coat more natural instead of using Noise tool we take advantage of Grain Texture option You can find it under Filter -gt Filter Gallery -gt in Texture tab -gt Grain

Select the following options ndash Intensity ldquo10rdquo Contrast ldquo50rdquo and Grain Type ldquoSoftrdquo

14

Step 6Moving forward ndash the shoes To give shoes a shiny effect we are going to use Image menu -gt Adjustments -gt Variations Select ldquoMidtonesrdquo and click Ok Try some combination of CMYK colors until you get a boot of this color

Step 7Next up the door First letrsquos color the door borders Select one side border of door by using Rectangle Marquee Tool Add 15 45 -53 values in HSL tool Then select Filter -gt Filter Gallery -gt in Texture tab -gt select Grain option and keep Intensity ldquo12rdquo Contrast ldquo50rdquo select Grain type ldquoEnlargedrdquo

Follow the same procedure to all the borders of the door

Step 8Next we proceed to coloring rectangles between the doors with the following HSL values55 20 -26 and in Texture Grain keep intensity ldquo12rdquo contrast ldquo50rdquo and Grain type ldquoEnlargedrdquo Step 9Wersquoll wrap up coloring the door by adding colors to the borders HSL values of 25 7 -69 Then under Texture Grain keep Intensity ldquo12rdquo Contrast ldquo50rdquo and letrsquos add extra noise by selecting Grain type ldquoRegularrdquo Step 10After the door we proceed coloring the soil To color the soil select that portion by usingMagic Wand Tool and then keep HSL values 20 24 -56

Step 11Last but not least we will color the wooden background of the image To give it a it a wood look and feel we give it a HSL value of 31 53 -45 and then add Noise ldquo5rdquo by checking theMonochromatic option

After all this procedures finally you will see the output like this

Color CorrectionWe are done coloring the image Now we proceed to the final and most important part ndash color correction Color correction when done right will give the image its correct mood and make it more realistic

To increase the brightness of the image we go to the following option Image menu -gt Adjustments -gt Curves and add ldquo186rdquo for Output and ldquo164rdquo for Input

Letrsquos brighten up the following section of the image (where arrow in pointed to) First we select the portion with Rectangle Marquee tool Then go to Filter -gt Filter Gallery -gt Distort tab and select Diffuse Glow with the following values Graininess ldquo0rdquo Glow Amount ldquo11rdquo Clear Amount ldquo15rdquo And finally proceed to Image menu -gt Adjustments -gt Curves and add ldquo200rdquo for Ouptut and ldquo188rdquo for Input Follow the above process for the remaining parts of image but with different values inDiffuse Glow Graininess ldquo2rdquo Glow Amount ldquo5rdquo Clear Amount ldquo15rdquo Curvesrsquo not required

To darken the shadows of the hat and the coat letrsquos use the Burn Tool and by selectingRange Midtones and decreasing the Exposure value to ldquo20rdquo apply it on shadows part appropriately

Wersquoll use the Dodge Tool to brighten up the coat and hat so it looks as though the lights are coming in from the right side and to give a sense of thickness for the door borders we use the Burn Tool

And herersquos how your final output will look like (or similar) after some color corrections Editorrsquos note This post is written by Manesh K for Hongkiatcom Manesh is an Animator by profession and owner of Howtouse-photoshopcom where he helps people present their creativity digitally with Photoshop tutorials and useful resources

Herersquos a link to a 7+ minute You Tube tutorial on coloring Black amp White photos in Photoshophttpwwwyoutubecomwatchv=C2Srw245R7U

The Sunny f16 Rule for Digital Exposure By Jim Doty Jr

Part of the Digital Photography Exposure For Dummies Cheat SheetThe sunny f16 rule or Basic Daylight Exposure (BDE for short) tells you that the proper exposure in digital photography for a front lit subject is f16 with a shutter speed of 1ISO (thatrsquos 1 over the ISO in use) According to the sunny f16 rule at ISO 100 BDE would be f16 at 1100 second and at ISO 200 BDE would be f16 at 1200 second

When taking photos on a bright sunny day set the ISO of your camera to 100 the aperture to f16 and the shutter to 1100 second Then go out and take pictures of some front lit subjects As long as your subject isnrsquot white or black the exposures should be great No metering necessary

You can use equivalent exposures (different combinations of apertures shutter speeds and ISO settings that provide exactly the same exposure) for the sunny f16 rule The following table shows the equivalent exposures for the sunny f16 rule at ISO 100

Equivalent Exposures for the Sunny f16 Rule at ISO 100Aperture Shutter Speedf22 150 secondf16 1100 secondf11 1200 secondf8 1400 secondf56 1800 secondf4 11600 secondf28 13200 second

WHAT IS ldquoKEYSTONINGrdquo amp ldquoPINCUSIONrdquo Will be covered in my next article

NATURE PHOTOGRAPHY ndash BASIC DEFINITION

There should be no hand of man in a nature photo unless it relates to the subject The only one that was ever accepted was showing an injured bird that had been taken care of and recovered and was being released into the wild

I wonrsquot be at the October meeting as I will be visiting family in Indiana Have a good meeting

MIKE CLIPKA ndash EDUCATION CHAIRPERSON

16

17

Classes Start Oct 3rdSign Up Now wwwppsopcom

An Idiom For Photographersby Joe Baraban

Before I go any farther let me define the word Idiom An idiom is (1) An expression that cannot be understood from the meanings of its separate words but that has a separate meaning of its own (2) A form of a language that is spoken in a particular area and that uses some of its own words grammar and pronunciations

Here are some common idioms Sunday week for a week from Sunday Give way for retreat and Rock and Roll is a musical idiom The one Ive always thought was especially pertinent to photography and one I mention in my online class with the PPSOP and also in my Stretching Your Frame of Mind workshops I conduct around the planet is Theres more to it than meets the eye

In other words I tell my fellow photographers that theres two ways to look at a subject You can look at it with the left side of your brain the analytical side or the right side of your brain the creative side So many of my students dont look at things as they could be only as they are

Doing that will keep you from taking your photography to what I refer to asup a notch What I mean is that looking with the left side of your brain will only show you what things are Looking at those same things with the right side of your brain can show you what they could be Take the photo above for example

First allow me to digress for a moment I teach photographers how to use the basic elements of Visual Design and composition to create stronger images A complete description can be read by clicking on the link above

Ok so last week I was sitting in my backyard on my deck it was the end of a beautiful day Seventy two degrees and sunny so I had my book in one hand and my Bombay Martini and a bowl of nuts at the ready and close to my other hand I was trying to filter out all the sounds of a house being built next to us and occasionally looking up at what was going on The sun was setting behind the house that was next door and behind me and as the sun was setting the light was slowly disappearing from the bottom up leaving only the top part still in sunlight

If I had been looking at the house with the left side of my brain I would have only heard the incessant hammering and then seen the man working at the top of the house that was causing itthats what was Since Im always looking at things as they could be I saw more than just a house with a man working on the top floor I saw the Texture of the Crape Myrtles branches still bare from the Winter The square and rectangular Shapes and the blue Negative Space that defines and creates the Shapes Im always looking for ways to create Visual Tension and placing the man close to the edge of the frame is one of the ways The way the light is only left at the top of the construction is another and the contrast between his bright saturated red shirt against the soft blue sky and clouds is still another These elements of Visual Design and composition are all pieces that make up the finished puzzleanother idiom meaning the final photograph

Visit my website at wwwjoebarabancom and be sure to watch for upcoming workshops listed at the top of this blog Come shoot with me sometime and Ill show you what could be Dont forget to send me a photo and question to AskJoeBgmailcom - JoeB

18

Itrsquos All About the LightBy Kathleen Clemons

ldquoMy first thought is always of lightrdquo ~ Galen Rowell

I got my start in photography shooting sunrises from my front lawn back in 2003 Though my subject and location were limited they taught me much about the qualities of light and how quickly they change A gentle hint from Bryan Peterson (I was taking his online Understanding Exposure class) that there were other things to shoot besides sunrises got me off the lawn and where I am today Here are a couple from that first year

As photographers we need to pay close attention to light- we need to study itrsquos direction temperature quality intensity and how it is affecting our subjects After all as photographers we are painting with light

Sometimes when I am out shooting itrsquos the light that actually becomes my subject Great light on a landscape flower building person anything really can take my breath away At those times itrsquos the light that grabs my attention and makes me want to photograph the subject and often itrsquos nothing I had planned as my subject

I shot these two images from my deck last week as the sun was going down really the last bit of light on the bay I literally ran for my camera both times Within minutes the light was gone but I had my shots

19

Here are a few other images where the light is what caught my eye and really became my subject

Pay close attention to light Watch as it changes Study it See how it can sometimes make a subject glow or stand out how it really draws your eye Watch for backlighting see how side lighting can enhance texture how soft lighting can flatter and how light can become your main subject too

Happy ShootingKathleen

2015 Summer Iceland Photo Tour

Iceland is known for being a photographerrsquos paradise mostly because of the great variety in landscape along with exceptional light During summer time the combination of sunset and sunrise along with the unique landscape is what makes Iceland rare and desirable among photographers

Join William Yu and Iurie Belegurschi to Shoot Iceland June 17- 26 2015 details athttpwilliamyuphotoworkshopscomicelandhtml

20

21

How to be a professional Outdoor and Nature Photographerby Charlie Borland

If you are serious about your Nature Photography then dont miss your last chance this year to take How to be a professional Outdoor and Nature Photographer from Charlie Borland Charlie has made a living at this for a long time and this is a chance to take a 6 week course from him that has a lifetime of content Todays tip is from Charlie where he walks you through a shoot from concept to shooting and then processing

httpswwwyoutubecomwatchv=8oR-I6uZ9Bk

22

Tips to Improve Your Fall Photos Don Smith Photography

Monthly Photo Tip September 2014

This Sunday morning I will be departing for Jackson Hole Wyoming for the start of three consecutive fall workshops The first two will be spent photographing the fabulous fall color of Grand Teton National Park Ill then be off to Moab Utah for my ArchesCanyonlandsMonument Valley Workshop

Simply stated I love this time of year There has already been some snow falling in Wyoming and the leaves have been turning - yes fall is officially here

With that in mind I thought Id share my favorite fall photography tips

The first has to do with light I get asked all the time when is the best time of day to photograph fall color

Well fortunately enough really anytime though Id still say to get out for sunrise and shoot until the sun gets too harsh The same can be said for the other side of the day Fortunately the suns angle has been lowering so we are no longer faced with hard summer light

Under indirect light (dawn dusk and cloudy weather) colors (especially reds and yellows) tend to really pop They are very saturated under this type of light as long as you are using your polarlizer All foliage has a waxy sheen to it and polarizers help reduce that sheen allowing for a more saturated look

When the sun does make an appearance I try to move as much as 90 off-angle and let the light skim That being said my favorite light is backlight Simply place the sun behind the leaves your are photographing and watch the color explode

Another overlooked tip is to look for leaves already on the ground (as I did with these maples above) I try to either juxtapose them with another subject or find some sort of pattern or relationship between the leaves

The color itself is not always predictable as temperature and moisture play a large role in producing fall color As days grow shorter and nights grow longer and cooler biochemical processes in the leaf begin to paint the landscape with Natures autumn palette

Why Is Temperature ImportantA succession of warm sunny days and cool crisp but not freezing nights seems to bring about the most spectacular color displays During these days lots of sugars are produced in the leaf but the cool nights and the gradual closing of veins going into the leaf prevent these sugars from moving out These conditions-lots of sugar and lots of light-spur production of the brilliant anthocyanin pigments which tint reds purples and crimson Because carotenoids are always present in leaves the yellow and gold colors remain fairly constant from year to year

Why Is Moisture ImportantThe amount of moisture in the soil also affects autumn colors Like the weather soil moisture varies greatly from year to year The countless combinations of these two highly variable factors assure that no two autumns can be exactly alike A late spring or a severe summer drought can delay the onset of fall color by a few weeks A warm period during fall will also lower the intensity of autumn colors A warm wet spring favorable summer weather and warm sunny fall days with cool nights should produce the most brilliant autumn colors

Fortunately for us photographers fall offers a palette that is irresistible to our souls So get out this fall with your camera and get some much needed nurturing

A Simplified Method To Workflow Video SeriesLearn to process like a pro This video series has proven extremely popular It contains (26) videos and teaches you in 65 hours what took me 12 years to learn

Please check out Chapter headings and this short introductory video (and enjoy my son Aarons piano composition)

The Crack Zion National Park Utah

Canon 5DMKIII 70mm f16 1 second ISO 100 Singh-Ray Thin LB Polarizer

Lexar Digital Media

23

2014 Photo Workshops 3rd Annual Fall Color and Mountain Grandeur Grand Teton National Park - September 23-27 2014 (WORKSHOP 1 - SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

3rd Annual Fall Color and Mountain Grandeur Grand Teton National Park - September 28-October 2 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

6th Annual Full Moon Over Red Rock Arches and Monument Valley Mittens ArchesCanyonlands National Parks and Full Moonrise at Monument Valley - October 4-8 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

4th Annual Bryce Canyon Hoodoos and ZIon Fall Color Photo Workshop Fall Photography Workshop Bryce Canyon and Zion National Parks - November 1-5 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

2015 Photo Workshops 6th Annual Winter in Big Sur and the Monterey Peninsula - Magic Light Moonlight and Pfeiffer Beach Arch - January 4-7 2015 (4 spots left) 7th Annual Northern Arizona Workshop - Grand Canyon (with crescent moon) Page (Upper Antelope Canyon with light shafts and Horseshoe Bend) and Sedona - March 20-21 2015 (4 spots left) Springtime In Big Sur and the Monterey Peninsula - 7th Annual Wildflowers Full Moon Misty Fog and Headland Color Workshop - March 30 - April 2 2015 (3 spots remain) Don Smith and Gary Hart Spring at Oregons Columbia River Gorge Wildflowers and Waterfalls April 14 - 17 2015 (WORKSHOP SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

Don Smith and Gary Hart Spring at Oregons Columbia River Gorge Wildflowers and Waterfalls April 18 - 21 2015 (WORKSHOP SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY) Kauai Photo Workshop June 19-23 (Sign up before September 1 to receive an Earl-Bird discount of $150 off the full workshop price) (2 spots remain) Don Smith and Gary Hart Grand Canyon Monsoon and Lightning August 10-14 2015 (spots already filling) Private and Small Group Instruction

Page 10: Stockton Camera Club · 2018-09-06 · Stockton Camera Club The Shutter Tripper October2014 Hummer in Silhouette ... Stockton, CA 95202-2706 Phone: 209-464-2299 | Fax: 209-464-9229

2014 Calendar of Events

10

Every 3rd Thursday(Except April June amp

Aug) 630 PM

West Lane Bowling AlleyStockton

Membership MeetingContact Heide Stover

h1stoveraolcom

ThursdayOctober 16

West Lane Bowling AlleyStockton

October General MeetingSpecial Subject - Nature

ThursdayNovember 6

Cottage RoomHutchins Street Square

Lodi CA

Drop Off EntriesSandhill Crane Festival

Friday - SundayNovember 7 8 amp 9

Cottage RoomHutchins Street Square

Lodi CA

2014 Sandhill Crane Festivalwwwcranefestivalcom

Friday - SundayNovember 7 8 amp 9

Hilton Concord Hotel1970 Diamond BlvdConcord CA 94520

FotoClave 2014fotoclaveslickpiccom

SundayDecember 7 2014

Crowne Plaza Sacramento5321 Date Avenue

(I-80 Madison Ave)Sacramento Ca

Photographic Society of AmericaGold Rush Chapter Meeting

wwwpsagoldrushorg

ThursdayDecember 18

West Lane Bowling AlleyStockton

December General MeetingSpecial Subject - Travel

A GENERAL RULES1 Only paid-up members may enter club competition 2 Regular print and digital image competition period Once each month except January A competition year is February through December Current regular meetings are February March May July September October and December The number of meetings may change from time to time at the discretion of the Board of Directors and approval of the general membership as facilities permit The Annual Awards Dinner will be held in January3 A total of four (4) images (all prints all digital or a combination of both) may be entered each competition month A total of three (3) images may be entered in the Open Division and a total of one (1) in the Special Subject Division The number of entries may change from time to time at the discretion of the Board of Directors and the approval of the general membership 4 Each image will be scored from 6 to 12 points All prints or digital images receiving 11 or 12 points will be classed as an honor image The title of each print or digital image entered will be read before being evaluated The name of the maker will be read for 11-point honor winners Makerrsquos names will be announced for the 12 point images after the Print amp Digital Image-of-the-Month winners are chosen 5 A print or digital image that does not receive an honor score may be re-entered one more time in the same division 6 A print or digital image may be entered in all divisions for which it qualifies ie an honor image in Open may also be entered in the Special Subject Division at another competition A print or digital image that receives an honor score may not be re-entered in the same division7 Any print or digital image that appears to be ineligible for competition or not qualified for a specific division could expect to be challenged The Competition Vice-President shall decide whether or not the image is acceptable8 The exhibitor must have exposed each negative slide or digital image entered All images submitted for judging must be the work of the photographermaker including the taking of the images and any digital enhancements andor manipulation of the image This does not apply to the processing of film or printing by a commercial processor9 The same image should not be entered both as a print and a projected digital image in the same competition10 In the event of absence or barring unforeseen circumstances a member may submit make-up prints or digital images for one competition night per competition year and whenever possible must submit all make-up prints or digital images at the meeting immediately following the month a member failed or was unable to submit the prints or digital images Make-ups in the Special Subject Division must be the same subject as the month missed Also in case of absence a member may assign the responsibility of submitting his or her prints andor digital images for competition to another member11 A club member who serves as judge cannot enter his or her own prints or digital images in the same competition The judgersquos make-up prints or digital images can then be entered in another competition during that competition year This

11

2014 Competition Policy

is in addition to the once-a-year make-up provision already allowed12 Prints or digital images may be projectedviewed briefly before the judging of each division if the judge indicates heshe would like a preview

B PRINT ENTRY RULES1 Each print entered must have a completed label attached to the back of the print including name of maker title date entered and Division (Open or Special Subject) The writing or printing on the form must be legible Labels must be attached on the back of the print in the upper left-hand corner for correct viewing of the print2 All prints must be matted or mounted with a total size (including mat board) of no larger than 18rdquo X 24rdquo and no smaller than 8rdquo X 10rdquo Exception One side of a Panorama Print may be no larger than 36rdquo Prints that are smaller than 5rdquo X 7rdquo will not be accepted The makerrsquos name must not appear on the viewing surface of the image Framed prints shall not be entered3 Prints accompanied by entry forms should be submitted no later than 15 minutes prior to the start of the regular monthly meeting4 Prints receiving a score of 12 points in each class will be regrouped and judged for selection for the Print-of-the-Month honors Print-of-the-Month honors will be given in both Class A amp B C DIGITAL IMAGE ENTRY RULES1 Digital images must be submitted in a format and by the deadline specified by the Competition Vice-President Digital images may be submitted by email mailed (CD) or delivered (CD) to the Competition Vice-President Definition of Digital Image An image taken with a digital camera a negative slide or print scanned into the computer and processed digitally2 Images must be in a format compatible with the projector The key thing to keep in mind when formatting photos for submission is that the projector we use in the competition has a (maximum) resolution of 1024 x 768 pixels This means that any photo that exceeds this size in either dimension could end-up being cropped by the projector In other words the image width cannot be more than 1024 pixels and the image height cannot be more than 768 pixels If your image is horizontal only change the width to 1024 if your image is vertical only change the height to 768 Do not change both Down-sizing the image from the ldquonativerdquo resolution coming out of your camera also significantly reduces the file size This helps when emailing the files and takes-up less space on our hard-drives3 The makerrsquos name title of image date entered and division (Open or Special Subject) must be included as the title of the image When you have finished re-sizing your image save your image with a new title For example do a Save as Smith_Sunrise Splendor_05-13_Ojpeg (O-Open or SS-Special Subject) Specify whether you are Beginner or Advanced4 Digital Images receiving a score of 12 points in each class will be regrouped and judged for selection for the Digital Image-of-the-Month honors Digital Image-of-the-Month honors will be given in Class A AA amp B

Mike Clipkandash Education ChairpersonOctober 2014

How to Colorize Old (Black amp White) Photo ndash Photoshop TutorialBy Manesh K Filed in photoshop

Photo Edit Download wwwmyimageconvertercomBrowse Edit amp Convert Images Across Any Image Format - Get App

Today we are going to do some photo manipulation with Photoshop In the tutorial below we are going to guide you through patching up spots in an old black amp white photo and then colorizing it

First wersquoll run you through on removing white patches from photo and then wersquoll proceed to coloring it The steps are pretty standard Load up your Photoshop and off we goTo follow through the entire tutorial we suggest you download and use the following image

Step 1 Wersquoll start by removing the white patches on the image Choose Clone Stamp Tool and by pressing Alt key pick the plain and appropriate surface near all white patches and apply it on white patch Continue this process until all patches get removedAfter removing all patches your poor image will look clean as shown in image

12

Clipkarsquos CornerEducation Articles by Mike Clipka

13

Step 2Next wersquoll proceed with coloring the image It would be bad idea to colorize the image as a whole wersquoll do them one by one an object at a timeFirst wersquoll select the hat by making the use of Magnetic Lasso Tool ndash like this

Step 3To colorize it we will use the Hue and Saturation (HSL) option There are many ways to colorize an object but HSL is perhaps one of the easiest and most flexible

Proceeding to colorizing the hat add these values to the (HSL) 360 35 ndash 26 appropriately (While using HSL on that window do not forget to turn on Colorize option)

Step 4After applying color the hat may look a little plain Letrsquos add some Noise to it Select Filters -gt Noise -gt Add Noise and give amount ldquo5rdquo to it

Check Monochromatic option to get a smoother noise effect See the next image for its differences

Step 5Next the coat The process is same ndash only different HSL values which are respectively 42 10 ndash 63

To make the overall look of coat more natural instead of using Noise tool we take advantage of Grain Texture option You can find it under Filter -gt Filter Gallery -gt in Texture tab -gt Grain

Select the following options ndash Intensity ldquo10rdquo Contrast ldquo50rdquo and Grain Type ldquoSoftrdquo

14

Step 6Moving forward ndash the shoes To give shoes a shiny effect we are going to use Image menu -gt Adjustments -gt Variations Select ldquoMidtonesrdquo and click Ok Try some combination of CMYK colors until you get a boot of this color

Step 7Next up the door First letrsquos color the door borders Select one side border of door by using Rectangle Marquee Tool Add 15 45 -53 values in HSL tool Then select Filter -gt Filter Gallery -gt in Texture tab -gt select Grain option and keep Intensity ldquo12rdquo Contrast ldquo50rdquo select Grain type ldquoEnlargedrdquo

Follow the same procedure to all the borders of the door

Step 8Next we proceed to coloring rectangles between the doors with the following HSL values55 20 -26 and in Texture Grain keep intensity ldquo12rdquo contrast ldquo50rdquo and Grain type ldquoEnlargedrdquo Step 9Wersquoll wrap up coloring the door by adding colors to the borders HSL values of 25 7 -69 Then under Texture Grain keep Intensity ldquo12rdquo Contrast ldquo50rdquo and letrsquos add extra noise by selecting Grain type ldquoRegularrdquo Step 10After the door we proceed coloring the soil To color the soil select that portion by usingMagic Wand Tool and then keep HSL values 20 24 -56

Step 11Last but not least we will color the wooden background of the image To give it a it a wood look and feel we give it a HSL value of 31 53 -45 and then add Noise ldquo5rdquo by checking theMonochromatic option

After all this procedures finally you will see the output like this

Color CorrectionWe are done coloring the image Now we proceed to the final and most important part ndash color correction Color correction when done right will give the image its correct mood and make it more realistic

To increase the brightness of the image we go to the following option Image menu -gt Adjustments -gt Curves and add ldquo186rdquo for Output and ldquo164rdquo for Input

Letrsquos brighten up the following section of the image (where arrow in pointed to) First we select the portion with Rectangle Marquee tool Then go to Filter -gt Filter Gallery -gt Distort tab and select Diffuse Glow with the following values Graininess ldquo0rdquo Glow Amount ldquo11rdquo Clear Amount ldquo15rdquo And finally proceed to Image menu -gt Adjustments -gt Curves and add ldquo200rdquo for Ouptut and ldquo188rdquo for Input Follow the above process for the remaining parts of image but with different values inDiffuse Glow Graininess ldquo2rdquo Glow Amount ldquo5rdquo Clear Amount ldquo15rdquo Curvesrsquo not required

To darken the shadows of the hat and the coat letrsquos use the Burn Tool and by selectingRange Midtones and decreasing the Exposure value to ldquo20rdquo apply it on shadows part appropriately

Wersquoll use the Dodge Tool to brighten up the coat and hat so it looks as though the lights are coming in from the right side and to give a sense of thickness for the door borders we use the Burn Tool

And herersquos how your final output will look like (or similar) after some color corrections Editorrsquos note This post is written by Manesh K for Hongkiatcom Manesh is an Animator by profession and owner of Howtouse-photoshopcom where he helps people present their creativity digitally with Photoshop tutorials and useful resources

Herersquos a link to a 7+ minute You Tube tutorial on coloring Black amp White photos in Photoshophttpwwwyoutubecomwatchv=C2Srw245R7U

The Sunny f16 Rule for Digital Exposure By Jim Doty Jr

Part of the Digital Photography Exposure For Dummies Cheat SheetThe sunny f16 rule or Basic Daylight Exposure (BDE for short) tells you that the proper exposure in digital photography for a front lit subject is f16 with a shutter speed of 1ISO (thatrsquos 1 over the ISO in use) According to the sunny f16 rule at ISO 100 BDE would be f16 at 1100 second and at ISO 200 BDE would be f16 at 1200 second

When taking photos on a bright sunny day set the ISO of your camera to 100 the aperture to f16 and the shutter to 1100 second Then go out and take pictures of some front lit subjects As long as your subject isnrsquot white or black the exposures should be great No metering necessary

You can use equivalent exposures (different combinations of apertures shutter speeds and ISO settings that provide exactly the same exposure) for the sunny f16 rule The following table shows the equivalent exposures for the sunny f16 rule at ISO 100

Equivalent Exposures for the Sunny f16 Rule at ISO 100Aperture Shutter Speedf22 150 secondf16 1100 secondf11 1200 secondf8 1400 secondf56 1800 secondf4 11600 secondf28 13200 second

WHAT IS ldquoKEYSTONINGrdquo amp ldquoPINCUSIONrdquo Will be covered in my next article

NATURE PHOTOGRAPHY ndash BASIC DEFINITION

There should be no hand of man in a nature photo unless it relates to the subject The only one that was ever accepted was showing an injured bird that had been taken care of and recovered and was being released into the wild

I wonrsquot be at the October meeting as I will be visiting family in Indiana Have a good meeting

MIKE CLIPKA ndash EDUCATION CHAIRPERSON

16

17

Classes Start Oct 3rdSign Up Now wwwppsopcom

An Idiom For Photographersby Joe Baraban

Before I go any farther let me define the word Idiom An idiom is (1) An expression that cannot be understood from the meanings of its separate words but that has a separate meaning of its own (2) A form of a language that is spoken in a particular area and that uses some of its own words grammar and pronunciations

Here are some common idioms Sunday week for a week from Sunday Give way for retreat and Rock and Roll is a musical idiom The one Ive always thought was especially pertinent to photography and one I mention in my online class with the PPSOP and also in my Stretching Your Frame of Mind workshops I conduct around the planet is Theres more to it than meets the eye

In other words I tell my fellow photographers that theres two ways to look at a subject You can look at it with the left side of your brain the analytical side or the right side of your brain the creative side So many of my students dont look at things as they could be only as they are

Doing that will keep you from taking your photography to what I refer to asup a notch What I mean is that looking with the left side of your brain will only show you what things are Looking at those same things with the right side of your brain can show you what they could be Take the photo above for example

First allow me to digress for a moment I teach photographers how to use the basic elements of Visual Design and composition to create stronger images A complete description can be read by clicking on the link above

Ok so last week I was sitting in my backyard on my deck it was the end of a beautiful day Seventy two degrees and sunny so I had my book in one hand and my Bombay Martini and a bowl of nuts at the ready and close to my other hand I was trying to filter out all the sounds of a house being built next to us and occasionally looking up at what was going on The sun was setting behind the house that was next door and behind me and as the sun was setting the light was slowly disappearing from the bottom up leaving only the top part still in sunlight

If I had been looking at the house with the left side of my brain I would have only heard the incessant hammering and then seen the man working at the top of the house that was causing itthats what was Since Im always looking at things as they could be I saw more than just a house with a man working on the top floor I saw the Texture of the Crape Myrtles branches still bare from the Winter The square and rectangular Shapes and the blue Negative Space that defines and creates the Shapes Im always looking for ways to create Visual Tension and placing the man close to the edge of the frame is one of the ways The way the light is only left at the top of the construction is another and the contrast between his bright saturated red shirt against the soft blue sky and clouds is still another These elements of Visual Design and composition are all pieces that make up the finished puzzleanother idiom meaning the final photograph

Visit my website at wwwjoebarabancom and be sure to watch for upcoming workshops listed at the top of this blog Come shoot with me sometime and Ill show you what could be Dont forget to send me a photo and question to AskJoeBgmailcom - JoeB

18

Itrsquos All About the LightBy Kathleen Clemons

ldquoMy first thought is always of lightrdquo ~ Galen Rowell

I got my start in photography shooting sunrises from my front lawn back in 2003 Though my subject and location were limited they taught me much about the qualities of light and how quickly they change A gentle hint from Bryan Peterson (I was taking his online Understanding Exposure class) that there were other things to shoot besides sunrises got me off the lawn and where I am today Here are a couple from that first year

As photographers we need to pay close attention to light- we need to study itrsquos direction temperature quality intensity and how it is affecting our subjects After all as photographers we are painting with light

Sometimes when I am out shooting itrsquos the light that actually becomes my subject Great light on a landscape flower building person anything really can take my breath away At those times itrsquos the light that grabs my attention and makes me want to photograph the subject and often itrsquos nothing I had planned as my subject

I shot these two images from my deck last week as the sun was going down really the last bit of light on the bay I literally ran for my camera both times Within minutes the light was gone but I had my shots

19

Here are a few other images where the light is what caught my eye and really became my subject

Pay close attention to light Watch as it changes Study it See how it can sometimes make a subject glow or stand out how it really draws your eye Watch for backlighting see how side lighting can enhance texture how soft lighting can flatter and how light can become your main subject too

Happy ShootingKathleen

2015 Summer Iceland Photo Tour

Iceland is known for being a photographerrsquos paradise mostly because of the great variety in landscape along with exceptional light During summer time the combination of sunset and sunrise along with the unique landscape is what makes Iceland rare and desirable among photographers

Join William Yu and Iurie Belegurschi to Shoot Iceland June 17- 26 2015 details athttpwilliamyuphotoworkshopscomicelandhtml

20

21

How to be a professional Outdoor and Nature Photographerby Charlie Borland

If you are serious about your Nature Photography then dont miss your last chance this year to take How to be a professional Outdoor and Nature Photographer from Charlie Borland Charlie has made a living at this for a long time and this is a chance to take a 6 week course from him that has a lifetime of content Todays tip is from Charlie where he walks you through a shoot from concept to shooting and then processing

httpswwwyoutubecomwatchv=8oR-I6uZ9Bk

22

Tips to Improve Your Fall Photos Don Smith Photography

Monthly Photo Tip September 2014

This Sunday morning I will be departing for Jackson Hole Wyoming for the start of three consecutive fall workshops The first two will be spent photographing the fabulous fall color of Grand Teton National Park Ill then be off to Moab Utah for my ArchesCanyonlandsMonument Valley Workshop

Simply stated I love this time of year There has already been some snow falling in Wyoming and the leaves have been turning - yes fall is officially here

With that in mind I thought Id share my favorite fall photography tips

The first has to do with light I get asked all the time when is the best time of day to photograph fall color

Well fortunately enough really anytime though Id still say to get out for sunrise and shoot until the sun gets too harsh The same can be said for the other side of the day Fortunately the suns angle has been lowering so we are no longer faced with hard summer light

Under indirect light (dawn dusk and cloudy weather) colors (especially reds and yellows) tend to really pop They are very saturated under this type of light as long as you are using your polarlizer All foliage has a waxy sheen to it and polarizers help reduce that sheen allowing for a more saturated look

When the sun does make an appearance I try to move as much as 90 off-angle and let the light skim That being said my favorite light is backlight Simply place the sun behind the leaves your are photographing and watch the color explode

Another overlooked tip is to look for leaves already on the ground (as I did with these maples above) I try to either juxtapose them with another subject or find some sort of pattern or relationship between the leaves

The color itself is not always predictable as temperature and moisture play a large role in producing fall color As days grow shorter and nights grow longer and cooler biochemical processes in the leaf begin to paint the landscape with Natures autumn palette

Why Is Temperature ImportantA succession of warm sunny days and cool crisp but not freezing nights seems to bring about the most spectacular color displays During these days lots of sugars are produced in the leaf but the cool nights and the gradual closing of veins going into the leaf prevent these sugars from moving out These conditions-lots of sugar and lots of light-spur production of the brilliant anthocyanin pigments which tint reds purples and crimson Because carotenoids are always present in leaves the yellow and gold colors remain fairly constant from year to year

Why Is Moisture ImportantThe amount of moisture in the soil also affects autumn colors Like the weather soil moisture varies greatly from year to year The countless combinations of these two highly variable factors assure that no two autumns can be exactly alike A late spring or a severe summer drought can delay the onset of fall color by a few weeks A warm period during fall will also lower the intensity of autumn colors A warm wet spring favorable summer weather and warm sunny fall days with cool nights should produce the most brilliant autumn colors

Fortunately for us photographers fall offers a palette that is irresistible to our souls So get out this fall with your camera and get some much needed nurturing

A Simplified Method To Workflow Video SeriesLearn to process like a pro This video series has proven extremely popular It contains (26) videos and teaches you in 65 hours what took me 12 years to learn

Please check out Chapter headings and this short introductory video (and enjoy my son Aarons piano composition)

The Crack Zion National Park Utah

Canon 5DMKIII 70mm f16 1 second ISO 100 Singh-Ray Thin LB Polarizer

Lexar Digital Media

23

2014 Photo Workshops 3rd Annual Fall Color and Mountain Grandeur Grand Teton National Park - September 23-27 2014 (WORKSHOP 1 - SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

3rd Annual Fall Color and Mountain Grandeur Grand Teton National Park - September 28-October 2 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

6th Annual Full Moon Over Red Rock Arches and Monument Valley Mittens ArchesCanyonlands National Parks and Full Moonrise at Monument Valley - October 4-8 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

4th Annual Bryce Canyon Hoodoos and ZIon Fall Color Photo Workshop Fall Photography Workshop Bryce Canyon and Zion National Parks - November 1-5 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

2015 Photo Workshops 6th Annual Winter in Big Sur and the Monterey Peninsula - Magic Light Moonlight and Pfeiffer Beach Arch - January 4-7 2015 (4 spots left) 7th Annual Northern Arizona Workshop - Grand Canyon (with crescent moon) Page (Upper Antelope Canyon with light shafts and Horseshoe Bend) and Sedona - March 20-21 2015 (4 spots left) Springtime In Big Sur and the Monterey Peninsula - 7th Annual Wildflowers Full Moon Misty Fog and Headland Color Workshop - March 30 - April 2 2015 (3 spots remain) Don Smith and Gary Hart Spring at Oregons Columbia River Gorge Wildflowers and Waterfalls April 14 - 17 2015 (WORKSHOP SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

Don Smith and Gary Hart Spring at Oregons Columbia River Gorge Wildflowers and Waterfalls April 18 - 21 2015 (WORKSHOP SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY) Kauai Photo Workshop June 19-23 (Sign up before September 1 to receive an Earl-Bird discount of $150 off the full workshop price) (2 spots remain) Don Smith and Gary Hart Grand Canyon Monsoon and Lightning August 10-14 2015 (spots already filling) Private and Small Group Instruction

Page 11: Stockton Camera Club · 2018-09-06 · Stockton Camera Club The Shutter Tripper October2014 Hummer in Silhouette ... Stockton, CA 95202-2706 Phone: 209-464-2299 | Fax: 209-464-9229

A GENERAL RULES1 Only paid-up members may enter club competition 2 Regular print and digital image competition period Once each month except January A competition year is February through December Current regular meetings are February March May July September October and December The number of meetings may change from time to time at the discretion of the Board of Directors and approval of the general membership as facilities permit The Annual Awards Dinner will be held in January3 A total of four (4) images (all prints all digital or a combination of both) may be entered each competition month A total of three (3) images may be entered in the Open Division and a total of one (1) in the Special Subject Division The number of entries may change from time to time at the discretion of the Board of Directors and the approval of the general membership 4 Each image will be scored from 6 to 12 points All prints or digital images receiving 11 or 12 points will be classed as an honor image The title of each print or digital image entered will be read before being evaluated The name of the maker will be read for 11-point honor winners Makerrsquos names will be announced for the 12 point images after the Print amp Digital Image-of-the-Month winners are chosen 5 A print or digital image that does not receive an honor score may be re-entered one more time in the same division 6 A print or digital image may be entered in all divisions for which it qualifies ie an honor image in Open may also be entered in the Special Subject Division at another competition A print or digital image that receives an honor score may not be re-entered in the same division7 Any print or digital image that appears to be ineligible for competition or not qualified for a specific division could expect to be challenged The Competition Vice-President shall decide whether or not the image is acceptable8 The exhibitor must have exposed each negative slide or digital image entered All images submitted for judging must be the work of the photographermaker including the taking of the images and any digital enhancements andor manipulation of the image This does not apply to the processing of film or printing by a commercial processor9 The same image should not be entered both as a print and a projected digital image in the same competition10 In the event of absence or barring unforeseen circumstances a member may submit make-up prints or digital images for one competition night per competition year and whenever possible must submit all make-up prints or digital images at the meeting immediately following the month a member failed or was unable to submit the prints or digital images Make-ups in the Special Subject Division must be the same subject as the month missed Also in case of absence a member may assign the responsibility of submitting his or her prints andor digital images for competition to another member11 A club member who serves as judge cannot enter his or her own prints or digital images in the same competition The judgersquos make-up prints or digital images can then be entered in another competition during that competition year This

11

2014 Competition Policy

is in addition to the once-a-year make-up provision already allowed12 Prints or digital images may be projectedviewed briefly before the judging of each division if the judge indicates heshe would like a preview

B PRINT ENTRY RULES1 Each print entered must have a completed label attached to the back of the print including name of maker title date entered and Division (Open or Special Subject) The writing or printing on the form must be legible Labels must be attached on the back of the print in the upper left-hand corner for correct viewing of the print2 All prints must be matted or mounted with a total size (including mat board) of no larger than 18rdquo X 24rdquo and no smaller than 8rdquo X 10rdquo Exception One side of a Panorama Print may be no larger than 36rdquo Prints that are smaller than 5rdquo X 7rdquo will not be accepted The makerrsquos name must not appear on the viewing surface of the image Framed prints shall not be entered3 Prints accompanied by entry forms should be submitted no later than 15 minutes prior to the start of the regular monthly meeting4 Prints receiving a score of 12 points in each class will be regrouped and judged for selection for the Print-of-the-Month honors Print-of-the-Month honors will be given in both Class A amp B C DIGITAL IMAGE ENTRY RULES1 Digital images must be submitted in a format and by the deadline specified by the Competition Vice-President Digital images may be submitted by email mailed (CD) or delivered (CD) to the Competition Vice-President Definition of Digital Image An image taken with a digital camera a negative slide or print scanned into the computer and processed digitally2 Images must be in a format compatible with the projector The key thing to keep in mind when formatting photos for submission is that the projector we use in the competition has a (maximum) resolution of 1024 x 768 pixels This means that any photo that exceeds this size in either dimension could end-up being cropped by the projector In other words the image width cannot be more than 1024 pixels and the image height cannot be more than 768 pixels If your image is horizontal only change the width to 1024 if your image is vertical only change the height to 768 Do not change both Down-sizing the image from the ldquonativerdquo resolution coming out of your camera also significantly reduces the file size This helps when emailing the files and takes-up less space on our hard-drives3 The makerrsquos name title of image date entered and division (Open or Special Subject) must be included as the title of the image When you have finished re-sizing your image save your image with a new title For example do a Save as Smith_Sunrise Splendor_05-13_Ojpeg (O-Open or SS-Special Subject) Specify whether you are Beginner or Advanced4 Digital Images receiving a score of 12 points in each class will be regrouped and judged for selection for the Digital Image-of-the-Month honors Digital Image-of-the-Month honors will be given in Class A AA amp B

Mike Clipkandash Education ChairpersonOctober 2014

How to Colorize Old (Black amp White) Photo ndash Photoshop TutorialBy Manesh K Filed in photoshop

Photo Edit Download wwwmyimageconvertercomBrowse Edit amp Convert Images Across Any Image Format - Get App

Today we are going to do some photo manipulation with Photoshop In the tutorial below we are going to guide you through patching up spots in an old black amp white photo and then colorizing it

First wersquoll run you through on removing white patches from photo and then wersquoll proceed to coloring it The steps are pretty standard Load up your Photoshop and off we goTo follow through the entire tutorial we suggest you download and use the following image

Step 1 Wersquoll start by removing the white patches on the image Choose Clone Stamp Tool and by pressing Alt key pick the plain and appropriate surface near all white patches and apply it on white patch Continue this process until all patches get removedAfter removing all patches your poor image will look clean as shown in image

12

Clipkarsquos CornerEducation Articles by Mike Clipka

13

Step 2Next wersquoll proceed with coloring the image It would be bad idea to colorize the image as a whole wersquoll do them one by one an object at a timeFirst wersquoll select the hat by making the use of Magnetic Lasso Tool ndash like this

Step 3To colorize it we will use the Hue and Saturation (HSL) option There are many ways to colorize an object but HSL is perhaps one of the easiest and most flexible

Proceeding to colorizing the hat add these values to the (HSL) 360 35 ndash 26 appropriately (While using HSL on that window do not forget to turn on Colorize option)

Step 4After applying color the hat may look a little plain Letrsquos add some Noise to it Select Filters -gt Noise -gt Add Noise and give amount ldquo5rdquo to it

Check Monochromatic option to get a smoother noise effect See the next image for its differences

Step 5Next the coat The process is same ndash only different HSL values which are respectively 42 10 ndash 63

To make the overall look of coat more natural instead of using Noise tool we take advantage of Grain Texture option You can find it under Filter -gt Filter Gallery -gt in Texture tab -gt Grain

Select the following options ndash Intensity ldquo10rdquo Contrast ldquo50rdquo and Grain Type ldquoSoftrdquo

14

Step 6Moving forward ndash the shoes To give shoes a shiny effect we are going to use Image menu -gt Adjustments -gt Variations Select ldquoMidtonesrdquo and click Ok Try some combination of CMYK colors until you get a boot of this color

Step 7Next up the door First letrsquos color the door borders Select one side border of door by using Rectangle Marquee Tool Add 15 45 -53 values in HSL tool Then select Filter -gt Filter Gallery -gt in Texture tab -gt select Grain option and keep Intensity ldquo12rdquo Contrast ldquo50rdquo select Grain type ldquoEnlargedrdquo

Follow the same procedure to all the borders of the door

Step 8Next we proceed to coloring rectangles between the doors with the following HSL values55 20 -26 and in Texture Grain keep intensity ldquo12rdquo contrast ldquo50rdquo and Grain type ldquoEnlargedrdquo Step 9Wersquoll wrap up coloring the door by adding colors to the borders HSL values of 25 7 -69 Then under Texture Grain keep Intensity ldquo12rdquo Contrast ldquo50rdquo and letrsquos add extra noise by selecting Grain type ldquoRegularrdquo Step 10After the door we proceed coloring the soil To color the soil select that portion by usingMagic Wand Tool and then keep HSL values 20 24 -56

Step 11Last but not least we will color the wooden background of the image To give it a it a wood look and feel we give it a HSL value of 31 53 -45 and then add Noise ldquo5rdquo by checking theMonochromatic option

After all this procedures finally you will see the output like this

Color CorrectionWe are done coloring the image Now we proceed to the final and most important part ndash color correction Color correction when done right will give the image its correct mood and make it more realistic

To increase the brightness of the image we go to the following option Image menu -gt Adjustments -gt Curves and add ldquo186rdquo for Output and ldquo164rdquo for Input

Letrsquos brighten up the following section of the image (where arrow in pointed to) First we select the portion with Rectangle Marquee tool Then go to Filter -gt Filter Gallery -gt Distort tab and select Diffuse Glow with the following values Graininess ldquo0rdquo Glow Amount ldquo11rdquo Clear Amount ldquo15rdquo And finally proceed to Image menu -gt Adjustments -gt Curves and add ldquo200rdquo for Ouptut and ldquo188rdquo for Input Follow the above process for the remaining parts of image but with different values inDiffuse Glow Graininess ldquo2rdquo Glow Amount ldquo5rdquo Clear Amount ldquo15rdquo Curvesrsquo not required

To darken the shadows of the hat and the coat letrsquos use the Burn Tool and by selectingRange Midtones and decreasing the Exposure value to ldquo20rdquo apply it on shadows part appropriately

Wersquoll use the Dodge Tool to brighten up the coat and hat so it looks as though the lights are coming in from the right side and to give a sense of thickness for the door borders we use the Burn Tool

And herersquos how your final output will look like (or similar) after some color corrections Editorrsquos note This post is written by Manesh K for Hongkiatcom Manesh is an Animator by profession and owner of Howtouse-photoshopcom where he helps people present their creativity digitally with Photoshop tutorials and useful resources

Herersquos a link to a 7+ minute You Tube tutorial on coloring Black amp White photos in Photoshophttpwwwyoutubecomwatchv=C2Srw245R7U

The Sunny f16 Rule for Digital Exposure By Jim Doty Jr

Part of the Digital Photography Exposure For Dummies Cheat SheetThe sunny f16 rule or Basic Daylight Exposure (BDE for short) tells you that the proper exposure in digital photography for a front lit subject is f16 with a shutter speed of 1ISO (thatrsquos 1 over the ISO in use) According to the sunny f16 rule at ISO 100 BDE would be f16 at 1100 second and at ISO 200 BDE would be f16 at 1200 second

When taking photos on a bright sunny day set the ISO of your camera to 100 the aperture to f16 and the shutter to 1100 second Then go out and take pictures of some front lit subjects As long as your subject isnrsquot white or black the exposures should be great No metering necessary

You can use equivalent exposures (different combinations of apertures shutter speeds and ISO settings that provide exactly the same exposure) for the sunny f16 rule The following table shows the equivalent exposures for the sunny f16 rule at ISO 100

Equivalent Exposures for the Sunny f16 Rule at ISO 100Aperture Shutter Speedf22 150 secondf16 1100 secondf11 1200 secondf8 1400 secondf56 1800 secondf4 11600 secondf28 13200 second

WHAT IS ldquoKEYSTONINGrdquo amp ldquoPINCUSIONrdquo Will be covered in my next article

NATURE PHOTOGRAPHY ndash BASIC DEFINITION

There should be no hand of man in a nature photo unless it relates to the subject The only one that was ever accepted was showing an injured bird that had been taken care of and recovered and was being released into the wild

I wonrsquot be at the October meeting as I will be visiting family in Indiana Have a good meeting

MIKE CLIPKA ndash EDUCATION CHAIRPERSON

16

17

Classes Start Oct 3rdSign Up Now wwwppsopcom

An Idiom For Photographersby Joe Baraban

Before I go any farther let me define the word Idiom An idiom is (1) An expression that cannot be understood from the meanings of its separate words but that has a separate meaning of its own (2) A form of a language that is spoken in a particular area and that uses some of its own words grammar and pronunciations

Here are some common idioms Sunday week for a week from Sunday Give way for retreat and Rock and Roll is a musical idiom The one Ive always thought was especially pertinent to photography and one I mention in my online class with the PPSOP and also in my Stretching Your Frame of Mind workshops I conduct around the planet is Theres more to it than meets the eye

In other words I tell my fellow photographers that theres two ways to look at a subject You can look at it with the left side of your brain the analytical side or the right side of your brain the creative side So many of my students dont look at things as they could be only as they are

Doing that will keep you from taking your photography to what I refer to asup a notch What I mean is that looking with the left side of your brain will only show you what things are Looking at those same things with the right side of your brain can show you what they could be Take the photo above for example

First allow me to digress for a moment I teach photographers how to use the basic elements of Visual Design and composition to create stronger images A complete description can be read by clicking on the link above

Ok so last week I was sitting in my backyard on my deck it was the end of a beautiful day Seventy two degrees and sunny so I had my book in one hand and my Bombay Martini and a bowl of nuts at the ready and close to my other hand I was trying to filter out all the sounds of a house being built next to us and occasionally looking up at what was going on The sun was setting behind the house that was next door and behind me and as the sun was setting the light was slowly disappearing from the bottom up leaving only the top part still in sunlight

If I had been looking at the house with the left side of my brain I would have only heard the incessant hammering and then seen the man working at the top of the house that was causing itthats what was Since Im always looking at things as they could be I saw more than just a house with a man working on the top floor I saw the Texture of the Crape Myrtles branches still bare from the Winter The square and rectangular Shapes and the blue Negative Space that defines and creates the Shapes Im always looking for ways to create Visual Tension and placing the man close to the edge of the frame is one of the ways The way the light is only left at the top of the construction is another and the contrast between his bright saturated red shirt against the soft blue sky and clouds is still another These elements of Visual Design and composition are all pieces that make up the finished puzzleanother idiom meaning the final photograph

Visit my website at wwwjoebarabancom and be sure to watch for upcoming workshops listed at the top of this blog Come shoot with me sometime and Ill show you what could be Dont forget to send me a photo and question to AskJoeBgmailcom - JoeB

18

Itrsquos All About the LightBy Kathleen Clemons

ldquoMy first thought is always of lightrdquo ~ Galen Rowell

I got my start in photography shooting sunrises from my front lawn back in 2003 Though my subject and location were limited they taught me much about the qualities of light and how quickly they change A gentle hint from Bryan Peterson (I was taking his online Understanding Exposure class) that there were other things to shoot besides sunrises got me off the lawn and where I am today Here are a couple from that first year

As photographers we need to pay close attention to light- we need to study itrsquos direction temperature quality intensity and how it is affecting our subjects After all as photographers we are painting with light

Sometimes when I am out shooting itrsquos the light that actually becomes my subject Great light on a landscape flower building person anything really can take my breath away At those times itrsquos the light that grabs my attention and makes me want to photograph the subject and often itrsquos nothing I had planned as my subject

I shot these two images from my deck last week as the sun was going down really the last bit of light on the bay I literally ran for my camera both times Within minutes the light was gone but I had my shots

19

Here are a few other images where the light is what caught my eye and really became my subject

Pay close attention to light Watch as it changes Study it See how it can sometimes make a subject glow or stand out how it really draws your eye Watch for backlighting see how side lighting can enhance texture how soft lighting can flatter and how light can become your main subject too

Happy ShootingKathleen

2015 Summer Iceland Photo Tour

Iceland is known for being a photographerrsquos paradise mostly because of the great variety in landscape along with exceptional light During summer time the combination of sunset and sunrise along with the unique landscape is what makes Iceland rare and desirable among photographers

Join William Yu and Iurie Belegurschi to Shoot Iceland June 17- 26 2015 details athttpwilliamyuphotoworkshopscomicelandhtml

20

21

How to be a professional Outdoor and Nature Photographerby Charlie Borland

If you are serious about your Nature Photography then dont miss your last chance this year to take How to be a professional Outdoor and Nature Photographer from Charlie Borland Charlie has made a living at this for a long time and this is a chance to take a 6 week course from him that has a lifetime of content Todays tip is from Charlie where he walks you through a shoot from concept to shooting and then processing

httpswwwyoutubecomwatchv=8oR-I6uZ9Bk

22

Tips to Improve Your Fall Photos Don Smith Photography

Monthly Photo Tip September 2014

This Sunday morning I will be departing for Jackson Hole Wyoming for the start of three consecutive fall workshops The first two will be spent photographing the fabulous fall color of Grand Teton National Park Ill then be off to Moab Utah for my ArchesCanyonlandsMonument Valley Workshop

Simply stated I love this time of year There has already been some snow falling in Wyoming and the leaves have been turning - yes fall is officially here

With that in mind I thought Id share my favorite fall photography tips

The first has to do with light I get asked all the time when is the best time of day to photograph fall color

Well fortunately enough really anytime though Id still say to get out for sunrise and shoot until the sun gets too harsh The same can be said for the other side of the day Fortunately the suns angle has been lowering so we are no longer faced with hard summer light

Under indirect light (dawn dusk and cloudy weather) colors (especially reds and yellows) tend to really pop They are very saturated under this type of light as long as you are using your polarlizer All foliage has a waxy sheen to it and polarizers help reduce that sheen allowing for a more saturated look

When the sun does make an appearance I try to move as much as 90 off-angle and let the light skim That being said my favorite light is backlight Simply place the sun behind the leaves your are photographing and watch the color explode

Another overlooked tip is to look for leaves already on the ground (as I did with these maples above) I try to either juxtapose them with another subject or find some sort of pattern or relationship between the leaves

The color itself is not always predictable as temperature and moisture play a large role in producing fall color As days grow shorter and nights grow longer and cooler biochemical processes in the leaf begin to paint the landscape with Natures autumn palette

Why Is Temperature ImportantA succession of warm sunny days and cool crisp but not freezing nights seems to bring about the most spectacular color displays During these days lots of sugars are produced in the leaf but the cool nights and the gradual closing of veins going into the leaf prevent these sugars from moving out These conditions-lots of sugar and lots of light-spur production of the brilliant anthocyanin pigments which tint reds purples and crimson Because carotenoids are always present in leaves the yellow and gold colors remain fairly constant from year to year

Why Is Moisture ImportantThe amount of moisture in the soil also affects autumn colors Like the weather soil moisture varies greatly from year to year The countless combinations of these two highly variable factors assure that no two autumns can be exactly alike A late spring or a severe summer drought can delay the onset of fall color by a few weeks A warm period during fall will also lower the intensity of autumn colors A warm wet spring favorable summer weather and warm sunny fall days with cool nights should produce the most brilliant autumn colors

Fortunately for us photographers fall offers a palette that is irresistible to our souls So get out this fall with your camera and get some much needed nurturing

A Simplified Method To Workflow Video SeriesLearn to process like a pro This video series has proven extremely popular It contains (26) videos and teaches you in 65 hours what took me 12 years to learn

Please check out Chapter headings and this short introductory video (and enjoy my son Aarons piano composition)

The Crack Zion National Park Utah

Canon 5DMKIII 70mm f16 1 second ISO 100 Singh-Ray Thin LB Polarizer

Lexar Digital Media

23

2014 Photo Workshops 3rd Annual Fall Color and Mountain Grandeur Grand Teton National Park - September 23-27 2014 (WORKSHOP 1 - SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

3rd Annual Fall Color and Mountain Grandeur Grand Teton National Park - September 28-October 2 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

6th Annual Full Moon Over Red Rock Arches and Monument Valley Mittens ArchesCanyonlands National Parks and Full Moonrise at Monument Valley - October 4-8 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

4th Annual Bryce Canyon Hoodoos and ZIon Fall Color Photo Workshop Fall Photography Workshop Bryce Canyon and Zion National Parks - November 1-5 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

2015 Photo Workshops 6th Annual Winter in Big Sur and the Monterey Peninsula - Magic Light Moonlight and Pfeiffer Beach Arch - January 4-7 2015 (4 spots left) 7th Annual Northern Arizona Workshop - Grand Canyon (with crescent moon) Page (Upper Antelope Canyon with light shafts and Horseshoe Bend) and Sedona - March 20-21 2015 (4 spots left) Springtime In Big Sur and the Monterey Peninsula - 7th Annual Wildflowers Full Moon Misty Fog and Headland Color Workshop - March 30 - April 2 2015 (3 spots remain) Don Smith and Gary Hart Spring at Oregons Columbia River Gorge Wildflowers and Waterfalls April 14 - 17 2015 (WORKSHOP SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

Don Smith and Gary Hart Spring at Oregons Columbia River Gorge Wildflowers and Waterfalls April 18 - 21 2015 (WORKSHOP SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY) Kauai Photo Workshop June 19-23 (Sign up before September 1 to receive an Earl-Bird discount of $150 off the full workshop price) (2 spots remain) Don Smith and Gary Hart Grand Canyon Monsoon and Lightning August 10-14 2015 (spots already filling) Private and Small Group Instruction

Page 12: Stockton Camera Club · 2018-09-06 · Stockton Camera Club The Shutter Tripper October2014 Hummer in Silhouette ... Stockton, CA 95202-2706 Phone: 209-464-2299 | Fax: 209-464-9229

Mike Clipkandash Education ChairpersonOctober 2014

How to Colorize Old (Black amp White) Photo ndash Photoshop TutorialBy Manesh K Filed in photoshop

Photo Edit Download wwwmyimageconvertercomBrowse Edit amp Convert Images Across Any Image Format - Get App

Today we are going to do some photo manipulation with Photoshop In the tutorial below we are going to guide you through patching up spots in an old black amp white photo and then colorizing it

First wersquoll run you through on removing white patches from photo and then wersquoll proceed to coloring it The steps are pretty standard Load up your Photoshop and off we goTo follow through the entire tutorial we suggest you download and use the following image

Step 1 Wersquoll start by removing the white patches on the image Choose Clone Stamp Tool and by pressing Alt key pick the plain and appropriate surface near all white patches and apply it on white patch Continue this process until all patches get removedAfter removing all patches your poor image will look clean as shown in image

12

Clipkarsquos CornerEducation Articles by Mike Clipka

13

Step 2Next wersquoll proceed with coloring the image It would be bad idea to colorize the image as a whole wersquoll do them one by one an object at a timeFirst wersquoll select the hat by making the use of Magnetic Lasso Tool ndash like this

Step 3To colorize it we will use the Hue and Saturation (HSL) option There are many ways to colorize an object but HSL is perhaps one of the easiest and most flexible

Proceeding to colorizing the hat add these values to the (HSL) 360 35 ndash 26 appropriately (While using HSL on that window do not forget to turn on Colorize option)

Step 4After applying color the hat may look a little plain Letrsquos add some Noise to it Select Filters -gt Noise -gt Add Noise and give amount ldquo5rdquo to it

Check Monochromatic option to get a smoother noise effect See the next image for its differences

Step 5Next the coat The process is same ndash only different HSL values which are respectively 42 10 ndash 63

To make the overall look of coat more natural instead of using Noise tool we take advantage of Grain Texture option You can find it under Filter -gt Filter Gallery -gt in Texture tab -gt Grain

Select the following options ndash Intensity ldquo10rdquo Contrast ldquo50rdquo and Grain Type ldquoSoftrdquo

14

Step 6Moving forward ndash the shoes To give shoes a shiny effect we are going to use Image menu -gt Adjustments -gt Variations Select ldquoMidtonesrdquo and click Ok Try some combination of CMYK colors until you get a boot of this color

Step 7Next up the door First letrsquos color the door borders Select one side border of door by using Rectangle Marquee Tool Add 15 45 -53 values in HSL tool Then select Filter -gt Filter Gallery -gt in Texture tab -gt select Grain option and keep Intensity ldquo12rdquo Contrast ldquo50rdquo select Grain type ldquoEnlargedrdquo

Follow the same procedure to all the borders of the door

Step 8Next we proceed to coloring rectangles between the doors with the following HSL values55 20 -26 and in Texture Grain keep intensity ldquo12rdquo contrast ldquo50rdquo and Grain type ldquoEnlargedrdquo Step 9Wersquoll wrap up coloring the door by adding colors to the borders HSL values of 25 7 -69 Then under Texture Grain keep Intensity ldquo12rdquo Contrast ldquo50rdquo and letrsquos add extra noise by selecting Grain type ldquoRegularrdquo Step 10After the door we proceed coloring the soil To color the soil select that portion by usingMagic Wand Tool and then keep HSL values 20 24 -56

Step 11Last but not least we will color the wooden background of the image To give it a it a wood look and feel we give it a HSL value of 31 53 -45 and then add Noise ldquo5rdquo by checking theMonochromatic option

After all this procedures finally you will see the output like this

Color CorrectionWe are done coloring the image Now we proceed to the final and most important part ndash color correction Color correction when done right will give the image its correct mood and make it more realistic

To increase the brightness of the image we go to the following option Image menu -gt Adjustments -gt Curves and add ldquo186rdquo for Output and ldquo164rdquo for Input

Letrsquos brighten up the following section of the image (where arrow in pointed to) First we select the portion with Rectangle Marquee tool Then go to Filter -gt Filter Gallery -gt Distort tab and select Diffuse Glow with the following values Graininess ldquo0rdquo Glow Amount ldquo11rdquo Clear Amount ldquo15rdquo And finally proceed to Image menu -gt Adjustments -gt Curves and add ldquo200rdquo for Ouptut and ldquo188rdquo for Input Follow the above process for the remaining parts of image but with different values inDiffuse Glow Graininess ldquo2rdquo Glow Amount ldquo5rdquo Clear Amount ldquo15rdquo Curvesrsquo not required

To darken the shadows of the hat and the coat letrsquos use the Burn Tool and by selectingRange Midtones and decreasing the Exposure value to ldquo20rdquo apply it on shadows part appropriately

Wersquoll use the Dodge Tool to brighten up the coat and hat so it looks as though the lights are coming in from the right side and to give a sense of thickness for the door borders we use the Burn Tool

And herersquos how your final output will look like (or similar) after some color corrections Editorrsquos note This post is written by Manesh K for Hongkiatcom Manesh is an Animator by profession and owner of Howtouse-photoshopcom where he helps people present their creativity digitally with Photoshop tutorials and useful resources

Herersquos a link to a 7+ minute You Tube tutorial on coloring Black amp White photos in Photoshophttpwwwyoutubecomwatchv=C2Srw245R7U

The Sunny f16 Rule for Digital Exposure By Jim Doty Jr

Part of the Digital Photography Exposure For Dummies Cheat SheetThe sunny f16 rule or Basic Daylight Exposure (BDE for short) tells you that the proper exposure in digital photography for a front lit subject is f16 with a shutter speed of 1ISO (thatrsquos 1 over the ISO in use) According to the sunny f16 rule at ISO 100 BDE would be f16 at 1100 second and at ISO 200 BDE would be f16 at 1200 second

When taking photos on a bright sunny day set the ISO of your camera to 100 the aperture to f16 and the shutter to 1100 second Then go out and take pictures of some front lit subjects As long as your subject isnrsquot white or black the exposures should be great No metering necessary

You can use equivalent exposures (different combinations of apertures shutter speeds and ISO settings that provide exactly the same exposure) for the sunny f16 rule The following table shows the equivalent exposures for the sunny f16 rule at ISO 100

Equivalent Exposures for the Sunny f16 Rule at ISO 100Aperture Shutter Speedf22 150 secondf16 1100 secondf11 1200 secondf8 1400 secondf56 1800 secondf4 11600 secondf28 13200 second

WHAT IS ldquoKEYSTONINGrdquo amp ldquoPINCUSIONrdquo Will be covered in my next article

NATURE PHOTOGRAPHY ndash BASIC DEFINITION

There should be no hand of man in a nature photo unless it relates to the subject The only one that was ever accepted was showing an injured bird that had been taken care of and recovered and was being released into the wild

I wonrsquot be at the October meeting as I will be visiting family in Indiana Have a good meeting

MIKE CLIPKA ndash EDUCATION CHAIRPERSON

16

17

Classes Start Oct 3rdSign Up Now wwwppsopcom

An Idiom For Photographersby Joe Baraban

Before I go any farther let me define the word Idiom An idiom is (1) An expression that cannot be understood from the meanings of its separate words but that has a separate meaning of its own (2) A form of a language that is spoken in a particular area and that uses some of its own words grammar and pronunciations

Here are some common idioms Sunday week for a week from Sunday Give way for retreat and Rock and Roll is a musical idiom The one Ive always thought was especially pertinent to photography and one I mention in my online class with the PPSOP and also in my Stretching Your Frame of Mind workshops I conduct around the planet is Theres more to it than meets the eye

In other words I tell my fellow photographers that theres two ways to look at a subject You can look at it with the left side of your brain the analytical side or the right side of your brain the creative side So many of my students dont look at things as they could be only as they are

Doing that will keep you from taking your photography to what I refer to asup a notch What I mean is that looking with the left side of your brain will only show you what things are Looking at those same things with the right side of your brain can show you what they could be Take the photo above for example

First allow me to digress for a moment I teach photographers how to use the basic elements of Visual Design and composition to create stronger images A complete description can be read by clicking on the link above

Ok so last week I was sitting in my backyard on my deck it was the end of a beautiful day Seventy two degrees and sunny so I had my book in one hand and my Bombay Martini and a bowl of nuts at the ready and close to my other hand I was trying to filter out all the sounds of a house being built next to us and occasionally looking up at what was going on The sun was setting behind the house that was next door and behind me and as the sun was setting the light was slowly disappearing from the bottom up leaving only the top part still in sunlight

If I had been looking at the house with the left side of my brain I would have only heard the incessant hammering and then seen the man working at the top of the house that was causing itthats what was Since Im always looking at things as they could be I saw more than just a house with a man working on the top floor I saw the Texture of the Crape Myrtles branches still bare from the Winter The square and rectangular Shapes and the blue Negative Space that defines and creates the Shapes Im always looking for ways to create Visual Tension and placing the man close to the edge of the frame is one of the ways The way the light is only left at the top of the construction is another and the contrast between his bright saturated red shirt against the soft blue sky and clouds is still another These elements of Visual Design and composition are all pieces that make up the finished puzzleanother idiom meaning the final photograph

Visit my website at wwwjoebarabancom and be sure to watch for upcoming workshops listed at the top of this blog Come shoot with me sometime and Ill show you what could be Dont forget to send me a photo and question to AskJoeBgmailcom - JoeB

18

Itrsquos All About the LightBy Kathleen Clemons

ldquoMy first thought is always of lightrdquo ~ Galen Rowell

I got my start in photography shooting sunrises from my front lawn back in 2003 Though my subject and location were limited they taught me much about the qualities of light and how quickly they change A gentle hint from Bryan Peterson (I was taking his online Understanding Exposure class) that there were other things to shoot besides sunrises got me off the lawn and where I am today Here are a couple from that first year

As photographers we need to pay close attention to light- we need to study itrsquos direction temperature quality intensity and how it is affecting our subjects After all as photographers we are painting with light

Sometimes when I am out shooting itrsquos the light that actually becomes my subject Great light on a landscape flower building person anything really can take my breath away At those times itrsquos the light that grabs my attention and makes me want to photograph the subject and often itrsquos nothing I had planned as my subject

I shot these two images from my deck last week as the sun was going down really the last bit of light on the bay I literally ran for my camera both times Within minutes the light was gone but I had my shots

19

Here are a few other images where the light is what caught my eye and really became my subject

Pay close attention to light Watch as it changes Study it See how it can sometimes make a subject glow or stand out how it really draws your eye Watch for backlighting see how side lighting can enhance texture how soft lighting can flatter and how light can become your main subject too

Happy ShootingKathleen

2015 Summer Iceland Photo Tour

Iceland is known for being a photographerrsquos paradise mostly because of the great variety in landscape along with exceptional light During summer time the combination of sunset and sunrise along with the unique landscape is what makes Iceland rare and desirable among photographers

Join William Yu and Iurie Belegurschi to Shoot Iceland June 17- 26 2015 details athttpwilliamyuphotoworkshopscomicelandhtml

20

21

How to be a professional Outdoor and Nature Photographerby Charlie Borland

If you are serious about your Nature Photography then dont miss your last chance this year to take How to be a professional Outdoor and Nature Photographer from Charlie Borland Charlie has made a living at this for a long time and this is a chance to take a 6 week course from him that has a lifetime of content Todays tip is from Charlie where he walks you through a shoot from concept to shooting and then processing

httpswwwyoutubecomwatchv=8oR-I6uZ9Bk

22

Tips to Improve Your Fall Photos Don Smith Photography

Monthly Photo Tip September 2014

This Sunday morning I will be departing for Jackson Hole Wyoming for the start of three consecutive fall workshops The first two will be spent photographing the fabulous fall color of Grand Teton National Park Ill then be off to Moab Utah for my ArchesCanyonlandsMonument Valley Workshop

Simply stated I love this time of year There has already been some snow falling in Wyoming and the leaves have been turning - yes fall is officially here

With that in mind I thought Id share my favorite fall photography tips

The first has to do with light I get asked all the time when is the best time of day to photograph fall color

Well fortunately enough really anytime though Id still say to get out for sunrise and shoot until the sun gets too harsh The same can be said for the other side of the day Fortunately the suns angle has been lowering so we are no longer faced with hard summer light

Under indirect light (dawn dusk and cloudy weather) colors (especially reds and yellows) tend to really pop They are very saturated under this type of light as long as you are using your polarlizer All foliage has a waxy sheen to it and polarizers help reduce that sheen allowing for a more saturated look

When the sun does make an appearance I try to move as much as 90 off-angle and let the light skim That being said my favorite light is backlight Simply place the sun behind the leaves your are photographing and watch the color explode

Another overlooked tip is to look for leaves already on the ground (as I did with these maples above) I try to either juxtapose them with another subject or find some sort of pattern or relationship between the leaves

The color itself is not always predictable as temperature and moisture play a large role in producing fall color As days grow shorter and nights grow longer and cooler biochemical processes in the leaf begin to paint the landscape with Natures autumn palette

Why Is Temperature ImportantA succession of warm sunny days and cool crisp but not freezing nights seems to bring about the most spectacular color displays During these days lots of sugars are produced in the leaf but the cool nights and the gradual closing of veins going into the leaf prevent these sugars from moving out These conditions-lots of sugar and lots of light-spur production of the brilliant anthocyanin pigments which tint reds purples and crimson Because carotenoids are always present in leaves the yellow and gold colors remain fairly constant from year to year

Why Is Moisture ImportantThe amount of moisture in the soil also affects autumn colors Like the weather soil moisture varies greatly from year to year The countless combinations of these two highly variable factors assure that no two autumns can be exactly alike A late spring or a severe summer drought can delay the onset of fall color by a few weeks A warm period during fall will also lower the intensity of autumn colors A warm wet spring favorable summer weather and warm sunny fall days with cool nights should produce the most brilliant autumn colors

Fortunately for us photographers fall offers a palette that is irresistible to our souls So get out this fall with your camera and get some much needed nurturing

A Simplified Method To Workflow Video SeriesLearn to process like a pro This video series has proven extremely popular It contains (26) videos and teaches you in 65 hours what took me 12 years to learn

Please check out Chapter headings and this short introductory video (and enjoy my son Aarons piano composition)

The Crack Zion National Park Utah

Canon 5DMKIII 70mm f16 1 second ISO 100 Singh-Ray Thin LB Polarizer

Lexar Digital Media

23

2014 Photo Workshops 3rd Annual Fall Color and Mountain Grandeur Grand Teton National Park - September 23-27 2014 (WORKSHOP 1 - SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

3rd Annual Fall Color and Mountain Grandeur Grand Teton National Park - September 28-October 2 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

6th Annual Full Moon Over Red Rock Arches and Monument Valley Mittens ArchesCanyonlands National Parks and Full Moonrise at Monument Valley - October 4-8 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

4th Annual Bryce Canyon Hoodoos and ZIon Fall Color Photo Workshop Fall Photography Workshop Bryce Canyon and Zion National Parks - November 1-5 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

2015 Photo Workshops 6th Annual Winter in Big Sur and the Monterey Peninsula - Magic Light Moonlight and Pfeiffer Beach Arch - January 4-7 2015 (4 spots left) 7th Annual Northern Arizona Workshop - Grand Canyon (with crescent moon) Page (Upper Antelope Canyon with light shafts and Horseshoe Bend) and Sedona - March 20-21 2015 (4 spots left) Springtime In Big Sur and the Monterey Peninsula - 7th Annual Wildflowers Full Moon Misty Fog and Headland Color Workshop - March 30 - April 2 2015 (3 spots remain) Don Smith and Gary Hart Spring at Oregons Columbia River Gorge Wildflowers and Waterfalls April 14 - 17 2015 (WORKSHOP SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

Don Smith and Gary Hart Spring at Oregons Columbia River Gorge Wildflowers and Waterfalls April 18 - 21 2015 (WORKSHOP SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY) Kauai Photo Workshop June 19-23 (Sign up before September 1 to receive an Earl-Bird discount of $150 off the full workshop price) (2 spots remain) Don Smith and Gary Hart Grand Canyon Monsoon and Lightning August 10-14 2015 (spots already filling) Private and Small Group Instruction

Page 13: Stockton Camera Club · 2018-09-06 · Stockton Camera Club The Shutter Tripper October2014 Hummer in Silhouette ... Stockton, CA 95202-2706 Phone: 209-464-2299 | Fax: 209-464-9229

13

Step 2Next wersquoll proceed with coloring the image It would be bad idea to colorize the image as a whole wersquoll do them one by one an object at a timeFirst wersquoll select the hat by making the use of Magnetic Lasso Tool ndash like this

Step 3To colorize it we will use the Hue and Saturation (HSL) option There are many ways to colorize an object but HSL is perhaps one of the easiest and most flexible

Proceeding to colorizing the hat add these values to the (HSL) 360 35 ndash 26 appropriately (While using HSL on that window do not forget to turn on Colorize option)

Step 4After applying color the hat may look a little plain Letrsquos add some Noise to it Select Filters -gt Noise -gt Add Noise and give amount ldquo5rdquo to it

Check Monochromatic option to get a smoother noise effect See the next image for its differences

Step 5Next the coat The process is same ndash only different HSL values which are respectively 42 10 ndash 63

To make the overall look of coat more natural instead of using Noise tool we take advantage of Grain Texture option You can find it under Filter -gt Filter Gallery -gt in Texture tab -gt Grain

Select the following options ndash Intensity ldquo10rdquo Contrast ldquo50rdquo and Grain Type ldquoSoftrdquo

14

Step 6Moving forward ndash the shoes To give shoes a shiny effect we are going to use Image menu -gt Adjustments -gt Variations Select ldquoMidtonesrdquo and click Ok Try some combination of CMYK colors until you get a boot of this color

Step 7Next up the door First letrsquos color the door borders Select one side border of door by using Rectangle Marquee Tool Add 15 45 -53 values in HSL tool Then select Filter -gt Filter Gallery -gt in Texture tab -gt select Grain option and keep Intensity ldquo12rdquo Contrast ldquo50rdquo select Grain type ldquoEnlargedrdquo

Follow the same procedure to all the borders of the door

Step 8Next we proceed to coloring rectangles between the doors with the following HSL values55 20 -26 and in Texture Grain keep intensity ldquo12rdquo contrast ldquo50rdquo and Grain type ldquoEnlargedrdquo Step 9Wersquoll wrap up coloring the door by adding colors to the borders HSL values of 25 7 -69 Then under Texture Grain keep Intensity ldquo12rdquo Contrast ldquo50rdquo and letrsquos add extra noise by selecting Grain type ldquoRegularrdquo Step 10After the door we proceed coloring the soil To color the soil select that portion by usingMagic Wand Tool and then keep HSL values 20 24 -56

Step 11Last but not least we will color the wooden background of the image To give it a it a wood look and feel we give it a HSL value of 31 53 -45 and then add Noise ldquo5rdquo by checking theMonochromatic option

After all this procedures finally you will see the output like this

Color CorrectionWe are done coloring the image Now we proceed to the final and most important part ndash color correction Color correction when done right will give the image its correct mood and make it more realistic

To increase the brightness of the image we go to the following option Image menu -gt Adjustments -gt Curves and add ldquo186rdquo for Output and ldquo164rdquo for Input

Letrsquos brighten up the following section of the image (where arrow in pointed to) First we select the portion with Rectangle Marquee tool Then go to Filter -gt Filter Gallery -gt Distort tab and select Diffuse Glow with the following values Graininess ldquo0rdquo Glow Amount ldquo11rdquo Clear Amount ldquo15rdquo And finally proceed to Image menu -gt Adjustments -gt Curves and add ldquo200rdquo for Ouptut and ldquo188rdquo for Input Follow the above process for the remaining parts of image but with different values inDiffuse Glow Graininess ldquo2rdquo Glow Amount ldquo5rdquo Clear Amount ldquo15rdquo Curvesrsquo not required

To darken the shadows of the hat and the coat letrsquos use the Burn Tool and by selectingRange Midtones and decreasing the Exposure value to ldquo20rdquo apply it on shadows part appropriately

Wersquoll use the Dodge Tool to brighten up the coat and hat so it looks as though the lights are coming in from the right side and to give a sense of thickness for the door borders we use the Burn Tool

And herersquos how your final output will look like (or similar) after some color corrections Editorrsquos note This post is written by Manesh K for Hongkiatcom Manesh is an Animator by profession and owner of Howtouse-photoshopcom where he helps people present their creativity digitally with Photoshop tutorials and useful resources

Herersquos a link to a 7+ minute You Tube tutorial on coloring Black amp White photos in Photoshophttpwwwyoutubecomwatchv=C2Srw245R7U

The Sunny f16 Rule for Digital Exposure By Jim Doty Jr

Part of the Digital Photography Exposure For Dummies Cheat SheetThe sunny f16 rule or Basic Daylight Exposure (BDE for short) tells you that the proper exposure in digital photography for a front lit subject is f16 with a shutter speed of 1ISO (thatrsquos 1 over the ISO in use) According to the sunny f16 rule at ISO 100 BDE would be f16 at 1100 second and at ISO 200 BDE would be f16 at 1200 second

When taking photos on a bright sunny day set the ISO of your camera to 100 the aperture to f16 and the shutter to 1100 second Then go out and take pictures of some front lit subjects As long as your subject isnrsquot white or black the exposures should be great No metering necessary

You can use equivalent exposures (different combinations of apertures shutter speeds and ISO settings that provide exactly the same exposure) for the sunny f16 rule The following table shows the equivalent exposures for the sunny f16 rule at ISO 100

Equivalent Exposures for the Sunny f16 Rule at ISO 100Aperture Shutter Speedf22 150 secondf16 1100 secondf11 1200 secondf8 1400 secondf56 1800 secondf4 11600 secondf28 13200 second

WHAT IS ldquoKEYSTONINGrdquo amp ldquoPINCUSIONrdquo Will be covered in my next article

NATURE PHOTOGRAPHY ndash BASIC DEFINITION

There should be no hand of man in a nature photo unless it relates to the subject The only one that was ever accepted was showing an injured bird that had been taken care of and recovered and was being released into the wild

I wonrsquot be at the October meeting as I will be visiting family in Indiana Have a good meeting

MIKE CLIPKA ndash EDUCATION CHAIRPERSON

16

17

Classes Start Oct 3rdSign Up Now wwwppsopcom

An Idiom For Photographersby Joe Baraban

Before I go any farther let me define the word Idiom An idiom is (1) An expression that cannot be understood from the meanings of its separate words but that has a separate meaning of its own (2) A form of a language that is spoken in a particular area and that uses some of its own words grammar and pronunciations

Here are some common idioms Sunday week for a week from Sunday Give way for retreat and Rock and Roll is a musical idiom The one Ive always thought was especially pertinent to photography and one I mention in my online class with the PPSOP and also in my Stretching Your Frame of Mind workshops I conduct around the planet is Theres more to it than meets the eye

In other words I tell my fellow photographers that theres two ways to look at a subject You can look at it with the left side of your brain the analytical side or the right side of your brain the creative side So many of my students dont look at things as they could be only as they are

Doing that will keep you from taking your photography to what I refer to asup a notch What I mean is that looking with the left side of your brain will only show you what things are Looking at those same things with the right side of your brain can show you what they could be Take the photo above for example

First allow me to digress for a moment I teach photographers how to use the basic elements of Visual Design and composition to create stronger images A complete description can be read by clicking on the link above

Ok so last week I was sitting in my backyard on my deck it was the end of a beautiful day Seventy two degrees and sunny so I had my book in one hand and my Bombay Martini and a bowl of nuts at the ready and close to my other hand I was trying to filter out all the sounds of a house being built next to us and occasionally looking up at what was going on The sun was setting behind the house that was next door and behind me and as the sun was setting the light was slowly disappearing from the bottom up leaving only the top part still in sunlight

If I had been looking at the house with the left side of my brain I would have only heard the incessant hammering and then seen the man working at the top of the house that was causing itthats what was Since Im always looking at things as they could be I saw more than just a house with a man working on the top floor I saw the Texture of the Crape Myrtles branches still bare from the Winter The square and rectangular Shapes and the blue Negative Space that defines and creates the Shapes Im always looking for ways to create Visual Tension and placing the man close to the edge of the frame is one of the ways The way the light is only left at the top of the construction is another and the contrast between his bright saturated red shirt against the soft blue sky and clouds is still another These elements of Visual Design and composition are all pieces that make up the finished puzzleanother idiom meaning the final photograph

Visit my website at wwwjoebarabancom and be sure to watch for upcoming workshops listed at the top of this blog Come shoot with me sometime and Ill show you what could be Dont forget to send me a photo and question to AskJoeBgmailcom - JoeB

18

Itrsquos All About the LightBy Kathleen Clemons

ldquoMy first thought is always of lightrdquo ~ Galen Rowell

I got my start in photography shooting sunrises from my front lawn back in 2003 Though my subject and location were limited they taught me much about the qualities of light and how quickly they change A gentle hint from Bryan Peterson (I was taking his online Understanding Exposure class) that there were other things to shoot besides sunrises got me off the lawn and where I am today Here are a couple from that first year

As photographers we need to pay close attention to light- we need to study itrsquos direction temperature quality intensity and how it is affecting our subjects After all as photographers we are painting with light

Sometimes when I am out shooting itrsquos the light that actually becomes my subject Great light on a landscape flower building person anything really can take my breath away At those times itrsquos the light that grabs my attention and makes me want to photograph the subject and often itrsquos nothing I had planned as my subject

I shot these two images from my deck last week as the sun was going down really the last bit of light on the bay I literally ran for my camera both times Within minutes the light was gone but I had my shots

19

Here are a few other images where the light is what caught my eye and really became my subject

Pay close attention to light Watch as it changes Study it See how it can sometimes make a subject glow or stand out how it really draws your eye Watch for backlighting see how side lighting can enhance texture how soft lighting can flatter and how light can become your main subject too

Happy ShootingKathleen

2015 Summer Iceland Photo Tour

Iceland is known for being a photographerrsquos paradise mostly because of the great variety in landscape along with exceptional light During summer time the combination of sunset and sunrise along with the unique landscape is what makes Iceland rare and desirable among photographers

Join William Yu and Iurie Belegurschi to Shoot Iceland June 17- 26 2015 details athttpwilliamyuphotoworkshopscomicelandhtml

20

21

How to be a professional Outdoor and Nature Photographerby Charlie Borland

If you are serious about your Nature Photography then dont miss your last chance this year to take How to be a professional Outdoor and Nature Photographer from Charlie Borland Charlie has made a living at this for a long time and this is a chance to take a 6 week course from him that has a lifetime of content Todays tip is from Charlie where he walks you through a shoot from concept to shooting and then processing

httpswwwyoutubecomwatchv=8oR-I6uZ9Bk

22

Tips to Improve Your Fall Photos Don Smith Photography

Monthly Photo Tip September 2014

This Sunday morning I will be departing for Jackson Hole Wyoming for the start of three consecutive fall workshops The first two will be spent photographing the fabulous fall color of Grand Teton National Park Ill then be off to Moab Utah for my ArchesCanyonlandsMonument Valley Workshop

Simply stated I love this time of year There has already been some snow falling in Wyoming and the leaves have been turning - yes fall is officially here

With that in mind I thought Id share my favorite fall photography tips

The first has to do with light I get asked all the time when is the best time of day to photograph fall color

Well fortunately enough really anytime though Id still say to get out for sunrise and shoot until the sun gets too harsh The same can be said for the other side of the day Fortunately the suns angle has been lowering so we are no longer faced with hard summer light

Under indirect light (dawn dusk and cloudy weather) colors (especially reds and yellows) tend to really pop They are very saturated under this type of light as long as you are using your polarlizer All foliage has a waxy sheen to it and polarizers help reduce that sheen allowing for a more saturated look

When the sun does make an appearance I try to move as much as 90 off-angle and let the light skim That being said my favorite light is backlight Simply place the sun behind the leaves your are photographing and watch the color explode

Another overlooked tip is to look for leaves already on the ground (as I did with these maples above) I try to either juxtapose them with another subject or find some sort of pattern or relationship between the leaves

The color itself is not always predictable as temperature and moisture play a large role in producing fall color As days grow shorter and nights grow longer and cooler biochemical processes in the leaf begin to paint the landscape with Natures autumn palette

Why Is Temperature ImportantA succession of warm sunny days and cool crisp but not freezing nights seems to bring about the most spectacular color displays During these days lots of sugars are produced in the leaf but the cool nights and the gradual closing of veins going into the leaf prevent these sugars from moving out These conditions-lots of sugar and lots of light-spur production of the brilliant anthocyanin pigments which tint reds purples and crimson Because carotenoids are always present in leaves the yellow and gold colors remain fairly constant from year to year

Why Is Moisture ImportantThe amount of moisture in the soil also affects autumn colors Like the weather soil moisture varies greatly from year to year The countless combinations of these two highly variable factors assure that no two autumns can be exactly alike A late spring or a severe summer drought can delay the onset of fall color by a few weeks A warm period during fall will also lower the intensity of autumn colors A warm wet spring favorable summer weather and warm sunny fall days with cool nights should produce the most brilliant autumn colors

Fortunately for us photographers fall offers a palette that is irresistible to our souls So get out this fall with your camera and get some much needed nurturing

A Simplified Method To Workflow Video SeriesLearn to process like a pro This video series has proven extremely popular It contains (26) videos and teaches you in 65 hours what took me 12 years to learn

Please check out Chapter headings and this short introductory video (and enjoy my son Aarons piano composition)

The Crack Zion National Park Utah

Canon 5DMKIII 70mm f16 1 second ISO 100 Singh-Ray Thin LB Polarizer

Lexar Digital Media

23

2014 Photo Workshops 3rd Annual Fall Color and Mountain Grandeur Grand Teton National Park - September 23-27 2014 (WORKSHOP 1 - SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

3rd Annual Fall Color and Mountain Grandeur Grand Teton National Park - September 28-October 2 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

6th Annual Full Moon Over Red Rock Arches and Monument Valley Mittens ArchesCanyonlands National Parks and Full Moonrise at Monument Valley - October 4-8 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

4th Annual Bryce Canyon Hoodoos and ZIon Fall Color Photo Workshop Fall Photography Workshop Bryce Canyon and Zion National Parks - November 1-5 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

2015 Photo Workshops 6th Annual Winter in Big Sur and the Monterey Peninsula - Magic Light Moonlight and Pfeiffer Beach Arch - January 4-7 2015 (4 spots left) 7th Annual Northern Arizona Workshop - Grand Canyon (with crescent moon) Page (Upper Antelope Canyon with light shafts and Horseshoe Bend) and Sedona - March 20-21 2015 (4 spots left) Springtime In Big Sur and the Monterey Peninsula - 7th Annual Wildflowers Full Moon Misty Fog and Headland Color Workshop - March 30 - April 2 2015 (3 spots remain) Don Smith and Gary Hart Spring at Oregons Columbia River Gorge Wildflowers and Waterfalls April 14 - 17 2015 (WORKSHOP SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

Don Smith and Gary Hart Spring at Oregons Columbia River Gorge Wildflowers and Waterfalls April 18 - 21 2015 (WORKSHOP SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY) Kauai Photo Workshop June 19-23 (Sign up before September 1 to receive an Earl-Bird discount of $150 off the full workshop price) (2 spots remain) Don Smith and Gary Hart Grand Canyon Monsoon and Lightning August 10-14 2015 (spots already filling) Private and Small Group Instruction

Page 14: Stockton Camera Club · 2018-09-06 · Stockton Camera Club The Shutter Tripper October2014 Hummer in Silhouette ... Stockton, CA 95202-2706 Phone: 209-464-2299 | Fax: 209-464-9229

14

Step 6Moving forward ndash the shoes To give shoes a shiny effect we are going to use Image menu -gt Adjustments -gt Variations Select ldquoMidtonesrdquo and click Ok Try some combination of CMYK colors until you get a boot of this color

Step 7Next up the door First letrsquos color the door borders Select one side border of door by using Rectangle Marquee Tool Add 15 45 -53 values in HSL tool Then select Filter -gt Filter Gallery -gt in Texture tab -gt select Grain option and keep Intensity ldquo12rdquo Contrast ldquo50rdquo select Grain type ldquoEnlargedrdquo

Follow the same procedure to all the borders of the door

Step 8Next we proceed to coloring rectangles between the doors with the following HSL values55 20 -26 and in Texture Grain keep intensity ldquo12rdquo contrast ldquo50rdquo and Grain type ldquoEnlargedrdquo Step 9Wersquoll wrap up coloring the door by adding colors to the borders HSL values of 25 7 -69 Then under Texture Grain keep Intensity ldquo12rdquo Contrast ldquo50rdquo and letrsquos add extra noise by selecting Grain type ldquoRegularrdquo Step 10After the door we proceed coloring the soil To color the soil select that portion by usingMagic Wand Tool and then keep HSL values 20 24 -56

Step 11Last but not least we will color the wooden background of the image To give it a it a wood look and feel we give it a HSL value of 31 53 -45 and then add Noise ldquo5rdquo by checking theMonochromatic option

After all this procedures finally you will see the output like this

Color CorrectionWe are done coloring the image Now we proceed to the final and most important part ndash color correction Color correction when done right will give the image its correct mood and make it more realistic

To increase the brightness of the image we go to the following option Image menu -gt Adjustments -gt Curves and add ldquo186rdquo for Output and ldquo164rdquo for Input

Letrsquos brighten up the following section of the image (where arrow in pointed to) First we select the portion with Rectangle Marquee tool Then go to Filter -gt Filter Gallery -gt Distort tab and select Diffuse Glow with the following values Graininess ldquo0rdquo Glow Amount ldquo11rdquo Clear Amount ldquo15rdquo And finally proceed to Image menu -gt Adjustments -gt Curves and add ldquo200rdquo for Ouptut and ldquo188rdquo for Input Follow the above process for the remaining parts of image but with different values inDiffuse Glow Graininess ldquo2rdquo Glow Amount ldquo5rdquo Clear Amount ldquo15rdquo Curvesrsquo not required

To darken the shadows of the hat and the coat letrsquos use the Burn Tool and by selectingRange Midtones and decreasing the Exposure value to ldquo20rdquo apply it on shadows part appropriately

Wersquoll use the Dodge Tool to brighten up the coat and hat so it looks as though the lights are coming in from the right side and to give a sense of thickness for the door borders we use the Burn Tool

And herersquos how your final output will look like (or similar) after some color corrections Editorrsquos note This post is written by Manesh K for Hongkiatcom Manesh is an Animator by profession and owner of Howtouse-photoshopcom where he helps people present their creativity digitally with Photoshop tutorials and useful resources

Herersquos a link to a 7+ minute You Tube tutorial on coloring Black amp White photos in Photoshophttpwwwyoutubecomwatchv=C2Srw245R7U

The Sunny f16 Rule for Digital Exposure By Jim Doty Jr

Part of the Digital Photography Exposure For Dummies Cheat SheetThe sunny f16 rule or Basic Daylight Exposure (BDE for short) tells you that the proper exposure in digital photography for a front lit subject is f16 with a shutter speed of 1ISO (thatrsquos 1 over the ISO in use) According to the sunny f16 rule at ISO 100 BDE would be f16 at 1100 second and at ISO 200 BDE would be f16 at 1200 second

When taking photos on a bright sunny day set the ISO of your camera to 100 the aperture to f16 and the shutter to 1100 second Then go out and take pictures of some front lit subjects As long as your subject isnrsquot white or black the exposures should be great No metering necessary

You can use equivalent exposures (different combinations of apertures shutter speeds and ISO settings that provide exactly the same exposure) for the sunny f16 rule The following table shows the equivalent exposures for the sunny f16 rule at ISO 100

Equivalent Exposures for the Sunny f16 Rule at ISO 100Aperture Shutter Speedf22 150 secondf16 1100 secondf11 1200 secondf8 1400 secondf56 1800 secondf4 11600 secondf28 13200 second

WHAT IS ldquoKEYSTONINGrdquo amp ldquoPINCUSIONrdquo Will be covered in my next article

NATURE PHOTOGRAPHY ndash BASIC DEFINITION

There should be no hand of man in a nature photo unless it relates to the subject The only one that was ever accepted was showing an injured bird that had been taken care of and recovered and was being released into the wild

I wonrsquot be at the October meeting as I will be visiting family in Indiana Have a good meeting

MIKE CLIPKA ndash EDUCATION CHAIRPERSON

16

17

Classes Start Oct 3rdSign Up Now wwwppsopcom

An Idiom For Photographersby Joe Baraban

Before I go any farther let me define the word Idiom An idiom is (1) An expression that cannot be understood from the meanings of its separate words but that has a separate meaning of its own (2) A form of a language that is spoken in a particular area and that uses some of its own words grammar and pronunciations

Here are some common idioms Sunday week for a week from Sunday Give way for retreat and Rock and Roll is a musical idiom The one Ive always thought was especially pertinent to photography and one I mention in my online class with the PPSOP and also in my Stretching Your Frame of Mind workshops I conduct around the planet is Theres more to it than meets the eye

In other words I tell my fellow photographers that theres two ways to look at a subject You can look at it with the left side of your brain the analytical side or the right side of your brain the creative side So many of my students dont look at things as they could be only as they are

Doing that will keep you from taking your photography to what I refer to asup a notch What I mean is that looking with the left side of your brain will only show you what things are Looking at those same things with the right side of your brain can show you what they could be Take the photo above for example

First allow me to digress for a moment I teach photographers how to use the basic elements of Visual Design and composition to create stronger images A complete description can be read by clicking on the link above

Ok so last week I was sitting in my backyard on my deck it was the end of a beautiful day Seventy two degrees and sunny so I had my book in one hand and my Bombay Martini and a bowl of nuts at the ready and close to my other hand I was trying to filter out all the sounds of a house being built next to us and occasionally looking up at what was going on The sun was setting behind the house that was next door and behind me and as the sun was setting the light was slowly disappearing from the bottom up leaving only the top part still in sunlight

If I had been looking at the house with the left side of my brain I would have only heard the incessant hammering and then seen the man working at the top of the house that was causing itthats what was Since Im always looking at things as they could be I saw more than just a house with a man working on the top floor I saw the Texture of the Crape Myrtles branches still bare from the Winter The square and rectangular Shapes and the blue Negative Space that defines and creates the Shapes Im always looking for ways to create Visual Tension and placing the man close to the edge of the frame is one of the ways The way the light is only left at the top of the construction is another and the contrast between his bright saturated red shirt against the soft blue sky and clouds is still another These elements of Visual Design and composition are all pieces that make up the finished puzzleanother idiom meaning the final photograph

Visit my website at wwwjoebarabancom and be sure to watch for upcoming workshops listed at the top of this blog Come shoot with me sometime and Ill show you what could be Dont forget to send me a photo and question to AskJoeBgmailcom - JoeB

18

Itrsquos All About the LightBy Kathleen Clemons

ldquoMy first thought is always of lightrdquo ~ Galen Rowell

I got my start in photography shooting sunrises from my front lawn back in 2003 Though my subject and location were limited they taught me much about the qualities of light and how quickly they change A gentle hint from Bryan Peterson (I was taking his online Understanding Exposure class) that there were other things to shoot besides sunrises got me off the lawn and where I am today Here are a couple from that first year

As photographers we need to pay close attention to light- we need to study itrsquos direction temperature quality intensity and how it is affecting our subjects After all as photographers we are painting with light

Sometimes when I am out shooting itrsquos the light that actually becomes my subject Great light on a landscape flower building person anything really can take my breath away At those times itrsquos the light that grabs my attention and makes me want to photograph the subject and often itrsquos nothing I had planned as my subject

I shot these two images from my deck last week as the sun was going down really the last bit of light on the bay I literally ran for my camera both times Within minutes the light was gone but I had my shots

19

Here are a few other images where the light is what caught my eye and really became my subject

Pay close attention to light Watch as it changes Study it See how it can sometimes make a subject glow or stand out how it really draws your eye Watch for backlighting see how side lighting can enhance texture how soft lighting can flatter and how light can become your main subject too

Happy ShootingKathleen

2015 Summer Iceland Photo Tour

Iceland is known for being a photographerrsquos paradise mostly because of the great variety in landscape along with exceptional light During summer time the combination of sunset and sunrise along with the unique landscape is what makes Iceland rare and desirable among photographers

Join William Yu and Iurie Belegurschi to Shoot Iceland June 17- 26 2015 details athttpwilliamyuphotoworkshopscomicelandhtml

20

21

How to be a professional Outdoor and Nature Photographerby Charlie Borland

If you are serious about your Nature Photography then dont miss your last chance this year to take How to be a professional Outdoor and Nature Photographer from Charlie Borland Charlie has made a living at this for a long time and this is a chance to take a 6 week course from him that has a lifetime of content Todays tip is from Charlie where he walks you through a shoot from concept to shooting and then processing

httpswwwyoutubecomwatchv=8oR-I6uZ9Bk

22

Tips to Improve Your Fall Photos Don Smith Photography

Monthly Photo Tip September 2014

This Sunday morning I will be departing for Jackson Hole Wyoming for the start of three consecutive fall workshops The first two will be spent photographing the fabulous fall color of Grand Teton National Park Ill then be off to Moab Utah for my ArchesCanyonlandsMonument Valley Workshop

Simply stated I love this time of year There has already been some snow falling in Wyoming and the leaves have been turning - yes fall is officially here

With that in mind I thought Id share my favorite fall photography tips

The first has to do with light I get asked all the time when is the best time of day to photograph fall color

Well fortunately enough really anytime though Id still say to get out for sunrise and shoot until the sun gets too harsh The same can be said for the other side of the day Fortunately the suns angle has been lowering so we are no longer faced with hard summer light

Under indirect light (dawn dusk and cloudy weather) colors (especially reds and yellows) tend to really pop They are very saturated under this type of light as long as you are using your polarlizer All foliage has a waxy sheen to it and polarizers help reduce that sheen allowing for a more saturated look

When the sun does make an appearance I try to move as much as 90 off-angle and let the light skim That being said my favorite light is backlight Simply place the sun behind the leaves your are photographing and watch the color explode

Another overlooked tip is to look for leaves already on the ground (as I did with these maples above) I try to either juxtapose them with another subject or find some sort of pattern or relationship between the leaves

The color itself is not always predictable as temperature and moisture play a large role in producing fall color As days grow shorter and nights grow longer and cooler biochemical processes in the leaf begin to paint the landscape with Natures autumn palette

Why Is Temperature ImportantA succession of warm sunny days and cool crisp but not freezing nights seems to bring about the most spectacular color displays During these days lots of sugars are produced in the leaf but the cool nights and the gradual closing of veins going into the leaf prevent these sugars from moving out These conditions-lots of sugar and lots of light-spur production of the brilliant anthocyanin pigments which tint reds purples and crimson Because carotenoids are always present in leaves the yellow and gold colors remain fairly constant from year to year

Why Is Moisture ImportantThe amount of moisture in the soil also affects autumn colors Like the weather soil moisture varies greatly from year to year The countless combinations of these two highly variable factors assure that no two autumns can be exactly alike A late spring or a severe summer drought can delay the onset of fall color by a few weeks A warm period during fall will also lower the intensity of autumn colors A warm wet spring favorable summer weather and warm sunny fall days with cool nights should produce the most brilliant autumn colors

Fortunately for us photographers fall offers a palette that is irresistible to our souls So get out this fall with your camera and get some much needed nurturing

A Simplified Method To Workflow Video SeriesLearn to process like a pro This video series has proven extremely popular It contains (26) videos and teaches you in 65 hours what took me 12 years to learn

Please check out Chapter headings and this short introductory video (and enjoy my son Aarons piano composition)

The Crack Zion National Park Utah

Canon 5DMKIII 70mm f16 1 second ISO 100 Singh-Ray Thin LB Polarizer

Lexar Digital Media

23

2014 Photo Workshops 3rd Annual Fall Color and Mountain Grandeur Grand Teton National Park - September 23-27 2014 (WORKSHOP 1 - SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

3rd Annual Fall Color and Mountain Grandeur Grand Teton National Park - September 28-October 2 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

6th Annual Full Moon Over Red Rock Arches and Monument Valley Mittens ArchesCanyonlands National Parks and Full Moonrise at Monument Valley - October 4-8 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

4th Annual Bryce Canyon Hoodoos and ZIon Fall Color Photo Workshop Fall Photography Workshop Bryce Canyon and Zion National Parks - November 1-5 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

2015 Photo Workshops 6th Annual Winter in Big Sur and the Monterey Peninsula - Magic Light Moonlight and Pfeiffer Beach Arch - January 4-7 2015 (4 spots left) 7th Annual Northern Arizona Workshop - Grand Canyon (with crescent moon) Page (Upper Antelope Canyon with light shafts and Horseshoe Bend) and Sedona - March 20-21 2015 (4 spots left) Springtime In Big Sur and the Monterey Peninsula - 7th Annual Wildflowers Full Moon Misty Fog and Headland Color Workshop - March 30 - April 2 2015 (3 spots remain) Don Smith and Gary Hart Spring at Oregons Columbia River Gorge Wildflowers and Waterfalls April 14 - 17 2015 (WORKSHOP SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

Don Smith and Gary Hart Spring at Oregons Columbia River Gorge Wildflowers and Waterfalls April 18 - 21 2015 (WORKSHOP SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY) Kauai Photo Workshop June 19-23 (Sign up before September 1 to receive an Earl-Bird discount of $150 off the full workshop price) (2 spots remain) Don Smith and Gary Hart Grand Canyon Monsoon and Lightning August 10-14 2015 (spots already filling) Private and Small Group Instruction

Page 15: Stockton Camera Club · 2018-09-06 · Stockton Camera Club The Shutter Tripper October2014 Hummer in Silhouette ... Stockton, CA 95202-2706 Phone: 209-464-2299 | Fax: 209-464-9229

Step 11Last but not least we will color the wooden background of the image To give it a it a wood look and feel we give it a HSL value of 31 53 -45 and then add Noise ldquo5rdquo by checking theMonochromatic option

After all this procedures finally you will see the output like this

Color CorrectionWe are done coloring the image Now we proceed to the final and most important part ndash color correction Color correction when done right will give the image its correct mood and make it more realistic

To increase the brightness of the image we go to the following option Image menu -gt Adjustments -gt Curves and add ldquo186rdquo for Output and ldquo164rdquo for Input

Letrsquos brighten up the following section of the image (where arrow in pointed to) First we select the portion with Rectangle Marquee tool Then go to Filter -gt Filter Gallery -gt Distort tab and select Diffuse Glow with the following values Graininess ldquo0rdquo Glow Amount ldquo11rdquo Clear Amount ldquo15rdquo And finally proceed to Image menu -gt Adjustments -gt Curves and add ldquo200rdquo for Ouptut and ldquo188rdquo for Input Follow the above process for the remaining parts of image but with different values inDiffuse Glow Graininess ldquo2rdquo Glow Amount ldquo5rdquo Clear Amount ldquo15rdquo Curvesrsquo not required

To darken the shadows of the hat and the coat letrsquos use the Burn Tool and by selectingRange Midtones and decreasing the Exposure value to ldquo20rdquo apply it on shadows part appropriately

Wersquoll use the Dodge Tool to brighten up the coat and hat so it looks as though the lights are coming in from the right side and to give a sense of thickness for the door borders we use the Burn Tool

And herersquos how your final output will look like (or similar) after some color corrections Editorrsquos note This post is written by Manesh K for Hongkiatcom Manesh is an Animator by profession and owner of Howtouse-photoshopcom where he helps people present their creativity digitally with Photoshop tutorials and useful resources

Herersquos a link to a 7+ minute You Tube tutorial on coloring Black amp White photos in Photoshophttpwwwyoutubecomwatchv=C2Srw245R7U

The Sunny f16 Rule for Digital Exposure By Jim Doty Jr

Part of the Digital Photography Exposure For Dummies Cheat SheetThe sunny f16 rule or Basic Daylight Exposure (BDE for short) tells you that the proper exposure in digital photography for a front lit subject is f16 with a shutter speed of 1ISO (thatrsquos 1 over the ISO in use) According to the sunny f16 rule at ISO 100 BDE would be f16 at 1100 second and at ISO 200 BDE would be f16 at 1200 second

When taking photos on a bright sunny day set the ISO of your camera to 100 the aperture to f16 and the shutter to 1100 second Then go out and take pictures of some front lit subjects As long as your subject isnrsquot white or black the exposures should be great No metering necessary

You can use equivalent exposures (different combinations of apertures shutter speeds and ISO settings that provide exactly the same exposure) for the sunny f16 rule The following table shows the equivalent exposures for the sunny f16 rule at ISO 100

Equivalent Exposures for the Sunny f16 Rule at ISO 100Aperture Shutter Speedf22 150 secondf16 1100 secondf11 1200 secondf8 1400 secondf56 1800 secondf4 11600 secondf28 13200 second

WHAT IS ldquoKEYSTONINGrdquo amp ldquoPINCUSIONrdquo Will be covered in my next article

NATURE PHOTOGRAPHY ndash BASIC DEFINITION

There should be no hand of man in a nature photo unless it relates to the subject The only one that was ever accepted was showing an injured bird that had been taken care of and recovered and was being released into the wild

I wonrsquot be at the October meeting as I will be visiting family in Indiana Have a good meeting

MIKE CLIPKA ndash EDUCATION CHAIRPERSON

16

17

Classes Start Oct 3rdSign Up Now wwwppsopcom

An Idiom For Photographersby Joe Baraban

Before I go any farther let me define the word Idiom An idiom is (1) An expression that cannot be understood from the meanings of its separate words but that has a separate meaning of its own (2) A form of a language that is spoken in a particular area and that uses some of its own words grammar and pronunciations

Here are some common idioms Sunday week for a week from Sunday Give way for retreat and Rock and Roll is a musical idiom The one Ive always thought was especially pertinent to photography and one I mention in my online class with the PPSOP and also in my Stretching Your Frame of Mind workshops I conduct around the planet is Theres more to it than meets the eye

In other words I tell my fellow photographers that theres two ways to look at a subject You can look at it with the left side of your brain the analytical side or the right side of your brain the creative side So many of my students dont look at things as they could be only as they are

Doing that will keep you from taking your photography to what I refer to asup a notch What I mean is that looking with the left side of your brain will only show you what things are Looking at those same things with the right side of your brain can show you what they could be Take the photo above for example

First allow me to digress for a moment I teach photographers how to use the basic elements of Visual Design and composition to create stronger images A complete description can be read by clicking on the link above

Ok so last week I was sitting in my backyard on my deck it was the end of a beautiful day Seventy two degrees and sunny so I had my book in one hand and my Bombay Martini and a bowl of nuts at the ready and close to my other hand I was trying to filter out all the sounds of a house being built next to us and occasionally looking up at what was going on The sun was setting behind the house that was next door and behind me and as the sun was setting the light was slowly disappearing from the bottom up leaving only the top part still in sunlight

If I had been looking at the house with the left side of my brain I would have only heard the incessant hammering and then seen the man working at the top of the house that was causing itthats what was Since Im always looking at things as they could be I saw more than just a house with a man working on the top floor I saw the Texture of the Crape Myrtles branches still bare from the Winter The square and rectangular Shapes and the blue Negative Space that defines and creates the Shapes Im always looking for ways to create Visual Tension and placing the man close to the edge of the frame is one of the ways The way the light is only left at the top of the construction is another and the contrast between his bright saturated red shirt against the soft blue sky and clouds is still another These elements of Visual Design and composition are all pieces that make up the finished puzzleanother idiom meaning the final photograph

Visit my website at wwwjoebarabancom and be sure to watch for upcoming workshops listed at the top of this blog Come shoot with me sometime and Ill show you what could be Dont forget to send me a photo and question to AskJoeBgmailcom - JoeB

18

Itrsquos All About the LightBy Kathleen Clemons

ldquoMy first thought is always of lightrdquo ~ Galen Rowell

I got my start in photography shooting sunrises from my front lawn back in 2003 Though my subject and location were limited they taught me much about the qualities of light and how quickly they change A gentle hint from Bryan Peterson (I was taking his online Understanding Exposure class) that there were other things to shoot besides sunrises got me off the lawn and where I am today Here are a couple from that first year

As photographers we need to pay close attention to light- we need to study itrsquos direction temperature quality intensity and how it is affecting our subjects After all as photographers we are painting with light

Sometimes when I am out shooting itrsquos the light that actually becomes my subject Great light on a landscape flower building person anything really can take my breath away At those times itrsquos the light that grabs my attention and makes me want to photograph the subject and often itrsquos nothing I had planned as my subject

I shot these two images from my deck last week as the sun was going down really the last bit of light on the bay I literally ran for my camera both times Within minutes the light was gone but I had my shots

19

Here are a few other images where the light is what caught my eye and really became my subject

Pay close attention to light Watch as it changes Study it See how it can sometimes make a subject glow or stand out how it really draws your eye Watch for backlighting see how side lighting can enhance texture how soft lighting can flatter and how light can become your main subject too

Happy ShootingKathleen

2015 Summer Iceland Photo Tour

Iceland is known for being a photographerrsquos paradise mostly because of the great variety in landscape along with exceptional light During summer time the combination of sunset and sunrise along with the unique landscape is what makes Iceland rare and desirable among photographers

Join William Yu and Iurie Belegurschi to Shoot Iceland June 17- 26 2015 details athttpwilliamyuphotoworkshopscomicelandhtml

20

21

How to be a professional Outdoor and Nature Photographerby Charlie Borland

If you are serious about your Nature Photography then dont miss your last chance this year to take How to be a professional Outdoor and Nature Photographer from Charlie Borland Charlie has made a living at this for a long time and this is a chance to take a 6 week course from him that has a lifetime of content Todays tip is from Charlie where he walks you through a shoot from concept to shooting and then processing

httpswwwyoutubecomwatchv=8oR-I6uZ9Bk

22

Tips to Improve Your Fall Photos Don Smith Photography

Monthly Photo Tip September 2014

This Sunday morning I will be departing for Jackson Hole Wyoming for the start of three consecutive fall workshops The first two will be spent photographing the fabulous fall color of Grand Teton National Park Ill then be off to Moab Utah for my ArchesCanyonlandsMonument Valley Workshop

Simply stated I love this time of year There has already been some snow falling in Wyoming and the leaves have been turning - yes fall is officially here

With that in mind I thought Id share my favorite fall photography tips

The first has to do with light I get asked all the time when is the best time of day to photograph fall color

Well fortunately enough really anytime though Id still say to get out for sunrise and shoot until the sun gets too harsh The same can be said for the other side of the day Fortunately the suns angle has been lowering so we are no longer faced with hard summer light

Under indirect light (dawn dusk and cloudy weather) colors (especially reds and yellows) tend to really pop They are very saturated under this type of light as long as you are using your polarlizer All foliage has a waxy sheen to it and polarizers help reduce that sheen allowing for a more saturated look

When the sun does make an appearance I try to move as much as 90 off-angle and let the light skim That being said my favorite light is backlight Simply place the sun behind the leaves your are photographing and watch the color explode

Another overlooked tip is to look for leaves already on the ground (as I did with these maples above) I try to either juxtapose them with another subject or find some sort of pattern or relationship between the leaves

The color itself is not always predictable as temperature and moisture play a large role in producing fall color As days grow shorter and nights grow longer and cooler biochemical processes in the leaf begin to paint the landscape with Natures autumn palette

Why Is Temperature ImportantA succession of warm sunny days and cool crisp but not freezing nights seems to bring about the most spectacular color displays During these days lots of sugars are produced in the leaf but the cool nights and the gradual closing of veins going into the leaf prevent these sugars from moving out These conditions-lots of sugar and lots of light-spur production of the brilliant anthocyanin pigments which tint reds purples and crimson Because carotenoids are always present in leaves the yellow and gold colors remain fairly constant from year to year

Why Is Moisture ImportantThe amount of moisture in the soil also affects autumn colors Like the weather soil moisture varies greatly from year to year The countless combinations of these two highly variable factors assure that no two autumns can be exactly alike A late spring or a severe summer drought can delay the onset of fall color by a few weeks A warm period during fall will also lower the intensity of autumn colors A warm wet spring favorable summer weather and warm sunny fall days with cool nights should produce the most brilliant autumn colors

Fortunately for us photographers fall offers a palette that is irresistible to our souls So get out this fall with your camera and get some much needed nurturing

A Simplified Method To Workflow Video SeriesLearn to process like a pro This video series has proven extremely popular It contains (26) videos and teaches you in 65 hours what took me 12 years to learn

Please check out Chapter headings and this short introductory video (and enjoy my son Aarons piano composition)

The Crack Zion National Park Utah

Canon 5DMKIII 70mm f16 1 second ISO 100 Singh-Ray Thin LB Polarizer

Lexar Digital Media

23

2014 Photo Workshops 3rd Annual Fall Color and Mountain Grandeur Grand Teton National Park - September 23-27 2014 (WORKSHOP 1 - SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

3rd Annual Fall Color and Mountain Grandeur Grand Teton National Park - September 28-October 2 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

6th Annual Full Moon Over Red Rock Arches and Monument Valley Mittens ArchesCanyonlands National Parks and Full Moonrise at Monument Valley - October 4-8 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

4th Annual Bryce Canyon Hoodoos and ZIon Fall Color Photo Workshop Fall Photography Workshop Bryce Canyon and Zion National Parks - November 1-5 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

2015 Photo Workshops 6th Annual Winter in Big Sur and the Monterey Peninsula - Magic Light Moonlight and Pfeiffer Beach Arch - January 4-7 2015 (4 spots left) 7th Annual Northern Arizona Workshop - Grand Canyon (with crescent moon) Page (Upper Antelope Canyon with light shafts and Horseshoe Bend) and Sedona - March 20-21 2015 (4 spots left) Springtime In Big Sur and the Monterey Peninsula - 7th Annual Wildflowers Full Moon Misty Fog and Headland Color Workshop - March 30 - April 2 2015 (3 spots remain) Don Smith and Gary Hart Spring at Oregons Columbia River Gorge Wildflowers and Waterfalls April 14 - 17 2015 (WORKSHOP SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

Don Smith and Gary Hart Spring at Oregons Columbia River Gorge Wildflowers and Waterfalls April 18 - 21 2015 (WORKSHOP SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY) Kauai Photo Workshop June 19-23 (Sign up before September 1 to receive an Earl-Bird discount of $150 off the full workshop price) (2 spots remain) Don Smith and Gary Hart Grand Canyon Monsoon and Lightning August 10-14 2015 (spots already filling) Private and Small Group Instruction

Page 16: Stockton Camera Club · 2018-09-06 · Stockton Camera Club The Shutter Tripper October2014 Hummer in Silhouette ... Stockton, CA 95202-2706 Phone: 209-464-2299 | Fax: 209-464-9229

And herersquos how your final output will look like (or similar) after some color corrections Editorrsquos note This post is written by Manesh K for Hongkiatcom Manesh is an Animator by profession and owner of Howtouse-photoshopcom where he helps people present their creativity digitally with Photoshop tutorials and useful resources

Herersquos a link to a 7+ minute You Tube tutorial on coloring Black amp White photos in Photoshophttpwwwyoutubecomwatchv=C2Srw245R7U

The Sunny f16 Rule for Digital Exposure By Jim Doty Jr

Part of the Digital Photography Exposure For Dummies Cheat SheetThe sunny f16 rule or Basic Daylight Exposure (BDE for short) tells you that the proper exposure in digital photography for a front lit subject is f16 with a shutter speed of 1ISO (thatrsquos 1 over the ISO in use) According to the sunny f16 rule at ISO 100 BDE would be f16 at 1100 second and at ISO 200 BDE would be f16 at 1200 second

When taking photos on a bright sunny day set the ISO of your camera to 100 the aperture to f16 and the shutter to 1100 second Then go out and take pictures of some front lit subjects As long as your subject isnrsquot white or black the exposures should be great No metering necessary

You can use equivalent exposures (different combinations of apertures shutter speeds and ISO settings that provide exactly the same exposure) for the sunny f16 rule The following table shows the equivalent exposures for the sunny f16 rule at ISO 100

Equivalent Exposures for the Sunny f16 Rule at ISO 100Aperture Shutter Speedf22 150 secondf16 1100 secondf11 1200 secondf8 1400 secondf56 1800 secondf4 11600 secondf28 13200 second

WHAT IS ldquoKEYSTONINGrdquo amp ldquoPINCUSIONrdquo Will be covered in my next article

NATURE PHOTOGRAPHY ndash BASIC DEFINITION

There should be no hand of man in a nature photo unless it relates to the subject The only one that was ever accepted was showing an injured bird that had been taken care of and recovered and was being released into the wild

I wonrsquot be at the October meeting as I will be visiting family in Indiana Have a good meeting

MIKE CLIPKA ndash EDUCATION CHAIRPERSON

16

17

Classes Start Oct 3rdSign Up Now wwwppsopcom

An Idiom For Photographersby Joe Baraban

Before I go any farther let me define the word Idiom An idiom is (1) An expression that cannot be understood from the meanings of its separate words but that has a separate meaning of its own (2) A form of a language that is spoken in a particular area and that uses some of its own words grammar and pronunciations

Here are some common idioms Sunday week for a week from Sunday Give way for retreat and Rock and Roll is a musical idiom The one Ive always thought was especially pertinent to photography and one I mention in my online class with the PPSOP and also in my Stretching Your Frame of Mind workshops I conduct around the planet is Theres more to it than meets the eye

In other words I tell my fellow photographers that theres two ways to look at a subject You can look at it with the left side of your brain the analytical side or the right side of your brain the creative side So many of my students dont look at things as they could be only as they are

Doing that will keep you from taking your photography to what I refer to asup a notch What I mean is that looking with the left side of your brain will only show you what things are Looking at those same things with the right side of your brain can show you what they could be Take the photo above for example

First allow me to digress for a moment I teach photographers how to use the basic elements of Visual Design and composition to create stronger images A complete description can be read by clicking on the link above

Ok so last week I was sitting in my backyard on my deck it was the end of a beautiful day Seventy two degrees and sunny so I had my book in one hand and my Bombay Martini and a bowl of nuts at the ready and close to my other hand I was trying to filter out all the sounds of a house being built next to us and occasionally looking up at what was going on The sun was setting behind the house that was next door and behind me and as the sun was setting the light was slowly disappearing from the bottom up leaving only the top part still in sunlight

If I had been looking at the house with the left side of my brain I would have only heard the incessant hammering and then seen the man working at the top of the house that was causing itthats what was Since Im always looking at things as they could be I saw more than just a house with a man working on the top floor I saw the Texture of the Crape Myrtles branches still bare from the Winter The square and rectangular Shapes and the blue Negative Space that defines and creates the Shapes Im always looking for ways to create Visual Tension and placing the man close to the edge of the frame is one of the ways The way the light is only left at the top of the construction is another and the contrast between his bright saturated red shirt against the soft blue sky and clouds is still another These elements of Visual Design and composition are all pieces that make up the finished puzzleanother idiom meaning the final photograph

Visit my website at wwwjoebarabancom and be sure to watch for upcoming workshops listed at the top of this blog Come shoot with me sometime and Ill show you what could be Dont forget to send me a photo and question to AskJoeBgmailcom - JoeB

18

Itrsquos All About the LightBy Kathleen Clemons

ldquoMy first thought is always of lightrdquo ~ Galen Rowell

I got my start in photography shooting sunrises from my front lawn back in 2003 Though my subject and location were limited they taught me much about the qualities of light and how quickly they change A gentle hint from Bryan Peterson (I was taking his online Understanding Exposure class) that there were other things to shoot besides sunrises got me off the lawn and where I am today Here are a couple from that first year

As photographers we need to pay close attention to light- we need to study itrsquos direction temperature quality intensity and how it is affecting our subjects After all as photographers we are painting with light

Sometimes when I am out shooting itrsquos the light that actually becomes my subject Great light on a landscape flower building person anything really can take my breath away At those times itrsquos the light that grabs my attention and makes me want to photograph the subject and often itrsquos nothing I had planned as my subject

I shot these two images from my deck last week as the sun was going down really the last bit of light on the bay I literally ran for my camera both times Within minutes the light was gone but I had my shots

19

Here are a few other images where the light is what caught my eye and really became my subject

Pay close attention to light Watch as it changes Study it See how it can sometimes make a subject glow or stand out how it really draws your eye Watch for backlighting see how side lighting can enhance texture how soft lighting can flatter and how light can become your main subject too

Happy ShootingKathleen

2015 Summer Iceland Photo Tour

Iceland is known for being a photographerrsquos paradise mostly because of the great variety in landscape along with exceptional light During summer time the combination of sunset and sunrise along with the unique landscape is what makes Iceland rare and desirable among photographers

Join William Yu and Iurie Belegurschi to Shoot Iceland June 17- 26 2015 details athttpwilliamyuphotoworkshopscomicelandhtml

20

21

How to be a professional Outdoor and Nature Photographerby Charlie Borland

If you are serious about your Nature Photography then dont miss your last chance this year to take How to be a professional Outdoor and Nature Photographer from Charlie Borland Charlie has made a living at this for a long time and this is a chance to take a 6 week course from him that has a lifetime of content Todays tip is from Charlie where he walks you through a shoot from concept to shooting and then processing

httpswwwyoutubecomwatchv=8oR-I6uZ9Bk

22

Tips to Improve Your Fall Photos Don Smith Photography

Monthly Photo Tip September 2014

This Sunday morning I will be departing for Jackson Hole Wyoming for the start of three consecutive fall workshops The first two will be spent photographing the fabulous fall color of Grand Teton National Park Ill then be off to Moab Utah for my ArchesCanyonlandsMonument Valley Workshop

Simply stated I love this time of year There has already been some snow falling in Wyoming and the leaves have been turning - yes fall is officially here

With that in mind I thought Id share my favorite fall photography tips

The first has to do with light I get asked all the time when is the best time of day to photograph fall color

Well fortunately enough really anytime though Id still say to get out for sunrise and shoot until the sun gets too harsh The same can be said for the other side of the day Fortunately the suns angle has been lowering so we are no longer faced with hard summer light

Under indirect light (dawn dusk and cloudy weather) colors (especially reds and yellows) tend to really pop They are very saturated under this type of light as long as you are using your polarlizer All foliage has a waxy sheen to it and polarizers help reduce that sheen allowing for a more saturated look

When the sun does make an appearance I try to move as much as 90 off-angle and let the light skim That being said my favorite light is backlight Simply place the sun behind the leaves your are photographing and watch the color explode

Another overlooked tip is to look for leaves already on the ground (as I did with these maples above) I try to either juxtapose them with another subject or find some sort of pattern or relationship between the leaves

The color itself is not always predictable as temperature and moisture play a large role in producing fall color As days grow shorter and nights grow longer and cooler biochemical processes in the leaf begin to paint the landscape with Natures autumn palette

Why Is Temperature ImportantA succession of warm sunny days and cool crisp but not freezing nights seems to bring about the most spectacular color displays During these days lots of sugars are produced in the leaf but the cool nights and the gradual closing of veins going into the leaf prevent these sugars from moving out These conditions-lots of sugar and lots of light-spur production of the brilliant anthocyanin pigments which tint reds purples and crimson Because carotenoids are always present in leaves the yellow and gold colors remain fairly constant from year to year

Why Is Moisture ImportantThe amount of moisture in the soil also affects autumn colors Like the weather soil moisture varies greatly from year to year The countless combinations of these two highly variable factors assure that no two autumns can be exactly alike A late spring or a severe summer drought can delay the onset of fall color by a few weeks A warm period during fall will also lower the intensity of autumn colors A warm wet spring favorable summer weather and warm sunny fall days with cool nights should produce the most brilliant autumn colors

Fortunately for us photographers fall offers a palette that is irresistible to our souls So get out this fall with your camera and get some much needed nurturing

A Simplified Method To Workflow Video SeriesLearn to process like a pro This video series has proven extremely popular It contains (26) videos and teaches you in 65 hours what took me 12 years to learn

Please check out Chapter headings and this short introductory video (and enjoy my son Aarons piano composition)

The Crack Zion National Park Utah

Canon 5DMKIII 70mm f16 1 second ISO 100 Singh-Ray Thin LB Polarizer

Lexar Digital Media

23

2014 Photo Workshops 3rd Annual Fall Color and Mountain Grandeur Grand Teton National Park - September 23-27 2014 (WORKSHOP 1 - SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

3rd Annual Fall Color and Mountain Grandeur Grand Teton National Park - September 28-October 2 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

6th Annual Full Moon Over Red Rock Arches and Monument Valley Mittens ArchesCanyonlands National Parks and Full Moonrise at Monument Valley - October 4-8 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

4th Annual Bryce Canyon Hoodoos and ZIon Fall Color Photo Workshop Fall Photography Workshop Bryce Canyon and Zion National Parks - November 1-5 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

2015 Photo Workshops 6th Annual Winter in Big Sur and the Monterey Peninsula - Magic Light Moonlight and Pfeiffer Beach Arch - January 4-7 2015 (4 spots left) 7th Annual Northern Arizona Workshop - Grand Canyon (with crescent moon) Page (Upper Antelope Canyon with light shafts and Horseshoe Bend) and Sedona - March 20-21 2015 (4 spots left) Springtime In Big Sur and the Monterey Peninsula - 7th Annual Wildflowers Full Moon Misty Fog and Headland Color Workshop - March 30 - April 2 2015 (3 spots remain) Don Smith and Gary Hart Spring at Oregons Columbia River Gorge Wildflowers and Waterfalls April 14 - 17 2015 (WORKSHOP SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

Don Smith and Gary Hart Spring at Oregons Columbia River Gorge Wildflowers and Waterfalls April 18 - 21 2015 (WORKSHOP SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY) Kauai Photo Workshop June 19-23 (Sign up before September 1 to receive an Earl-Bird discount of $150 off the full workshop price) (2 spots remain) Don Smith and Gary Hart Grand Canyon Monsoon and Lightning August 10-14 2015 (spots already filling) Private and Small Group Instruction

Page 17: Stockton Camera Club · 2018-09-06 · Stockton Camera Club The Shutter Tripper October2014 Hummer in Silhouette ... Stockton, CA 95202-2706 Phone: 209-464-2299 | Fax: 209-464-9229

17

Classes Start Oct 3rdSign Up Now wwwppsopcom

An Idiom For Photographersby Joe Baraban

Before I go any farther let me define the word Idiom An idiom is (1) An expression that cannot be understood from the meanings of its separate words but that has a separate meaning of its own (2) A form of a language that is spoken in a particular area and that uses some of its own words grammar and pronunciations

Here are some common idioms Sunday week for a week from Sunday Give way for retreat and Rock and Roll is a musical idiom The one Ive always thought was especially pertinent to photography and one I mention in my online class with the PPSOP and also in my Stretching Your Frame of Mind workshops I conduct around the planet is Theres more to it than meets the eye

In other words I tell my fellow photographers that theres two ways to look at a subject You can look at it with the left side of your brain the analytical side or the right side of your brain the creative side So many of my students dont look at things as they could be only as they are

Doing that will keep you from taking your photography to what I refer to asup a notch What I mean is that looking with the left side of your brain will only show you what things are Looking at those same things with the right side of your brain can show you what they could be Take the photo above for example

First allow me to digress for a moment I teach photographers how to use the basic elements of Visual Design and composition to create stronger images A complete description can be read by clicking on the link above

Ok so last week I was sitting in my backyard on my deck it was the end of a beautiful day Seventy two degrees and sunny so I had my book in one hand and my Bombay Martini and a bowl of nuts at the ready and close to my other hand I was trying to filter out all the sounds of a house being built next to us and occasionally looking up at what was going on The sun was setting behind the house that was next door and behind me and as the sun was setting the light was slowly disappearing from the bottom up leaving only the top part still in sunlight

If I had been looking at the house with the left side of my brain I would have only heard the incessant hammering and then seen the man working at the top of the house that was causing itthats what was Since Im always looking at things as they could be I saw more than just a house with a man working on the top floor I saw the Texture of the Crape Myrtles branches still bare from the Winter The square and rectangular Shapes and the blue Negative Space that defines and creates the Shapes Im always looking for ways to create Visual Tension and placing the man close to the edge of the frame is one of the ways The way the light is only left at the top of the construction is another and the contrast between his bright saturated red shirt against the soft blue sky and clouds is still another These elements of Visual Design and composition are all pieces that make up the finished puzzleanother idiom meaning the final photograph

Visit my website at wwwjoebarabancom and be sure to watch for upcoming workshops listed at the top of this blog Come shoot with me sometime and Ill show you what could be Dont forget to send me a photo and question to AskJoeBgmailcom - JoeB

18

Itrsquos All About the LightBy Kathleen Clemons

ldquoMy first thought is always of lightrdquo ~ Galen Rowell

I got my start in photography shooting sunrises from my front lawn back in 2003 Though my subject and location were limited they taught me much about the qualities of light and how quickly they change A gentle hint from Bryan Peterson (I was taking his online Understanding Exposure class) that there were other things to shoot besides sunrises got me off the lawn and where I am today Here are a couple from that first year

As photographers we need to pay close attention to light- we need to study itrsquos direction temperature quality intensity and how it is affecting our subjects After all as photographers we are painting with light

Sometimes when I am out shooting itrsquos the light that actually becomes my subject Great light on a landscape flower building person anything really can take my breath away At those times itrsquos the light that grabs my attention and makes me want to photograph the subject and often itrsquos nothing I had planned as my subject

I shot these two images from my deck last week as the sun was going down really the last bit of light on the bay I literally ran for my camera both times Within minutes the light was gone but I had my shots

19

Here are a few other images where the light is what caught my eye and really became my subject

Pay close attention to light Watch as it changes Study it See how it can sometimes make a subject glow or stand out how it really draws your eye Watch for backlighting see how side lighting can enhance texture how soft lighting can flatter and how light can become your main subject too

Happy ShootingKathleen

2015 Summer Iceland Photo Tour

Iceland is known for being a photographerrsquos paradise mostly because of the great variety in landscape along with exceptional light During summer time the combination of sunset and sunrise along with the unique landscape is what makes Iceland rare and desirable among photographers

Join William Yu and Iurie Belegurschi to Shoot Iceland June 17- 26 2015 details athttpwilliamyuphotoworkshopscomicelandhtml

20

21

How to be a professional Outdoor and Nature Photographerby Charlie Borland

If you are serious about your Nature Photography then dont miss your last chance this year to take How to be a professional Outdoor and Nature Photographer from Charlie Borland Charlie has made a living at this for a long time and this is a chance to take a 6 week course from him that has a lifetime of content Todays tip is from Charlie where he walks you through a shoot from concept to shooting and then processing

httpswwwyoutubecomwatchv=8oR-I6uZ9Bk

22

Tips to Improve Your Fall Photos Don Smith Photography

Monthly Photo Tip September 2014

This Sunday morning I will be departing for Jackson Hole Wyoming for the start of three consecutive fall workshops The first two will be spent photographing the fabulous fall color of Grand Teton National Park Ill then be off to Moab Utah for my ArchesCanyonlandsMonument Valley Workshop

Simply stated I love this time of year There has already been some snow falling in Wyoming and the leaves have been turning - yes fall is officially here

With that in mind I thought Id share my favorite fall photography tips

The first has to do with light I get asked all the time when is the best time of day to photograph fall color

Well fortunately enough really anytime though Id still say to get out for sunrise and shoot until the sun gets too harsh The same can be said for the other side of the day Fortunately the suns angle has been lowering so we are no longer faced with hard summer light

Under indirect light (dawn dusk and cloudy weather) colors (especially reds and yellows) tend to really pop They are very saturated under this type of light as long as you are using your polarlizer All foliage has a waxy sheen to it and polarizers help reduce that sheen allowing for a more saturated look

When the sun does make an appearance I try to move as much as 90 off-angle and let the light skim That being said my favorite light is backlight Simply place the sun behind the leaves your are photographing and watch the color explode

Another overlooked tip is to look for leaves already on the ground (as I did with these maples above) I try to either juxtapose them with another subject or find some sort of pattern or relationship between the leaves

The color itself is not always predictable as temperature and moisture play a large role in producing fall color As days grow shorter and nights grow longer and cooler biochemical processes in the leaf begin to paint the landscape with Natures autumn palette

Why Is Temperature ImportantA succession of warm sunny days and cool crisp but not freezing nights seems to bring about the most spectacular color displays During these days lots of sugars are produced in the leaf but the cool nights and the gradual closing of veins going into the leaf prevent these sugars from moving out These conditions-lots of sugar and lots of light-spur production of the brilliant anthocyanin pigments which tint reds purples and crimson Because carotenoids are always present in leaves the yellow and gold colors remain fairly constant from year to year

Why Is Moisture ImportantThe amount of moisture in the soil also affects autumn colors Like the weather soil moisture varies greatly from year to year The countless combinations of these two highly variable factors assure that no two autumns can be exactly alike A late spring or a severe summer drought can delay the onset of fall color by a few weeks A warm period during fall will also lower the intensity of autumn colors A warm wet spring favorable summer weather and warm sunny fall days with cool nights should produce the most brilliant autumn colors

Fortunately for us photographers fall offers a palette that is irresistible to our souls So get out this fall with your camera and get some much needed nurturing

A Simplified Method To Workflow Video SeriesLearn to process like a pro This video series has proven extremely popular It contains (26) videos and teaches you in 65 hours what took me 12 years to learn

Please check out Chapter headings and this short introductory video (and enjoy my son Aarons piano composition)

The Crack Zion National Park Utah

Canon 5DMKIII 70mm f16 1 second ISO 100 Singh-Ray Thin LB Polarizer

Lexar Digital Media

23

2014 Photo Workshops 3rd Annual Fall Color and Mountain Grandeur Grand Teton National Park - September 23-27 2014 (WORKSHOP 1 - SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

3rd Annual Fall Color and Mountain Grandeur Grand Teton National Park - September 28-October 2 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

6th Annual Full Moon Over Red Rock Arches and Monument Valley Mittens ArchesCanyonlands National Parks and Full Moonrise at Monument Valley - October 4-8 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

4th Annual Bryce Canyon Hoodoos and ZIon Fall Color Photo Workshop Fall Photography Workshop Bryce Canyon and Zion National Parks - November 1-5 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

2015 Photo Workshops 6th Annual Winter in Big Sur and the Monterey Peninsula - Magic Light Moonlight and Pfeiffer Beach Arch - January 4-7 2015 (4 spots left) 7th Annual Northern Arizona Workshop - Grand Canyon (with crescent moon) Page (Upper Antelope Canyon with light shafts and Horseshoe Bend) and Sedona - March 20-21 2015 (4 spots left) Springtime In Big Sur and the Monterey Peninsula - 7th Annual Wildflowers Full Moon Misty Fog and Headland Color Workshop - March 30 - April 2 2015 (3 spots remain) Don Smith and Gary Hart Spring at Oregons Columbia River Gorge Wildflowers and Waterfalls April 14 - 17 2015 (WORKSHOP SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

Don Smith and Gary Hart Spring at Oregons Columbia River Gorge Wildflowers and Waterfalls April 18 - 21 2015 (WORKSHOP SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY) Kauai Photo Workshop June 19-23 (Sign up before September 1 to receive an Earl-Bird discount of $150 off the full workshop price) (2 spots remain) Don Smith and Gary Hart Grand Canyon Monsoon and Lightning August 10-14 2015 (spots already filling) Private and Small Group Instruction

Page 18: Stockton Camera Club · 2018-09-06 · Stockton Camera Club The Shutter Tripper October2014 Hummer in Silhouette ... Stockton, CA 95202-2706 Phone: 209-464-2299 | Fax: 209-464-9229

18

Itrsquos All About the LightBy Kathleen Clemons

ldquoMy first thought is always of lightrdquo ~ Galen Rowell

I got my start in photography shooting sunrises from my front lawn back in 2003 Though my subject and location were limited they taught me much about the qualities of light and how quickly they change A gentle hint from Bryan Peterson (I was taking his online Understanding Exposure class) that there were other things to shoot besides sunrises got me off the lawn and where I am today Here are a couple from that first year

As photographers we need to pay close attention to light- we need to study itrsquos direction temperature quality intensity and how it is affecting our subjects After all as photographers we are painting with light

Sometimes when I am out shooting itrsquos the light that actually becomes my subject Great light on a landscape flower building person anything really can take my breath away At those times itrsquos the light that grabs my attention and makes me want to photograph the subject and often itrsquos nothing I had planned as my subject

I shot these two images from my deck last week as the sun was going down really the last bit of light on the bay I literally ran for my camera both times Within minutes the light was gone but I had my shots

19

Here are a few other images where the light is what caught my eye and really became my subject

Pay close attention to light Watch as it changes Study it See how it can sometimes make a subject glow or stand out how it really draws your eye Watch for backlighting see how side lighting can enhance texture how soft lighting can flatter and how light can become your main subject too

Happy ShootingKathleen

2015 Summer Iceland Photo Tour

Iceland is known for being a photographerrsquos paradise mostly because of the great variety in landscape along with exceptional light During summer time the combination of sunset and sunrise along with the unique landscape is what makes Iceland rare and desirable among photographers

Join William Yu and Iurie Belegurschi to Shoot Iceland June 17- 26 2015 details athttpwilliamyuphotoworkshopscomicelandhtml

20

21

How to be a professional Outdoor and Nature Photographerby Charlie Borland

If you are serious about your Nature Photography then dont miss your last chance this year to take How to be a professional Outdoor and Nature Photographer from Charlie Borland Charlie has made a living at this for a long time and this is a chance to take a 6 week course from him that has a lifetime of content Todays tip is from Charlie where he walks you through a shoot from concept to shooting and then processing

httpswwwyoutubecomwatchv=8oR-I6uZ9Bk

22

Tips to Improve Your Fall Photos Don Smith Photography

Monthly Photo Tip September 2014

This Sunday morning I will be departing for Jackson Hole Wyoming for the start of three consecutive fall workshops The first two will be spent photographing the fabulous fall color of Grand Teton National Park Ill then be off to Moab Utah for my ArchesCanyonlandsMonument Valley Workshop

Simply stated I love this time of year There has already been some snow falling in Wyoming and the leaves have been turning - yes fall is officially here

With that in mind I thought Id share my favorite fall photography tips

The first has to do with light I get asked all the time when is the best time of day to photograph fall color

Well fortunately enough really anytime though Id still say to get out for sunrise and shoot until the sun gets too harsh The same can be said for the other side of the day Fortunately the suns angle has been lowering so we are no longer faced with hard summer light

Under indirect light (dawn dusk and cloudy weather) colors (especially reds and yellows) tend to really pop They are very saturated under this type of light as long as you are using your polarlizer All foliage has a waxy sheen to it and polarizers help reduce that sheen allowing for a more saturated look

When the sun does make an appearance I try to move as much as 90 off-angle and let the light skim That being said my favorite light is backlight Simply place the sun behind the leaves your are photographing and watch the color explode

Another overlooked tip is to look for leaves already on the ground (as I did with these maples above) I try to either juxtapose them with another subject or find some sort of pattern or relationship between the leaves

The color itself is not always predictable as temperature and moisture play a large role in producing fall color As days grow shorter and nights grow longer and cooler biochemical processes in the leaf begin to paint the landscape with Natures autumn palette

Why Is Temperature ImportantA succession of warm sunny days and cool crisp but not freezing nights seems to bring about the most spectacular color displays During these days lots of sugars are produced in the leaf but the cool nights and the gradual closing of veins going into the leaf prevent these sugars from moving out These conditions-lots of sugar and lots of light-spur production of the brilliant anthocyanin pigments which tint reds purples and crimson Because carotenoids are always present in leaves the yellow and gold colors remain fairly constant from year to year

Why Is Moisture ImportantThe amount of moisture in the soil also affects autumn colors Like the weather soil moisture varies greatly from year to year The countless combinations of these two highly variable factors assure that no two autumns can be exactly alike A late spring or a severe summer drought can delay the onset of fall color by a few weeks A warm period during fall will also lower the intensity of autumn colors A warm wet spring favorable summer weather and warm sunny fall days with cool nights should produce the most brilliant autumn colors

Fortunately for us photographers fall offers a palette that is irresistible to our souls So get out this fall with your camera and get some much needed nurturing

A Simplified Method To Workflow Video SeriesLearn to process like a pro This video series has proven extremely popular It contains (26) videos and teaches you in 65 hours what took me 12 years to learn

Please check out Chapter headings and this short introductory video (and enjoy my son Aarons piano composition)

The Crack Zion National Park Utah

Canon 5DMKIII 70mm f16 1 second ISO 100 Singh-Ray Thin LB Polarizer

Lexar Digital Media

23

2014 Photo Workshops 3rd Annual Fall Color and Mountain Grandeur Grand Teton National Park - September 23-27 2014 (WORKSHOP 1 - SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

3rd Annual Fall Color and Mountain Grandeur Grand Teton National Park - September 28-October 2 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

6th Annual Full Moon Over Red Rock Arches and Monument Valley Mittens ArchesCanyonlands National Parks and Full Moonrise at Monument Valley - October 4-8 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

4th Annual Bryce Canyon Hoodoos and ZIon Fall Color Photo Workshop Fall Photography Workshop Bryce Canyon and Zion National Parks - November 1-5 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

2015 Photo Workshops 6th Annual Winter in Big Sur and the Monterey Peninsula - Magic Light Moonlight and Pfeiffer Beach Arch - January 4-7 2015 (4 spots left) 7th Annual Northern Arizona Workshop - Grand Canyon (with crescent moon) Page (Upper Antelope Canyon with light shafts and Horseshoe Bend) and Sedona - March 20-21 2015 (4 spots left) Springtime In Big Sur and the Monterey Peninsula - 7th Annual Wildflowers Full Moon Misty Fog and Headland Color Workshop - March 30 - April 2 2015 (3 spots remain) Don Smith and Gary Hart Spring at Oregons Columbia River Gorge Wildflowers and Waterfalls April 14 - 17 2015 (WORKSHOP SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

Don Smith and Gary Hart Spring at Oregons Columbia River Gorge Wildflowers and Waterfalls April 18 - 21 2015 (WORKSHOP SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY) Kauai Photo Workshop June 19-23 (Sign up before September 1 to receive an Earl-Bird discount of $150 off the full workshop price) (2 spots remain) Don Smith and Gary Hart Grand Canyon Monsoon and Lightning August 10-14 2015 (spots already filling) Private and Small Group Instruction

Page 19: Stockton Camera Club · 2018-09-06 · Stockton Camera Club The Shutter Tripper October2014 Hummer in Silhouette ... Stockton, CA 95202-2706 Phone: 209-464-2299 | Fax: 209-464-9229

19

Here are a few other images where the light is what caught my eye and really became my subject

Pay close attention to light Watch as it changes Study it See how it can sometimes make a subject glow or stand out how it really draws your eye Watch for backlighting see how side lighting can enhance texture how soft lighting can flatter and how light can become your main subject too

Happy ShootingKathleen

2015 Summer Iceland Photo Tour

Iceland is known for being a photographerrsquos paradise mostly because of the great variety in landscape along with exceptional light During summer time the combination of sunset and sunrise along with the unique landscape is what makes Iceland rare and desirable among photographers

Join William Yu and Iurie Belegurschi to Shoot Iceland June 17- 26 2015 details athttpwilliamyuphotoworkshopscomicelandhtml

20

21

How to be a professional Outdoor and Nature Photographerby Charlie Borland

If you are serious about your Nature Photography then dont miss your last chance this year to take How to be a professional Outdoor and Nature Photographer from Charlie Borland Charlie has made a living at this for a long time and this is a chance to take a 6 week course from him that has a lifetime of content Todays tip is from Charlie where he walks you through a shoot from concept to shooting and then processing

httpswwwyoutubecomwatchv=8oR-I6uZ9Bk

22

Tips to Improve Your Fall Photos Don Smith Photography

Monthly Photo Tip September 2014

This Sunday morning I will be departing for Jackson Hole Wyoming for the start of three consecutive fall workshops The first two will be spent photographing the fabulous fall color of Grand Teton National Park Ill then be off to Moab Utah for my ArchesCanyonlandsMonument Valley Workshop

Simply stated I love this time of year There has already been some snow falling in Wyoming and the leaves have been turning - yes fall is officially here

With that in mind I thought Id share my favorite fall photography tips

The first has to do with light I get asked all the time when is the best time of day to photograph fall color

Well fortunately enough really anytime though Id still say to get out for sunrise and shoot until the sun gets too harsh The same can be said for the other side of the day Fortunately the suns angle has been lowering so we are no longer faced with hard summer light

Under indirect light (dawn dusk and cloudy weather) colors (especially reds and yellows) tend to really pop They are very saturated under this type of light as long as you are using your polarlizer All foliage has a waxy sheen to it and polarizers help reduce that sheen allowing for a more saturated look

When the sun does make an appearance I try to move as much as 90 off-angle and let the light skim That being said my favorite light is backlight Simply place the sun behind the leaves your are photographing and watch the color explode

Another overlooked tip is to look for leaves already on the ground (as I did with these maples above) I try to either juxtapose them with another subject or find some sort of pattern or relationship between the leaves

The color itself is not always predictable as temperature and moisture play a large role in producing fall color As days grow shorter and nights grow longer and cooler biochemical processes in the leaf begin to paint the landscape with Natures autumn palette

Why Is Temperature ImportantA succession of warm sunny days and cool crisp but not freezing nights seems to bring about the most spectacular color displays During these days lots of sugars are produced in the leaf but the cool nights and the gradual closing of veins going into the leaf prevent these sugars from moving out These conditions-lots of sugar and lots of light-spur production of the brilliant anthocyanin pigments which tint reds purples and crimson Because carotenoids are always present in leaves the yellow and gold colors remain fairly constant from year to year

Why Is Moisture ImportantThe amount of moisture in the soil also affects autumn colors Like the weather soil moisture varies greatly from year to year The countless combinations of these two highly variable factors assure that no two autumns can be exactly alike A late spring or a severe summer drought can delay the onset of fall color by a few weeks A warm period during fall will also lower the intensity of autumn colors A warm wet spring favorable summer weather and warm sunny fall days with cool nights should produce the most brilliant autumn colors

Fortunately for us photographers fall offers a palette that is irresistible to our souls So get out this fall with your camera and get some much needed nurturing

A Simplified Method To Workflow Video SeriesLearn to process like a pro This video series has proven extremely popular It contains (26) videos and teaches you in 65 hours what took me 12 years to learn

Please check out Chapter headings and this short introductory video (and enjoy my son Aarons piano composition)

The Crack Zion National Park Utah

Canon 5DMKIII 70mm f16 1 second ISO 100 Singh-Ray Thin LB Polarizer

Lexar Digital Media

23

2014 Photo Workshops 3rd Annual Fall Color and Mountain Grandeur Grand Teton National Park - September 23-27 2014 (WORKSHOP 1 - SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

3rd Annual Fall Color and Mountain Grandeur Grand Teton National Park - September 28-October 2 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

6th Annual Full Moon Over Red Rock Arches and Monument Valley Mittens ArchesCanyonlands National Parks and Full Moonrise at Monument Valley - October 4-8 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

4th Annual Bryce Canyon Hoodoos and ZIon Fall Color Photo Workshop Fall Photography Workshop Bryce Canyon and Zion National Parks - November 1-5 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

2015 Photo Workshops 6th Annual Winter in Big Sur and the Monterey Peninsula - Magic Light Moonlight and Pfeiffer Beach Arch - January 4-7 2015 (4 spots left) 7th Annual Northern Arizona Workshop - Grand Canyon (with crescent moon) Page (Upper Antelope Canyon with light shafts and Horseshoe Bend) and Sedona - March 20-21 2015 (4 spots left) Springtime In Big Sur and the Monterey Peninsula - 7th Annual Wildflowers Full Moon Misty Fog and Headland Color Workshop - March 30 - April 2 2015 (3 spots remain) Don Smith and Gary Hart Spring at Oregons Columbia River Gorge Wildflowers and Waterfalls April 14 - 17 2015 (WORKSHOP SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

Don Smith and Gary Hart Spring at Oregons Columbia River Gorge Wildflowers and Waterfalls April 18 - 21 2015 (WORKSHOP SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY) Kauai Photo Workshop June 19-23 (Sign up before September 1 to receive an Earl-Bird discount of $150 off the full workshop price) (2 spots remain) Don Smith and Gary Hart Grand Canyon Monsoon and Lightning August 10-14 2015 (spots already filling) Private and Small Group Instruction

Page 20: Stockton Camera Club · 2018-09-06 · Stockton Camera Club The Shutter Tripper October2014 Hummer in Silhouette ... Stockton, CA 95202-2706 Phone: 209-464-2299 | Fax: 209-464-9229

Pay close attention to light Watch as it changes Study it See how it can sometimes make a subject glow or stand out how it really draws your eye Watch for backlighting see how side lighting can enhance texture how soft lighting can flatter and how light can become your main subject too

Happy ShootingKathleen

2015 Summer Iceland Photo Tour

Iceland is known for being a photographerrsquos paradise mostly because of the great variety in landscape along with exceptional light During summer time the combination of sunset and sunrise along with the unique landscape is what makes Iceland rare and desirable among photographers

Join William Yu and Iurie Belegurschi to Shoot Iceland June 17- 26 2015 details athttpwilliamyuphotoworkshopscomicelandhtml

20

21

How to be a professional Outdoor and Nature Photographerby Charlie Borland

If you are serious about your Nature Photography then dont miss your last chance this year to take How to be a professional Outdoor and Nature Photographer from Charlie Borland Charlie has made a living at this for a long time and this is a chance to take a 6 week course from him that has a lifetime of content Todays tip is from Charlie where he walks you through a shoot from concept to shooting and then processing

httpswwwyoutubecomwatchv=8oR-I6uZ9Bk

22

Tips to Improve Your Fall Photos Don Smith Photography

Monthly Photo Tip September 2014

This Sunday morning I will be departing for Jackson Hole Wyoming for the start of three consecutive fall workshops The first two will be spent photographing the fabulous fall color of Grand Teton National Park Ill then be off to Moab Utah for my ArchesCanyonlandsMonument Valley Workshop

Simply stated I love this time of year There has already been some snow falling in Wyoming and the leaves have been turning - yes fall is officially here

With that in mind I thought Id share my favorite fall photography tips

The first has to do with light I get asked all the time when is the best time of day to photograph fall color

Well fortunately enough really anytime though Id still say to get out for sunrise and shoot until the sun gets too harsh The same can be said for the other side of the day Fortunately the suns angle has been lowering so we are no longer faced with hard summer light

Under indirect light (dawn dusk and cloudy weather) colors (especially reds and yellows) tend to really pop They are very saturated under this type of light as long as you are using your polarlizer All foliage has a waxy sheen to it and polarizers help reduce that sheen allowing for a more saturated look

When the sun does make an appearance I try to move as much as 90 off-angle and let the light skim That being said my favorite light is backlight Simply place the sun behind the leaves your are photographing and watch the color explode

Another overlooked tip is to look for leaves already on the ground (as I did with these maples above) I try to either juxtapose them with another subject or find some sort of pattern or relationship between the leaves

The color itself is not always predictable as temperature and moisture play a large role in producing fall color As days grow shorter and nights grow longer and cooler biochemical processes in the leaf begin to paint the landscape with Natures autumn palette

Why Is Temperature ImportantA succession of warm sunny days and cool crisp but not freezing nights seems to bring about the most spectacular color displays During these days lots of sugars are produced in the leaf but the cool nights and the gradual closing of veins going into the leaf prevent these sugars from moving out These conditions-lots of sugar and lots of light-spur production of the brilliant anthocyanin pigments which tint reds purples and crimson Because carotenoids are always present in leaves the yellow and gold colors remain fairly constant from year to year

Why Is Moisture ImportantThe amount of moisture in the soil also affects autumn colors Like the weather soil moisture varies greatly from year to year The countless combinations of these two highly variable factors assure that no two autumns can be exactly alike A late spring or a severe summer drought can delay the onset of fall color by a few weeks A warm period during fall will also lower the intensity of autumn colors A warm wet spring favorable summer weather and warm sunny fall days with cool nights should produce the most brilliant autumn colors

Fortunately for us photographers fall offers a palette that is irresistible to our souls So get out this fall with your camera and get some much needed nurturing

A Simplified Method To Workflow Video SeriesLearn to process like a pro This video series has proven extremely popular It contains (26) videos and teaches you in 65 hours what took me 12 years to learn

Please check out Chapter headings and this short introductory video (and enjoy my son Aarons piano composition)

The Crack Zion National Park Utah

Canon 5DMKIII 70mm f16 1 second ISO 100 Singh-Ray Thin LB Polarizer

Lexar Digital Media

23

2014 Photo Workshops 3rd Annual Fall Color and Mountain Grandeur Grand Teton National Park - September 23-27 2014 (WORKSHOP 1 - SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

3rd Annual Fall Color and Mountain Grandeur Grand Teton National Park - September 28-October 2 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

6th Annual Full Moon Over Red Rock Arches and Monument Valley Mittens ArchesCanyonlands National Parks and Full Moonrise at Monument Valley - October 4-8 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

4th Annual Bryce Canyon Hoodoos and ZIon Fall Color Photo Workshop Fall Photography Workshop Bryce Canyon and Zion National Parks - November 1-5 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

2015 Photo Workshops 6th Annual Winter in Big Sur and the Monterey Peninsula - Magic Light Moonlight and Pfeiffer Beach Arch - January 4-7 2015 (4 spots left) 7th Annual Northern Arizona Workshop - Grand Canyon (with crescent moon) Page (Upper Antelope Canyon with light shafts and Horseshoe Bend) and Sedona - March 20-21 2015 (4 spots left) Springtime In Big Sur and the Monterey Peninsula - 7th Annual Wildflowers Full Moon Misty Fog and Headland Color Workshop - March 30 - April 2 2015 (3 spots remain) Don Smith and Gary Hart Spring at Oregons Columbia River Gorge Wildflowers and Waterfalls April 14 - 17 2015 (WORKSHOP SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

Don Smith and Gary Hart Spring at Oregons Columbia River Gorge Wildflowers and Waterfalls April 18 - 21 2015 (WORKSHOP SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY) Kauai Photo Workshop June 19-23 (Sign up before September 1 to receive an Earl-Bird discount of $150 off the full workshop price) (2 spots remain) Don Smith and Gary Hart Grand Canyon Monsoon and Lightning August 10-14 2015 (spots already filling) Private and Small Group Instruction

Page 21: Stockton Camera Club · 2018-09-06 · Stockton Camera Club The Shutter Tripper October2014 Hummer in Silhouette ... Stockton, CA 95202-2706 Phone: 209-464-2299 | Fax: 209-464-9229

21

How to be a professional Outdoor and Nature Photographerby Charlie Borland

If you are serious about your Nature Photography then dont miss your last chance this year to take How to be a professional Outdoor and Nature Photographer from Charlie Borland Charlie has made a living at this for a long time and this is a chance to take a 6 week course from him that has a lifetime of content Todays tip is from Charlie where he walks you through a shoot from concept to shooting and then processing

httpswwwyoutubecomwatchv=8oR-I6uZ9Bk

22

Tips to Improve Your Fall Photos Don Smith Photography

Monthly Photo Tip September 2014

This Sunday morning I will be departing for Jackson Hole Wyoming for the start of three consecutive fall workshops The first two will be spent photographing the fabulous fall color of Grand Teton National Park Ill then be off to Moab Utah for my ArchesCanyonlandsMonument Valley Workshop

Simply stated I love this time of year There has already been some snow falling in Wyoming and the leaves have been turning - yes fall is officially here

With that in mind I thought Id share my favorite fall photography tips

The first has to do with light I get asked all the time when is the best time of day to photograph fall color

Well fortunately enough really anytime though Id still say to get out for sunrise and shoot until the sun gets too harsh The same can be said for the other side of the day Fortunately the suns angle has been lowering so we are no longer faced with hard summer light

Under indirect light (dawn dusk and cloudy weather) colors (especially reds and yellows) tend to really pop They are very saturated under this type of light as long as you are using your polarlizer All foliage has a waxy sheen to it and polarizers help reduce that sheen allowing for a more saturated look

When the sun does make an appearance I try to move as much as 90 off-angle and let the light skim That being said my favorite light is backlight Simply place the sun behind the leaves your are photographing and watch the color explode

Another overlooked tip is to look for leaves already on the ground (as I did with these maples above) I try to either juxtapose them with another subject or find some sort of pattern or relationship between the leaves

The color itself is not always predictable as temperature and moisture play a large role in producing fall color As days grow shorter and nights grow longer and cooler biochemical processes in the leaf begin to paint the landscape with Natures autumn palette

Why Is Temperature ImportantA succession of warm sunny days and cool crisp but not freezing nights seems to bring about the most spectacular color displays During these days lots of sugars are produced in the leaf but the cool nights and the gradual closing of veins going into the leaf prevent these sugars from moving out These conditions-lots of sugar and lots of light-spur production of the brilliant anthocyanin pigments which tint reds purples and crimson Because carotenoids are always present in leaves the yellow and gold colors remain fairly constant from year to year

Why Is Moisture ImportantThe amount of moisture in the soil also affects autumn colors Like the weather soil moisture varies greatly from year to year The countless combinations of these two highly variable factors assure that no two autumns can be exactly alike A late spring or a severe summer drought can delay the onset of fall color by a few weeks A warm period during fall will also lower the intensity of autumn colors A warm wet spring favorable summer weather and warm sunny fall days with cool nights should produce the most brilliant autumn colors

Fortunately for us photographers fall offers a palette that is irresistible to our souls So get out this fall with your camera and get some much needed nurturing

A Simplified Method To Workflow Video SeriesLearn to process like a pro This video series has proven extremely popular It contains (26) videos and teaches you in 65 hours what took me 12 years to learn

Please check out Chapter headings and this short introductory video (and enjoy my son Aarons piano composition)

The Crack Zion National Park Utah

Canon 5DMKIII 70mm f16 1 second ISO 100 Singh-Ray Thin LB Polarizer

Lexar Digital Media

23

2014 Photo Workshops 3rd Annual Fall Color and Mountain Grandeur Grand Teton National Park - September 23-27 2014 (WORKSHOP 1 - SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

3rd Annual Fall Color and Mountain Grandeur Grand Teton National Park - September 28-October 2 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

6th Annual Full Moon Over Red Rock Arches and Monument Valley Mittens ArchesCanyonlands National Parks and Full Moonrise at Monument Valley - October 4-8 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

4th Annual Bryce Canyon Hoodoos and ZIon Fall Color Photo Workshop Fall Photography Workshop Bryce Canyon and Zion National Parks - November 1-5 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

2015 Photo Workshops 6th Annual Winter in Big Sur and the Monterey Peninsula - Magic Light Moonlight and Pfeiffer Beach Arch - January 4-7 2015 (4 spots left) 7th Annual Northern Arizona Workshop - Grand Canyon (with crescent moon) Page (Upper Antelope Canyon with light shafts and Horseshoe Bend) and Sedona - March 20-21 2015 (4 spots left) Springtime In Big Sur and the Monterey Peninsula - 7th Annual Wildflowers Full Moon Misty Fog and Headland Color Workshop - March 30 - April 2 2015 (3 spots remain) Don Smith and Gary Hart Spring at Oregons Columbia River Gorge Wildflowers and Waterfalls April 14 - 17 2015 (WORKSHOP SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

Don Smith and Gary Hart Spring at Oregons Columbia River Gorge Wildflowers and Waterfalls April 18 - 21 2015 (WORKSHOP SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY) Kauai Photo Workshop June 19-23 (Sign up before September 1 to receive an Earl-Bird discount of $150 off the full workshop price) (2 spots remain) Don Smith and Gary Hart Grand Canyon Monsoon and Lightning August 10-14 2015 (spots already filling) Private and Small Group Instruction

Page 22: Stockton Camera Club · 2018-09-06 · Stockton Camera Club The Shutter Tripper October2014 Hummer in Silhouette ... Stockton, CA 95202-2706 Phone: 209-464-2299 | Fax: 209-464-9229

22

Tips to Improve Your Fall Photos Don Smith Photography

Monthly Photo Tip September 2014

This Sunday morning I will be departing for Jackson Hole Wyoming for the start of three consecutive fall workshops The first two will be spent photographing the fabulous fall color of Grand Teton National Park Ill then be off to Moab Utah for my ArchesCanyonlandsMonument Valley Workshop

Simply stated I love this time of year There has already been some snow falling in Wyoming and the leaves have been turning - yes fall is officially here

With that in mind I thought Id share my favorite fall photography tips

The first has to do with light I get asked all the time when is the best time of day to photograph fall color

Well fortunately enough really anytime though Id still say to get out for sunrise and shoot until the sun gets too harsh The same can be said for the other side of the day Fortunately the suns angle has been lowering so we are no longer faced with hard summer light

Under indirect light (dawn dusk and cloudy weather) colors (especially reds and yellows) tend to really pop They are very saturated under this type of light as long as you are using your polarlizer All foliage has a waxy sheen to it and polarizers help reduce that sheen allowing for a more saturated look

When the sun does make an appearance I try to move as much as 90 off-angle and let the light skim That being said my favorite light is backlight Simply place the sun behind the leaves your are photographing and watch the color explode

Another overlooked tip is to look for leaves already on the ground (as I did with these maples above) I try to either juxtapose them with another subject or find some sort of pattern or relationship between the leaves

The color itself is not always predictable as temperature and moisture play a large role in producing fall color As days grow shorter and nights grow longer and cooler biochemical processes in the leaf begin to paint the landscape with Natures autumn palette

Why Is Temperature ImportantA succession of warm sunny days and cool crisp but not freezing nights seems to bring about the most spectacular color displays During these days lots of sugars are produced in the leaf but the cool nights and the gradual closing of veins going into the leaf prevent these sugars from moving out These conditions-lots of sugar and lots of light-spur production of the brilliant anthocyanin pigments which tint reds purples and crimson Because carotenoids are always present in leaves the yellow and gold colors remain fairly constant from year to year

Why Is Moisture ImportantThe amount of moisture in the soil also affects autumn colors Like the weather soil moisture varies greatly from year to year The countless combinations of these two highly variable factors assure that no two autumns can be exactly alike A late spring or a severe summer drought can delay the onset of fall color by a few weeks A warm period during fall will also lower the intensity of autumn colors A warm wet spring favorable summer weather and warm sunny fall days with cool nights should produce the most brilliant autumn colors

Fortunately for us photographers fall offers a palette that is irresistible to our souls So get out this fall with your camera and get some much needed nurturing

A Simplified Method To Workflow Video SeriesLearn to process like a pro This video series has proven extremely popular It contains (26) videos and teaches you in 65 hours what took me 12 years to learn

Please check out Chapter headings and this short introductory video (and enjoy my son Aarons piano composition)

The Crack Zion National Park Utah

Canon 5DMKIII 70mm f16 1 second ISO 100 Singh-Ray Thin LB Polarizer

Lexar Digital Media

23

2014 Photo Workshops 3rd Annual Fall Color and Mountain Grandeur Grand Teton National Park - September 23-27 2014 (WORKSHOP 1 - SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

3rd Annual Fall Color and Mountain Grandeur Grand Teton National Park - September 28-October 2 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

6th Annual Full Moon Over Red Rock Arches and Monument Valley Mittens ArchesCanyonlands National Parks and Full Moonrise at Monument Valley - October 4-8 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

4th Annual Bryce Canyon Hoodoos and ZIon Fall Color Photo Workshop Fall Photography Workshop Bryce Canyon and Zion National Parks - November 1-5 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

2015 Photo Workshops 6th Annual Winter in Big Sur and the Monterey Peninsula - Magic Light Moonlight and Pfeiffer Beach Arch - January 4-7 2015 (4 spots left) 7th Annual Northern Arizona Workshop - Grand Canyon (with crescent moon) Page (Upper Antelope Canyon with light shafts and Horseshoe Bend) and Sedona - March 20-21 2015 (4 spots left) Springtime In Big Sur and the Monterey Peninsula - 7th Annual Wildflowers Full Moon Misty Fog and Headland Color Workshop - March 30 - April 2 2015 (3 spots remain) Don Smith and Gary Hart Spring at Oregons Columbia River Gorge Wildflowers and Waterfalls April 14 - 17 2015 (WORKSHOP SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

Don Smith and Gary Hart Spring at Oregons Columbia River Gorge Wildflowers and Waterfalls April 18 - 21 2015 (WORKSHOP SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY) Kauai Photo Workshop June 19-23 (Sign up before September 1 to receive an Earl-Bird discount of $150 off the full workshop price) (2 spots remain) Don Smith and Gary Hart Grand Canyon Monsoon and Lightning August 10-14 2015 (spots already filling) Private and Small Group Instruction

Page 23: Stockton Camera Club · 2018-09-06 · Stockton Camera Club The Shutter Tripper October2014 Hummer in Silhouette ... Stockton, CA 95202-2706 Phone: 209-464-2299 | Fax: 209-464-9229

23

2014 Photo Workshops 3rd Annual Fall Color and Mountain Grandeur Grand Teton National Park - September 23-27 2014 (WORKSHOP 1 - SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

3rd Annual Fall Color and Mountain Grandeur Grand Teton National Park - September 28-October 2 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

6th Annual Full Moon Over Red Rock Arches and Monument Valley Mittens ArchesCanyonlands National Parks and Full Moonrise at Monument Valley - October 4-8 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

4th Annual Bryce Canyon Hoodoos and ZIon Fall Color Photo Workshop Fall Photography Workshop Bryce Canyon and Zion National Parks - November 1-5 2014 (SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

2015 Photo Workshops 6th Annual Winter in Big Sur and the Monterey Peninsula - Magic Light Moonlight and Pfeiffer Beach Arch - January 4-7 2015 (4 spots left) 7th Annual Northern Arizona Workshop - Grand Canyon (with crescent moon) Page (Upper Antelope Canyon with light shafts and Horseshoe Bend) and Sedona - March 20-21 2015 (4 spots left) Springtime In Big Sur and the Monterey Peninsula - 7th Annual Wildflowers Full Moon Misty Fog and Headland Color Workshop - March 30 - April 2 2015 (3 spots remain) Don Smith and Gary Hart Spring at Oregons Columbia River Gorge Wildflowers and Waterfalls April 14 - 17 2015 (WORKSHOP SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY)

Don Smith and Gary Hart Spring at Oregons Columbia River Gorge Wildflowers and Waterfalls April 18 - 21 2015 (WORKSHOP SOLD OUT WAITING LIST ONLY) Kauai Photo Workshop June 19-23 (Sign up before September 1 to receive an Earl-Bird discount of $150 off the full workshop price) (2 spots remain) Don Smith and Gary Hart Grand Canyon Monsoon and Lightning August 10-14 2015 (spots already filling) Private and Small Group Instruction